JP2021171388A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably executing a game performance.SOLUTION: When game balls enter an upper operation hole or a lower operation hole, reservation information is acquired. Reservation read-ahead processing is executed with the acquired reservation information as an object, and a reservation notice performance with a display mode of a reservation image as a specific display mode is executed based on the result. A game machine includes a plurality of kinds of performance modes including a performance mode A, and a performance mode B having a lower execution probability of a reservation notice performance than that of the performance mode A. When a switching condition of a performance mode is satisfied, mode switching is performed among the plurality of kinds of performance modes. During execution of a reservation notice performance, restrictions are placed such that mode switching is not performed even if a switching condition of a performance mode is satisfied.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, it is known that a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and when the lottery result is a specific result, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-81853

Here, there is still room for improvement in the game production in the gaming machines and the like as illustrated above.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing a gaming effect.

The present invention
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and an acquisition information storage means.
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means and
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. The destination identification means for executing the destination identification process to be specified at the previous timing,
A specific notification means capable of executing specific notification by a predetermined notification means based on the result of the prior identification process, and a specific notification means.
When a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, an effect state switching means for executing a process for switching from one effect state among a plurality of types of effect states to another effect state, and an effect state switching means.
A switching limiting means capable of restricting the switching of the effect state by the effect state switching means when the specific notification is being executed, and a switching limiting means.
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform a game effect.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. (A) is a schematic view of the second operating port in the closed state, and (b) is a schematic view of the second operating port in the open state. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the closed state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the open state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning / failing table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the first special figure, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the second special figure. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for jackpots, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for losing. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt processing in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the hold look-ahead process. It is a block diagram which shows the electric composition of an effect control device and its peripheral device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process in MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of the storage area for hold. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hold notice effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hold change point during the game. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for hold notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the final display mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the production scenario lottery table. (A) is a flowchart showing the first execution process of the hold notice, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the display mode storage area. It is a figure for demonstrating the change suggestion effect. (A) is a flowchart showing the shift command correspondence process, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the shift process of the hold image. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for special figure variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching an effect mode. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the advance notice return. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the second execution of the hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd execution process of a hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the promotion process of a hold notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the promotion determination table. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching an effect mode. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd setting process for hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for special figure variation display. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode switching process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the return determination table. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display time table which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for hold notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the final display mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the final display mode lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the advance notice return. It is a figure which shows an example of the return determination table. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. (A) is a flowchart showing the information acquisition process according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the setting process of the hold command. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st hold look-ahead process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd hold look-ahead process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the advance notice return. It is a figure which shows an example of the upper limit display mode table. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for returning of the hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a display mode. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for special figure variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th execution process of a hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the promotion process of a hold notice. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a display mode. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode switching process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for mode switching. It is a figure which shows the mode of the switching restriction of an effect mode. It is a figure which shows the switching mode of the effect mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching an effect mode. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd setting process for hold notice. It is a figure which shows the display example of the hold image.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting plate members on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the amusement park.

The gaming machine main body 12 is supported by an outer frame 11 in a state where it can be opened and closed. Specifically, the upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further below to the connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. A side support metal fitting 18 is provided. A support mechanism is composed of the upper support metal fittings 17 and the lower support metal fittings 18, and the support mechanism causes the game machine main body 12 to rotate on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. It is possible to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the right side as the rotation tip side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit arranged behind the inner frame 13. It has 15. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 3).

Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front, and the window portion 21 is the same by the glass unit 22. It is closed from the back side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion that partitions the holding region of the glass panel 23 back and forth, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, the game area PE is doubly covered from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

It is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 by using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame body 20. Further, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to face each of the glass panels in the front-rear direction with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of the glass panel.

As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, a lamp portion (annular illumination portion) 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the peripheral edge of the window portion 21. The lamp unit 26 is lit or blinked according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, an error display lamp unit 27 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs is provided at the center of the lamp unit 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and a prize ball lamp that lights up during prize ball payout is provided on the left and right sides thereof. A portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to the game state is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28.

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 32 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 31, and a lower plate 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side described later while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 33.

Further, on the upper surface portion of the upper bulging portion 31, an effect operation unit 36 (specifically, a push operation button) that is manually operated by the player is provided. For example, by manually operating the effect operation unit 36 according to the suggestion displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, which will be described later, the effect content on the display screen G or the like becomes a predetermined effect content corresponding to the operation. Become.

A game ball launch handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to project toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism described later.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage leading to the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage leading to the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed in the upper corner portion thereof, and the entrance portion of the upper plate passage on the front door side is formed by partitioning the receiving portion to the left and right by a partition wall. A section is formed between the portion and the entrance portion of the lower plate passage on the front door side. The game ball that has entered the front door side upper plate passage is guided to the upper plate 33, and the game ball that has entered the front door side lower plate passage is guided to the lower plate 34.

On the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14, protrusion shafts are provided at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. These protrusion shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hook metal fittings 49 extending rearward are arranged side by side in the vertical direction on the rotation tip side on the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hook fittings 49 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. Further, the resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the resin base 50 (specifically, the lower end thereof), and the resin base 50 is placed on the curtain plate when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. ..

Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. Shaft holes are formed in the support metal fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the protruding shaft of the front door frame 14 into the shaft holes. ing.

Insertion holes for inserting the hook metal fittings 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the rotation tip side of the front surface of the resin base 50. As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, when the hook metal fitting 49 is locked to the locking device 55 (specifically, the hook receiving member for the front door) through the insertion hole, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 in an unopenable manner. Further, the locking device 55 has a plurality of inner frame hook members 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. The inner frame hook member 57 is hooked on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11 to lock the gaming machine main body 12 in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55, and when the key inserted into the keyway of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the lock of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 is released and the cylinder lock 58 is inserted into the keyway of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured so that the inner frame 13 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 11 when the key is turned counterclockwise.

A substantially elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is closed from the rear by a game board 60 mounted on the resin base 50. The game board 60 has a wooden plywood and a sheet material covering the front side plate surface of the plywood, and the front surface thereof is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. A game area PE on which the game ball flows down is formed on the exposed portion, that is, on the front surface of the game board 60. The game board 60 is not limited to wood, and may be made of synthetic resin.

Hereinafter, the game board 60 (particularly various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 60. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 61, a first operating port 62, a second operating port 63, a through gate 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 67, and the like.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 61, the variable winning device 65, the first operating port 62, and the second operating port 63, it is detected by the winning sensor (detection sensor), and a predetermined number is detected based on the detection result. Benefits such as payout of prize balls are given to the player. In this case, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 61, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 65, 15 game balls are paid out. Is executed. Further, when a ball enters the first operating port 62, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the second operating port 63, one game ball is paid out. Is executed. By the way, even if the ball enters the through gate 64, the game ball is not paid out.

The number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 62 and the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 63 may be the same, or the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 63 may be the same. The number of prize balls according to the above may be larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 62. Further, the number of prize balls related to the variable winning device 65 may be the same as or smaller than the number of prize balls related to other operating ports or the like. Further, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out when a ball enters the through gate 64.

An out port 68 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 60, and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the predetermined opening portion, and the game ball has passed through the opening portion as well as the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening portion. A mode in which the game area PE is not discharged later is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out opening 68, the entry into the general winning opening 61, the operating openings 62, 63, the variable winning device 65, or the through gate 64 is described. Also expressed as a prize.

Further, in the game board 60, a large number of nails 69 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. The flow of the game ball is diversified by various configurations such as the nail 69 and the windmill, and adjustments are made so that the above-mentioned general winning opening 61 and the like are won with an appropriate probability.

The variable display unit 67 is arranged at the center of the game board 60. The variable display unit 67 is installed on the back surface side of the game board 60 (FIG. 3), and the display screen G can be visually recognized through an opening provided in the center of the game board 60. A frame-shaped center frame 76 is attached to the front surface of the game board 60 so as to correspond to the peripheral edge of the opening.

The center frame 76 projects forward from the front surface of the game board 60, and the gap between the front surface of the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is avoided that the game ball flowing down the game area PE flows into the inner region of the center frame 76 and comes into contact with the display screen G. Further, the center frame 76 disperses the flow path when the game ball flows down the game area PE to the left and right, and forms a left route passing through the left side of the center frame 76 and a right route passing through the right side.

Whether the game ball flows down (passes) on the left route or the right route is determined by the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41, that is, the launching force of the game ball. Since the launched game ball enters the game area PE from the upper left side of the game board 60, the stronger the launching force of the game ball, the easier it is for the game ball to flow down the right route.

Specifically, when the player performs the rotation operation of the game ball launch handle 41 with the rotation operation amount in the first range which is equal to or more than the predetermined rotation amount and less than the reference rotation amount as the first launch operation, the launched game When the ball flows down the left route and the player performs a rotation operation of the game ball launch handle 41 with a rotation operation amount in the second range which is equal to or more than the reference rotation amount as the second launch operation, the launched game ball is released. Down the right route. The predetermined rotation amount is the rotation operation amount that enables the launched game ball to pass through the guidance rail 100 described later and enter the game area PE, and the reference rotation amount is the top of the center frame 76. It is the amount of rotation operation to launch a game ball with a reachable firing force.

Below the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67), a first operating port 62 opened upward is arranged. The first operating port 62 is located at the center of the left and right sides of the game board 60, but game parts such as nails 69 are arranged so that the game ball flowing down the right route does not win the first operating port 62. That is, only the game ball flowing down the left route can win the first operating port 62. Therefore, when the player aims to win a prize in the first operating port 62, the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left route to play the game. The first operating port 62 is provided with a winning sensor 62a (FIG. 7) for the first operating port, and the winning sensor 62a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first operating port 62.

A second operating port 63 is arranged on the right side of the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67). The configuration of the second operating port 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The second operating port 63 is provided with a general electric accessory 63a (variable receiving means) as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. Specifically, the pair of movable pieces rotatably supported in the left-right direction are arranged so as to sandwich the opening as the second operating port 63 from both the left and right sides.

Then, by rotating each of the movable pieces, the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) shown in FIG. 5A and the open state (supported state or guided state) shown in FIG. 5B are obtained. It is possible to switch to. Specifically, a protruding portion 63d is provided on the upper portion of the second operating port 63 so as to project forward, and when the movable piece is in an upright posture as shown in FIG. 5A, the movable piece is in an upright posture. The gap between each of the movable pieces and the protruding portion 63d becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the inflow of the game ball into the second operating port 63 is prevented. On the other hand, when the movable piece is rotated so as to be inclined outward as shown in FIG. 5B, an opening having a size capable of passing the game ball is formed between the movable piece and the protruding portion 63d. , The inflow of the game ball into the second operating port 63 is allowed. The second operating port 63 is provided with a winning sensor 63c for the second operating port, and the winning sensor 63c detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second operating port 63.

Further, the general electric accessory 63a is provided with a drive unit 63b for driving each movable piece. Each movable piece is driven by a drive unit 63b through a link mechanism (not shown) to switch between an open state (tilted posture) and a closed state (standing posture). Incidentally, the first operating port 62 is not provided with a general electric accessory (opening / closing structure).

In the above configuration, it is not possible to win a prize in the second operating port 63 when it is in the closed state, but it may be a configuration in which a prize can be won. That is, although it is possible to win a prize in the second operating port 63 in the closed state, it may be difficult to win a prize (it becomes difficult to win) than in the open state. The point is that the ease of winning a prize in the second operating port 63 may differ between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary. Further, the configuration of the general electric accessory 63a is not limited to the above, and for example, the second operating port 63 can be opened and closed by rotating the movable piece back and forth, or sliding it back and forth or left and right. It may be something to do.

As shown in FIG. 4, a through gate 64 is arranged above (upstream side) of the second operating port 63 on the right route. The through gate 64 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 64 passes through the through gate 64 and flows down the game area PE again. Therefore, the game ball that has won the through gate 64 can also win the second operating port 63. The through gate 64 is provided with a through winning sensor 64a (FIG. 7), and the winning sensor 64a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the through gate 64.

The through gate 64 is a trigger for opening the general electric accessory 63a provided in the second operating port 63. Specifically, an internal lottery is held with the winning of the through gate 64 as an opportunity, and the result of the internal lottery becomes an open result (support winning), so that the general electric accessory 63a is changed from the closed state to the open state. After that, the accessory opening / closing game (support execution mode) for returning to the closed state is executed.

On the right route, a variable winning device 65 is arranged below (downstream side) the second operating port 63. The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

The variable winning device 65 includes a large winning opening 65a that opens forward and an opening / closing door 65b that opens and closes the large winning opening 65a. The large winning opening 65a has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that allows a plurality of game balls to win at the same time. The large winning opening 65a communicates with the guide passage 65e provided on the back side of the game board 60, and all the game balls that have won the large winning opening 65a are guided to the guide passage 65e. A winning sensor 65c for a large winning opening is provided in the guide passage 65e, and the winning sensor 65c detects a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 65a.

Further, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a drive unit 65d for driving the opening / closing door 65b. The opening / closing door 65b is driven by a drive unit 65d through a link mechanism (not shown), so that the game ball cannot be won in the large winning opening 65a (FIG. 6A) and the game ball is placed in the large winning opening 65a. It can be switched to the open state (FIG. 6 (b)) where a prize can be won. Specifically, the opening / closing door 65b is normally closed, and is switched to the open state when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (big hit game) is won in the internal lottery.

The open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 65, in the case of a big hit, the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) is set as one round, and a plurality of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) are variable as an upper limit. There is an embodiment in which the winning device 65 is repeatedly opened.

In the above configuration, it is not possible to win a prize in the large winning opening 65a when it is in the closed state, but it may be a configuration in which a prize can be won. That is, in the closed state, it is possible to win a prize in the large winning opening 65a, but it may be a configuration in which it is harder to win (it becomes difficult to win) than in the open state. The point is that the ease of winning the large winning opening 65a differs between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

Here, for the second operating port 63, the through gate 64, and the variable winning device 65, only the game ball flowing down the right route can win a prize. Therefore, when the player aims to win a prize in the second operating port 63, the through gate 64, and the variable winning device 65, the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right route to play the game.

As shown in FIG. 4, a main display unit 81 is provided below the variable winning device 65. The main display unit 81 is arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area PE, and projects forward from the front surface of the game board 60. On the front surface of the main display unit 81, a special drawing display unit 43 and a general drawing display unit 44 for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like are provided. Each of these display units 43 and 44 can be visually recognized from the front through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14. The gap between the front surface of the main display unit 81 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball is prevented from passing in front of the main display unit 81, and the visibility of the various display units 43 and 44 is ensured.

The special figure display unit 43 is performed based on the first special figure display unit AS that displays the lottery result performed based on the winning of the first operating port 62 and the winning of the second operating port 63. A second special figure display unit BS for displaying the lottery result is provided.

In the first special figure display unit AS, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the first operating port 62 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, it is performed based on the winning of the first operating port 62. The result of the internal lottery will be specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 is the winning result corresponding to the big hit, the variable display is stopped on the first special figure display unit AS, and the predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result. After being displayed, the mode shifts to the above open / close execution mode.

In the second special figure display unit BS, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the second operating port 63 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, it is performed based on the winning of the second operating port 63. The result of the internal lottery will be specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63 is the winning result corresponding to the big hit, the variable display is stopped on the second special figure display unit BS, and the predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result. After being displayed, the mode shifts to the above open / close execution mode.

In the following, the former is referred to as the first special symbol in order to distinguish between the pattern that is variablely displayed when the first operating port 62 is won and the pattern that is variablely displayed when the second operating port 63 is won. Alternatively, it may be referred to as a first special figure, and the latter may be referred to as a second special symbol or a second special figure.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 62 and 63, the variation display is started on the corresponding special figure display units AS and BS, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. Corresponds to one game in the special figure display units AS and BS. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, and for example, a single display area is provided, and even if any of the operating ports 62 and 63 is won, the single one is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the game is played once until the variable display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed. And.

Further, the main display unit 81 is provided with a special figure reservation number display unit AM. The number of times the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is held up to four times, and the first special figure (first operation) is displayed on the special figure hold number display unit AM. The number of holdings of the port 62) and the number of holdings of the second special drawing (second operating port 63) can be displayed separately.

The general drawing display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 64. In this case, the display unit 44 for the general drawing performs a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 64, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning in the through gate 64. The result of is specified by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 64 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the support state for opening the general electric accessory 63a, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the general drawing display unit 44. Is displayed and the variable display is stopped, and then the state shifts to the support state. It should be noted that a pattern that is variablely displayed when a prize is won in the through gate 64 may be referred to as a normal pattern or a normal pattern.

Here, based on the winning of the through gate 64, the fluctuation display is started on the normal drawing display unit 44, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the fluctuation display is stopped until the normal drawing display unit 44 is stopped. Corresponds to one game in. In the following, in order to distinguish between the game times on the normal map display unit 44 and the game times on the special figure display units AS and BS, the former may be referred to as a normal figure game time and the latter may be referred to as a special figure game time.

Further, the normal drawing display unit 44 is provided with a normal drawing holding number display unit FM. The number of times the game ball has won the through gate 64 is held up to 4 times, and the number of holdings of the normal drawing (through gate 64) can be displayed on the FM holding number display unit. ..

The special drawing display unit 43 and the general drawing display unit 44 are composed of a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but the present invention is not limited to this, and are composed of other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device. You may.

In addition, although not shown, the main display unit 81 is provided with a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode. The round display unit starts displaying the number of rounds when the open / close execution mode is started or started. This display is continuously performed without changing the display contents while the open / close execution mode is being executed, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends or ends.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 is provided with a symbol display device 75 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol.

The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 75 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the symbol display device 75, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variation display in the symbol display device 75 is started based on the winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. That is, when the special figure display unit 43 performs the variable display, the symbol display device 75 also performs the variable display accordingly. Then, when the variable winning device 65 shifts to the jackpot game state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable winning device 65 is opened, the symbol display device 75 stops and displays a predetermined symbol combination on a preset effective line. ..

Further, the symbol display device 75 is subjected to hold display corresponding to the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS. In this hold display, a predetermined hold image is displayed, and the number of holds for each of the operating ports 63 and 64 is indicated by the number of the displayed images. The number of holdings is not limited to that shown by the holding image, and may be shown by numerical display. Further, the present invention is not limited to the symbol display device 75, and for example, a display unit provided on the game board 60 separately from the symbol display device 75 (a display unit separate from each hold number display unit AM and FM of the main display unit 81). The configuration may be indicated by a light emitting unit (holding lamp unit) or the like.

The configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described again with reference to FIG. Below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50, a game ball launching mechanism 110 for launching a game ball toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41 is provided. The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball arranged at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines a launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game ball at the launch standby position. The ball feeding device 113 and the base plate 114 on which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as the main configurations. The base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50, whereby the game ball launching mechanism 110 is integrated with the resin base 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in a state of being inclined obliquely so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. A ball stopper for holding the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 to the above-mentioned launch standby position is provided at a position closer to the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and a launch control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply and the launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the launch standby position is on the game board 60 side, in detail, the game. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 60.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the guide rail 100, the game area PE is divided into sections so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. Further, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the guide passage 103 is divided by both rails 101 and 102. It is formed. The guidance passage 103 has an entrance portion opened to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion located above the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guidance rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion).

In the game board 60, a reversion prevention member 106 for preventing the reversion of the game ball that has reached the game area PE into the guidance passage 103 is attached to the front side of the exit portion, specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game ball that reaches the game area PE first prevents the subsequent launch of the game ball from being hindered.

As shown in FIG. 2, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other with the lower end edge of the game board 60 interposed therebetween. .. That is, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged so that the inlet portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are displaced to the left and right near the lower end edge of the game board 60. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought close to the lower end edge of the game board 60, and a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the inlet portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is arranged below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE and returns in the guidance passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. It becomes. The foul ball passage 46 leads to the lower plate passage on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage 46 is discharged to the lower plate 34. As a result, the game ball that has become a foul ball is returned to the player while suppressing the interference between the foul ball and the game ball that is launched next.

In the resin base 50, a through hole is formed on the left side of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) through the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction, and a passage forming member is formed in this through hole. 121 is arranged. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has an upper plate passage on the main body side and a lower plate passage on the main body side. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage leads to a game ball distribution section described later. Further, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage. The front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage.

In the resin base 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage is attached. The opening / closing member 124 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at the lower end thereof, and an urging member that urges the front position to close the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side. It is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the drawing and closes the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage. As a result, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the upper plate passage on the main body side or the lower plate passage on the main body side, the inconvenience that the stored balls are spilled can be prevented. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the urging force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage and the front door side upper plate passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage communicate with each other.

Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

Bearing metal fittings 132 are arranged vertically on the rotation base end side on the back surface of the resin base 50. Bearing portions are formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

A plurality of locking metal fittings are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking metal fittings. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be described.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 arranged at the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). The effect control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The effect control device unit 142 is configured to include an effect control device 143 and a mounting base 144, and the effect control device 143 is mounted on the mounting base 144.

The effect control device 143 includes an effect control board that controls voice and lamp display and control of the display control device according to instructions from the main control device described later, and the effect control board is a substrate box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed in and composed of.

On the back surface of the game board 60, as shown in FIG. 3, a set plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67. The collecting plate 150 is provided with a game ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings, a detection mechanism for detecting the entry of game balls into various winning openings, and the like.

Explaining the game ball collection mechanism, the collecting plate 150 is provided with collection passages individually corresponding to various ball entry portions such as the general winning opening 61. These collection passages descend from the ball entry portion along the back surface of the game board 60, and define a fall path for the game ball. The collection passages meet near the lower end of the game board 60, and all the game balls that have passed through the entry part such as the general winning opening 61 gather at the lower part of the game board 60 through the collection passage. Become. The exit portion of each collection passage is open downward, and a discharge passage is provided on the front side thereof (specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered below the game board 60 by the collection passage are led out to the discharge passage. The out port 68 is also connected to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is also led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

Explaining the detection mechanism, the collecting plate 150 is provided with a winning sensor (detection sensor) individually corresponding to various winning portions such as the general winning opening 61. These various winning sensors are arranged in the middle of each collection passage connected to the ball entry portion such as the general winning opening 61, and the game ball is in a state where the drop path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage. Detect passage. That is, when the game ball passes through the detection area provided in the middle of each collection passage, the ball enters the entry port such as the general winning opening 61. The winning sensor is composed of, for example, a magnetic sensor that grasps a change in the magnetic field that occurs when the game ball passes through the detection area.

These various winning sensors are electrically connected to the main control device unit 160 (specifically, the main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and the detection signals of the winning sensors are transmitted to the main control device. Is output. Hereinafter, the main controller unit 160 and its associated configuration will be described.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the collecting plate 150 from the rear side, and is composed of a synthetic resin mounting base 161 and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. Has been done. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) for controlling the main control of the game, and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like. There is.

The substrate box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole that constitutes the sealing part, the box base and the box cover can be separated. It is designed to be combined so that it cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed, and once opened. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of sealing portions. Then, when the board box 163 is opened, such as when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the sealing portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing portion is connected. Disconnect. As a result, the box base of the board box 163 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other sealing portion. If the history of opening the board box 163 is left in the board box 163, it is possible to easily discover that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 163.

A plurality of bonding pieces are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 163 so as to project laterally. These coupling pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of bonded pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and the bonding pieces and the bonded pieces perform a sealing process between the substrate box 163 and the mounting base 161. Will be

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board 203, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 protruding rearward of the pachinko machine 10 to form a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. And have. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external output terminal 213 on the upper right side thereof. Various output terminals are provided on the external output terminal 213, and various signals are output to the hall computer HC (management control device) on the game hall side through these output terminals. Further, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins at the right end portion when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the hooking pins are inserted into a bearing metal fitting 132 (specifically, a bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. By allowing the back pack unit 15, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, the rotating tip portion of the base portion 211 is provided with a fastener for fastening to the hole to be fastened provided in the inner frame 13, and by fitting the fastener into the hole to be fastened. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

The payout mechanism portion 202 is arranged on the base portion 211 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged at the uppermost part of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. NS. A tank rail that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected below the tank 221 and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution section provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to any of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is on the main body side described above. It is formed so as to lead to the upper plate 33 via the upper plate passage and the upper plate passage on the front door side, and the outer opening leads to the lower plate 34 via the lower plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the front door side. ..

As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage board 203 and the control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion back and forth. The discharge passage board 203 is formed with a discharge passage that is open to the rear on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game ball led out from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like to the discharge passage passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base, and the payout control device 181 and the power supply and launch control device 191 are mounted on the mounting base. The payout control device 181 and the power supply and launch control device 191 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is housed in the board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box. For example, when the state return switch is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam can be cleared.

In the power supply and launch control device 191, a power supply and a launch control board are housed in a board box, and a predetermined power source required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and a game ball is launched by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of the handle 41.

The power supply and launch control device 191 are provided with a power failure monitoring unit (power failure monitoring circuit) 315 that monitors the power supply and detects the occurrence of a power failure state such as a power failure. This pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data so that it can retain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become. For example, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure as in the case of the closing of the game hall, the state before the shutoff is stored in memory. Further, the power supply and the firing control device 191 are provided with a RAM erasing switch. When the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 312 is mounted on the main control board 311 of the main control device 162. The MPU 312 is a ROM 313 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 312, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 313 is executed. A RAM 314, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in.

The RAM 314 has a configuration in which data can be held (backed up) by the backup voltage from the power supply and the emission control device 191 even after a power failure state occurs, and various data and the like are temporarily stored in the RAM 314. A backup area is provided in addition to the area for use. The backup area is an area for storing the stack pointer when the power is cut off, the values of each register, the I / O, and the like when a power failure occurs. At the time of recovery from the power failure state (at the time of power recovery), the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be returned to the state before the power failure based on the information in the backup area.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 7, the ROM 313 and the RAM 314 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 312, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of the control device other than the main control device 162.

The MPU 312 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 181 and a power supply and launch control device 191 are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. Further, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. The various sensors include the general winning opening 61, the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63, the through gate 64, the general winning opening winning sensor 61a for detecting the winning of the variable winning device 65, and the first operating port winning. A sensor 62a, a winning sensor 63c for the second operating port, a winning sensor 64a for the through, a winning sensor 65c for the large winning opening, and the like are provided. Based on the detection results of these various sensors 61a, 62a, 63c, 364a, 65c, the MPU 312 performs a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 312, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63, and the through gate 64.

A payout control device 181, an effect control device 143, and the like are connected to the output side of the MPU 312. The payout control device 181 outputs, for example, a prize ball command based on a winning determination result to the prize ball corresponding entry unit corresponding to the payout of the prize ball.

Various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the effect control device 143. In this case, the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, as various drive units, a drive unit 63b for the general electric accessory 63a and a drive unit 65d for the variable winning device 65 are connected to the output side of the MPU 312. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 311, and the MPU 312 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the shift to the open / close execution mode occurs, the drive control of the drive unit 65d is executed in the MPU 312 so that the open / close door 65b of the variable winning device 65 is driven. Further, when the transition to the support state occurs, the drive control of the drive unit 63b is executed in the MPU 312 so that each movable piece of the utility accessory 63a is driven. Further, at each special figure game, the display control of the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS in the special figure display unit 43 is executed. Further, at the time of the normal drawing game, the display control of the normal drawing display unit 44 is executed.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned external output terminal 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 312, and through this external output terminal 213, information on ball entry to various ball entry sections and information on lottery results such as jackpots can be sent to the hall computer HC. It is output. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the like.

The power supply and launch control device 191 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 311 and the payout control device 181 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power failure monitoring unit 315, and the power failure monitoring unit 315 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 191. The power failure monitoring unit 315 determines that a power failure (power interruption) has occurred when the output voltage from the power supply and launch control device 191 is less than 22 volts, and sends a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable) provided in the MPU 312 of the main control device 162. Output to the interrupt terminal). As a result, the main control device 162 recognizes the occurrence of a power failure and immediately executes the NMI interrupt process, and further executes the power failure process based on the NMI interrupt process. By the way, the power supply and the launch control device 191 are provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and when a power failure occurs or the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power is cut off. Power for storage and holding is supplied from the power supply unit to the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. Further, the power supply and the launch control device 191 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The effect control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 and controls the display control device 350 based on various commands input from the main control device 162. To do. The display control device 350 executes the display control of the symbol display device 75 based on the command input from the effect control device 143. In this case, the effect control device 143 determines the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 75 and the type of combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands input from the main control device 162. Determine whether or not reach occurs and the content of reach production.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 75 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10.

As shown in FIGS. 8 (a) to 8 (j), a design which is a kind of design consists of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped design. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done.

Five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variation display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal 4R jackpot result or the 10R probability variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a 10R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol is used. The combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a result per normal large 4R occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped. Is displayed.

Here, the variation display of each symbol sequence will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. When the game round is started, the high-speed fluctuation display is first started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 10A, the variation display mode of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize the symbol displayed in the variation. Then, as shown in FIG. 10B, the variation display of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is completed, and the variation display mode of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10 (c), the variation display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 ends. After the end of the fluctuation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a stop display period is provided in which the stop display is maintained and waits for a predetermined period.

By the way, in the gaming machine, when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 75, the symbol in the final stop row (middle symbol row Z2 in the present embodiment) is not stopped suddenly, but is gradually reduced while reducing the variable display speed. It is common to stop at. In this case, if the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) is configured to start stopping at the start of the stop display on the special symbol display unit 43, the deceleration time until the symbol stops on the symbol display device 75 is reduced. As a result, the time during which the symbol is stopped is shortened, resulting in a substantial reduction in the stop display time.

Therefore, before the start of the stop display on the special figure display unit 43, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 including the final stop row are stopped (temporarily stopped), and then the stop display on the special figure display unit 43 is performed. It is configured so that the temporarily stopped symbol is finally stopped (confirmed display) according to the start timing of. The display mode of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the temporary stop is different from that in the definite display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 gently reciprocates and finely moves, or at least a part of a character (FIG. 8) such as an octopus constituting the main symbol or the sub symbol moves. In other words, the temporary stop is performed so as to maintain an incomplete stopped state, although the design seems to be stopped at first glance (stop display). On the other hand, the confirmation display is performed so that the reciprocating fine movement and the movement of the character are not performed and the character is completely stopped.

The temporary stop display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 starts with the result of the winning / failing lottery or the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type, and then shifts to the confirmed display as it is, and the stop does not correspond to the winning / failing lottery result or the jackpot type. After the stop display is temporarily displayed as a result, the stop result may be changed to the stop result corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery through the re-variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and then the display may shift to the final display.

By the way, in the special figure game time executed by the special figure display unit 43, the temporary stop display of the picture is not performed, and the variable display picture is suddenly stopped according to the passage of the variable display time, and the state (picture). Is stopped and displayed) until the confirmed display time elapses. That is, the stop display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 43 becomes a definite display as it is. This also applies to the Fuzu game times executed by the Fuzu display unit 44.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, and includes the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and so on. The combination of symbols corresponding to big hits and misses can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 9B, a hold display unit 200 for displaying a number of hold images corresponding to the number of hold games before execution is provided at the lower part of the display screen G, and hold. By visually recognizing the display unit 200, the player can recognize the reserved number. In the hold display unit 200, a first hold display area Ga corresponding to the first special figure and a second hold display area Gb corresponding to the second special figure are set.

In the first hold display area Ga, the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of hold display when the game ball wins the first operation port 62 are divided and displayed so as to be arranged side by side in the left-right direction. There is. Specifically, when the game ball wins the first operating port 62, the maximum number of reserved balls is four, and in correspondence with this, the first reserved display area Ga includes the first unit reserved display area Ga1 and the first. The 2 unit hold display area Ga2, the 3rd unit hold display area Ga3, and the 4th unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings when the game ball wins the first operating port 62 is 1, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Ga1, and the game ball is the first operating opening. When the number of reserved images is 4 when the prize is won in 62, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the 1st unit reserved display area Ga1 to the 4th unit reserved display area Ga4.

Further, in the second hold display area Gb, the division display is performed so that the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the second operation port 63 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Has been done. Specifically, when the game ball wins the second operating port 63, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the second holding display area Gb includes the first unit holding display area Gb1 and the first. The 2 unit hold display area Gb2, the 3rd unit hold display area Gb3, and the 4th unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings is one when the game ball wins the second operating port 63, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Gb1, and the game ball is the second operating port. When the number of reserved images in the case of winning 63 is 4, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the 1st unit reserved display area Gb1 to the 4th unit reserved display area Gb4.

Further, the execution display area D is set so as to be sandwiched between the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb. In the execution display area D, a holding image corresponding to the game times to be executed (executed) is displayed. For example, when the game round ends and the next game round is started, the first unit hold display area Ga1 of the first hold display area Ga or the first unit hold display area Gb1 of the second hold display area Gb is displayed. The displayed hold image is moved and displayed in the execution display area D. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the reserved game times are executed.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 312 of main control device 162>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 312 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a setting of the display of the special drawing display unit 43, a setting of the display of the general drawing display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, FIG. 11 As shown in, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result, and the initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI used for the above and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in each special figure display unit AS and BS in the special figure display unit 43 are used. Further, a random number counter C3 per figure used for a lottery as to whether or not the universal accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is in the support state (open state) is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 314. In the lottery counter buffer 314a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS is stored in the acquired information when a prize is generated in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b as a means.

The holding ball storage area 314b includes a holding area RE including a first special drawing holding area Ra and a second special drawing holding area Rb, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb are provided with a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively, and a lottery counter is provided according to the winning history of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, respectively. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS stored in the buffer 314a is stored in any of the areas as hold information. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → the third area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 can be reserved and stored. Further, the holding ball storage area 314b is provided with a total holding number storage area, and the total holding number storage area holds the winning history of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. Information for identifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 43, and is executed at the start of one game. Based on various numerical information stored in the area AE, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, reach the maximum value (that is, 199), and then return to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 199). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first special drawing of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62, and the second special drawing of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 63. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 313a as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 313. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described with reference to FIG.

In the pass / fail table, the address information consisting of binary information and the jackpot numerical information also consisting of binary information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address information is represented by a decimal number and five types of "1" to "5" are set, and the jackpot numerical information is represented by a decimal number of "7", "17", and "27". , "37", and "47" are set, and these address information and jackpot numerical information are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical information is included in "0" to "199", which is a numerical range of random number information that can be updated by the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the low-probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the high-probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low-probability mode, only the jackpot numerical information whose address information is "1" is referred to in the winning / losing lottery, and in the high-probability mode, the jackpot numerical information corresponding to all the address information is referred to in the winning / losing lottery. Seen. That is, in the low-probability mode, there is one numerical information that wins the jackpot, and in the high-probability mode, there are five more than in the low-probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a big hit in the low probability mode is 1/200, whereas the probability of winning a big hit in the high probability mode is 1/40, and the high probability mode is a big hit than the low probability mode. The probability of winning is high. In each lottery mode, the lottery result is out of order except for the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is for sorting the types when a jackpot is hit, and is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. It has become. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first special drawing of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62, and the second special drawing of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 63. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of ROM 313. Here, the jackpot type table will be described with reference to FIG.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special figure (FIG. 13 (a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special figure (FIG. 13 (b)) are set. If the jackpot is based on the winning of the first operating port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special figure is referred to, and if the jackpot is based on the winning of the second operating port 63, the first 2 The jackpot type table for special figures is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 13A, in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, a 4R probability variation jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. Each of these jackpot results results in four round games being executed. Here, the round game is a game in which the variable winning device 65 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the variable winning control for changing to the closed state is executed at least once. In the present embodiment, the variable winning control is executed once for one round game.

The 4R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the support mode in the general electric accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. Is. In this case, the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the next jackpot occurs (until the next open / close execution mode is started). By the way, while the open / close execution mode is being executed, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the winning frequency to the second operating port 63 is higher when compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area PE. The driving mode of the general electric accessory 63a is controlled so as to be relatively high and low. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the winning probability of the normal-figure winning / failing lottery using the random number counter C3 per normal-figure is higher than that in the low-frequency support mode. The number of times the accessory 63a is opened is also larger in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is also longer in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a prize is generated in the second operating port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 62 is higher than that of the second operating port 63, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than the first operating port 62. The probability that a prize will be given to the mouth 63 increases. Then, when a prize is won in the second operating port 63, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. The number of times the accessory 63a is opened and the opening time of one time may be given preferential treatment over the low-frequency support mode. In short, it suffices if the winning frequency to the second operating port 63 per unit time is higher than that in the low-frequency support mode, and any one of the conditions of the winning / failing lottery, the number of opening times, and the opening time is arbitrary. By differentiating the combination conditions, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set.

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the support mode in the general electric accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. Is. The high-frequency support mode in this case is continued until the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 100 times). When the maximum number of times is reached, the high-frequency support mode ends, and the support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode while the lottery mode remains the low-probability mode. That is, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the low frequency support mode is set.

In the present embodiment, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 4R probability variation jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 4R probability variation jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being distributed to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 13B, in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, a 10R probability variation jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. The 10R probability variation jackpot result is that the number of round games executed is 10 times. Further, in the 10R probability variation jackpot result, the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the support mode in the general electric accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. It is a big hit result. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode in this case are continued until the next big hit occurs.

The 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type table for the second special figure is the same as the 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type for the first special figure. That is, when a 4R normal jackpot result is obtained by winning a prize in the second operating port 63, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode, and the opening / closing execution mode is performed. The state is continued until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 100 times).

In the present embodiment, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to the 4R normal jackpot result. That is, the probability of being distributed to the 10R probability variation jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being distributed to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As described above, the probability of being distributed to the probability variation jackpot result is the same regardless of whether the type table of the first special figure display unit or the type table of the second special figure display unit. However, when the probability variation jackpot result is selected, the type table of the second special figure display unit is set to have a 16R jackpot result, whereas the type table of the first special figure display unit is set to have a 4R jackpot result. Has been done. That is, when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the second operating port 63, the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode is larger than that of the case where the probability variation jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the first operating port 62. The number will increase, and it will be possible to expect more game balls to be paid out. That is, the game in which the game ball is won in the second operating port 63 is more advantageous to the player than the game in which the game ball is won in the first operating port 62.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player between the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that the second operating port 63 of the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63 will be awarded, and accordingly, the second operating port 63 The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode, which increases the frequency of winning prizes, increases.

In addition, the jackpot type counter C2 determines the stop result of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on each special figure display unit AS and BS when the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 62 and 63 becomes a jackpot. Is also used. The stop result is determined with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, a plurality of data of the stop result (the big hit pattern displayed on the special figure display unit AS and BS) in the case of a big hit are set in correspondence with the value of the big hit type counter C2. When determining the stop result, the data corresponding to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is read from the plurality of stop result data. Here, since the same jackpot type counter C2 is used for both the determination of the stop result and the determination of the jackpot type, the jackpot pattern that is stopped and displayed on each special figure display unit AS and BS and the jackpot determined at the time of the jackpot are used. The types correspond to each other.

The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS of the special figure display unit 43.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the variable type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first special drawing of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62, and the second special drawing of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 63. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the variation display time with respect to the variation type counter CS is stored as the variation display time table in the variation display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. Here, the variable display time table will be described with reference to FIG.

As the variable display time table, a variable display time table for jackpots (FIG. 14 (a)) and a variable display time table for deviation (FIG. 14 (b)) are set. If the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is a big hit, the variable display time table for the big hit is referred to, and the winning of each of the above operating ports 62 and 63 is performed. If the result of the winning / failing lottery is out of order, the variable display time table for out of order is referred to.

In each fluctuation display time table, the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation pattern information are set in association with each other. In FIG. 14, information on the fluctuation display time is described together with the fluctuation pattern in order to facilitate understanding. However, the information on the fluctuation display time includes the fluctuation display time table as time information corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. Is separately stored in ROM 313.

As shown in FIG. 14A, in the fluctuation display time table for jackpot, fluctuation pattern 1A (15 sec), fluctuation pattern 2A (60 sec), fluctuation pattern 3A (60 sec), and fluctuation are available as selectable fluctuation patterns. A pattern 4A (120 sec) and a fluctuation pattern 5A (120 sec) are set. When a variation pattern is selected using the variation type counter CS, the variation of the pattern on the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS at the variation display time corresponding to the selected variation pattern. The display is done.

When a fluctuation pattern is selected, information indicating the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 143 as a fluctuation start command. The effect control device 143 grasps the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received fluctuation start command. Then, the display control device 350 is controlled so that the fluctuation display of each of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is performed at the fluctuation display time corresponding to the grasped fluctuation pattern. As a result, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS.

In addition, each variation pattern also corresponds to a game rotation effect such as a reach effect performed by the symbol display device 75. Specifically, the variation pattern 1A corresponds to the effect per normal reach, the variation pattern 2A corresponds to the effect per SP reach (super reach) A, the variation pattern 3A corresponds to the effect per SP reach B, and the variation pattern 4A corresponds to the effect per SP reach B. The variation pattern 5A corresponds to the effect per SPSP reach B, and corresponds to the effect per SPSP reach B. That is, the effect control device 143 controls the display control device 350 so that when the variation pattern is grasped from the received variation start command, the game rotation effect corresponding to the variation pattern is performed by the symbol display device 75.

In each of the reach hit effects, after the reach display is performed, each of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol combination. Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 75 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result (big hit). In the case of (result), in the gaming machine in which the gaming state becomes the special gaming state (open / close execution mode) which is advantageous to the player, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (design) on the symbol display device 75 is started. This is a display state for the player to think that the special display result is likely to be a variable display state before the stop display result is derived and displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state is established. It is a display state in which a combination of possible reach symbols is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are variablely displayed in the remaining symbol rows. More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of the symbol, the symbol of the symbol row other than the final stop row is hit on the effective line in the display screen G in the state where the symbol of the final stop row is variablely displayed. The reach line is formed by displaying the stop display in the manner of constructing the symbol combination of.

In the normal reach hit effect, after the above reach display is performed, the symbols are stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbols. The SP reach effect is a higher reach effect than the normal reach effect, and a predetermined effect in which a character or the like appears after the formation of the reach line is performed, and after the predetermined effect, the symbol is stopped and displayed by a jackpot symbol combination. be. The contents of the predetermined effect after the reach line is formed are different between the SP reach A effect and the SP reach B effect. The SPSP reach effect is a higher reach effect than the SP reach effect, and after the development effect developed from the SP reach effect is performed, the symbols are stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbols. The SPSP reach A production develops from the SP reach A production, and the SPSP reach B production develops from the reach B production.

The items in the "Remarks (effect mode)" column in FIG. 14A are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in FIG. 14B, in the variation display time table for deviation, the variation pattern 1H, the variation pattern 2H (15 sec), the variation pattern 3H (60 sec), and the variation pattern 4H (variation pattern 4H) are selectable variation patterns. 60 sec), the fluctuation pattern 5A (120 sec), and the fluctuation pattern 6H (120 sec) are set. The point that the fluctuation display time is set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern is the same as the fluctuation display time table for jackpots, but the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 1H is the first special figure or the first special figure at that time. It varies depending on the number of reservations in the second special figure. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern 1H is selected in the situation where the number of holdings is 2 or less, the fluctuation display time is 8 sec, and when the fluctuation pattern 1H is selected in the situation where the number of holdings is 3 or more. Is configured so that the variable display time is 4 sec, which is shorter than 8 sec.

The variation pattern 1H corresponds to the complete deviation effect on the symbol display device 75, the variation pattern 2H corresponds to the normal reach deviation effect, the variation pattern 3H corresponds to the SP reach A deviation effect, and the variation pattern 4H corresponds to the SP reach B deviation effect. The variation pattern 5H corresponds to the SPSP reach A out-of-effect effect, and the variation pattern 6H corresponds to the SPSP reach B out-of-effect effect.

In the complete off effect, the symbols are stopped and displayed by the combination of the off symbols without the reach display being performed. Further, in each of the above-mentioned out-of-reach effects, after the reach is displayed, each of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is a combination of out-of-reach symbols (the symbol in the final stop row that is stopped and displayed on the reach line is the reach symbol. It is stopped and displayed in a state where the symbol is other than the symbol that forms a big hit by the combination). It should be noted that the SP reach A off effect corresponds to the SP reach A per effect, and after the same type of predetermined effect as the SP reach A per effect is performed, the symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols out of reach. Is. Further, the SP reach B off-effect, the SPSP reach A off-effect, and the SPSP reach B off-out effect also correspond to the SP reach B per effect, the SPSP reach A per effect, and the SPSP reach B off effect, respectively.

In the fluctuation display time table for jackpots, "0" of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "12" correspond to the fluctuation pattern 2A, and "13" to "28" correspond to the fluctuation pattern. Corresponding to 3A, "29" to "63" correspond to the fluctuation pattern 4A, and "64" to "99" correspond to the fluctuation pattern 5A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for deviation, "0" to "59" of the fluctuation type counter CS correspond to the fluctuation pattern 1H, "60" to "79" correspond to the fluctuation pattern 2H, and "80" to "80". "89" corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 3H, "90" to "96" corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 4H, "97" to "98" corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 5H, and "99" corresponds to the fluctuation pattern 6H. doing.

When the result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 62 and 63 is the jackpot result, the variation pattern 5A corresponding to the SPSP reach B effect is most likely to be selected, and the result of the winning / failing lottery is the wrong result. The variation pattern 6H corresponding to the SPSP reach B effect is the most difficult to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach B effect is the reach effect that is most easily executed when it is a big hit and is the most difficult to be executed when it is a miss, so it functions as the highest reach effect with the highest expectation of a big hit. Become.

Fluctuation patterns other than the variation pattern 5A and the variation pattern 6H are also more likely to be selected when the jackpot is higher and are less likely to be selected when the variation pattern corresponds to the higher reach effect. That is, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the order of normal reach production <SP reach A production <SP reach B production <SPSP reach A production.

The random number counter C3 per normal figure is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value (that is, 250), and then return to 0. The random number counter C3 per normal figure is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal figure holding area 314c of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 64. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric accessory 63a to the open state according to the value of the stored random number counter C3. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the utility accessory 63a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the utility accessory 63a is not controlled to the open state.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 162>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described. The processing of the MPU 312 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing and a normal processing that are executed to advance the game, and an NMI that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is interrupt processing. For convenience of explanation, NMI interrupt processing and timer interrupt processing will be described first, and then main processing and normal processing will be described.

<NMI interrupt processing>
The NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring unit 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 312, and the MPU 312 interrupts the control during execution. Starts NMI interrupt processing.

In the NMI interrupt process, first, in step S11, the data of the register used in the MPU 312 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 314. In step S12, a power failure flag (information on the occurrence of a power failure state) is set in the backup area. In step S13, the data saved in the backup area is returned to the used register of the MPU 312 again, and then the NMI interrupt processing is terminated. If the power failure flag can be set without destroying the data in the register used by MPU 312, the processes in steps S11 and S13 can be omitted.

After executing the NMI interrupt process, the power failure process is executed by confirming that the power failure flag is set in the normal process described later. The process will be described later.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 312.

In step S101, the reading process of various winning sensors is executed. That is, the state of various winning sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, and the state of the winning sensor (detection information from the winning sensor) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that a prize has been generated in the first operating port 62, the winning detection flag for the first special figure is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314, and the second operating port 63 is won. When it is determined that the occurrence has occurred, the winning detection flag for the second special figure is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 64, the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314.

In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the normal figure per random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the random number counter C3 per normal figure are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step S104, a winning process for through winning is executed in association with winning the through gate 64. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not the through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the normal figure holding area 314c. The value of the random number counter C3 per normal figure updated in step S103 is stored in the normal figure holding area 314c on condition that the number of stored characters on hold is less than 4. When the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e, the winning detection flag for the through gate is deleted and the winning process for the through gate is completed.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, executing the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 62 and 63, and ending this timer interrupt process.

<Prize processing for operating port>
The winning process for the operating port in step S105 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first operating port 62 based on the detection state of the winning sensor 62a for the first operating port. When it is determined that the game ball has won the first operating port 62, in step S202, a prize ball command for paying out three game balls is set in the payout control device 181.

In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 62. In step S204, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first special figure hold area Ra is read, and the start hold storage number RaN held and stored in the first special figure hold area Ra is set (hereinafter). , 1st start hold storage number RaN). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S201 (when a prize has not been generated in the first operating port 62), the process proceeds to step S206, and whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second operating port 63. Is determined by the detection state of the winning sensor 63c for the second operating port. When it is determined that the game ball has won the second operating port 63, a prize ball command for paying out one game ball is set in the payout control device 181 in step S207.

In step S208, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 63. In step S209, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second special figure hold area Rb is read, and the start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold store in the second special figure hold area Rb is set (hereinafter). , Second start hold storage number RbN). After that, the information acquisition process is performed in step S205, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S206 (when no prize has been awarded to the second operating port 63), the main prize processing is terminated as it is.

The prize ball command set in step S202 or step S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S209 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number of the corresponding special figure hold areas Ra and Rb in step S302. N is incremented by 1. In step S303, the value stored in the total number of reservations storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common number of reservations CRN) is incremented by one.

In step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first storage area among the free storage area areas of the corresponding reservation area for the special figure display unit, that is, in step S302. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages incremented by 1.

That is, when the start hold storage number RaN for the first special figure is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS is set in the hold area Ra for the first special figure. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area, that is, the hold area Ra corresponding to the start hold storage number RaN for the first special figure incremented by 1 in step S302.

When the start hold storage number RbN for the second special figure is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS is set to the hold area Rb for the second special figure. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area, that is, the hold area Rb corresponding to the start hold storage number RbN for the second special figure incremented by 1 in step S302.

In step S305, a hold look-ahead process for executing the hold notice effect described later is executed. The details of the hold look-ahead processing will be described later. After the execution of step S305, the information acquisition process ends.

<Main processing>
The main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The main processing is when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the external power is supplied, or when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is executed when an external power supply is supplied.

First, in step S2001, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed. Specifically, the wait process is executed for, for example, about 1 second in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (payout control device 181 or the like) to be in an operable state. In the following step S2002, access to the RAM 314 is permitted.

In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch of the power supply and emission control device 191 is turned on, and in the following step S2004, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. In step S2005, the RAM determination value is calculated, and in step S2006, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the RAM determination value calculated in step S2005 is compared with the RAM determination value saved when the power failure state occurs, and it is determined whether or not the two match. Then, when the two match, it is assumed that the RAM determination value is normal, and the data stored and held in the RAM 314 is recognized as valid. On the contrary, when the two do not match, the RAM determination value is regarded as abnormal, and the data stored and held in the RAM 314 is recognized as invalid. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 314. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 314 are correctly stored.

If the RAM determination value is normal, the process proceeds to step S2007, the value of the stack pointer saved in the backup area is written to the stack pointer of the MPU 312, and the stack state is restored to the state before the power was cut off. In step S2008, a power recovery command for returning the sub-side control device (payout control device 181 or the like) to the gaming state before the power failure is output. In step S2009, the power failure flag stored in the backup area is cleared. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S2010, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2003 (when the RAM erase switch is pressed) or a negative judgment is made in step S2006 (when the RAM judgment value is not normal), the process proceeds to step S2011, and the control device on the sub side (payout control) An initialization command is output to initialize the device 181 etc.). In step S2012, the used area of RAM 314 is cleared to 0, and in step S2013, the initialization process of RAM 314 is executed. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S2010, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S401 to S408 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S409 and S410 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. If an effect command such as a variation start command, a type command, or a variation end command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 143.

In step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step S403, the game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game time control process, jackpot determination, display control of the special figure display unit 43, and the like are performed.

In step S404, the game state transition process is executed. By this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game times control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In step S405, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the general electric accessory 63a provided in the second operating port 63 is executed. In this electric service support process, whether or not to open the general electric service object 63a by using the numerical information acquired from the random number counter C3 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding area 314c of the RAM 314 is used. A winning / failing lottery is performed, and if a winning result is won, the opening / closing process of the general electric accessory 63a is executed. In addition, the display control of the normal drawing display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the normal drawing winning / failing lottery.

Here, as described above, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as modes of support by the Fuden accessory 63a, and the game state transition process described later switches to either support mode. The migration takes place. Through this process, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314, the high-frequency support mode is set, and when the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric accessory 63a is in the open state when the electric service open state is won is set more than in the case of the low-frequency support mode, and once. Set a long opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric service open state is won and the open state of the general electric accessory 63a occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time is set to be shorter than the one-time opening time.

In step S406, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 191. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In step S407, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. The power failure flag is set by the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 15) executed when the power failure state occurs, and is for the MPU 312 to grasp the occurrence of the power failure state.

When the power failure flag is not stored (when the power failure state has not occurred), in step S408, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the current normal process ( In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S409, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314. Further, in step S410, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S407 (when the power failure flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S411 to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt process. In step S412, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314, and in step S413, the power failure flag is set in the backup area.

In step S414, the RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 314. In step S415, access to the RAM 314 is prohibited, and then an infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Even after the power supply is completely cut off, the power supply and the emission control device 191 supply the power supply for holding the data storage of the RAM 314. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 314 before the power supply is cut off remains as it is. It is retained for a period of time (eg, 1 or 2 days).

<Game times control processing>
The game turn control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the processes after step S502, that is, the game round start process of steps S502 to S505, the game round progress process of steps S506 to S507, and the game round end of steps S508 to S509. This game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the special figure game round is not started regardless of whether or not the operating ports 62 and 63 have been won.

It should be noted that the game times (general game games) based on the winning / losing lottery triggered by winning the through gate 64 are executed regardless of whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. That is, although the execution of the special figure game times is restricted during the open / close execution mode, the normal figure game times are executed in the same manner as when not in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, when the result of the normal drawing winning / failing lottery is a winning result in the opening / closing execution mode, the second operating port 63 (general electric accessory 63a) is opened.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the special figure display unit 43 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS is in the variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The variation display flag is stored when the variation display is started for either the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS, and is deleted when the variation display ends.

If the special figure display unit 43 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S503, and it is determined whether or not the common hold number CRN is “0”. When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first operation port 62 and the second operation port 63. Therefore, the game times control process is terminated as it is.

When the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data for setting the data stored in the first special figure hold area Ra or the second special figure hold area Rb for variable display in step S504. After executing the setting process and further executing the variation start process for starting the variation display on the special figure display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 75 in step S505, the game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second special figure is “0”. When the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure (first operation port 62) of steps S602 to S608 is executed, and the second start hold storage number RbN becomes If it is not "0", the data setting process for the second special figure (second operating port 63) of steps S609 to S615 is executed.

As described above, when the data setting process is performed when the common hold number CRN is 1 or more, the situation in which the data setting process is executed is the first start hold storage number RaN and the second start hold storage number. It means that at least one of RbN is 1 or more. In this case, in the data setting process, it is first determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", and the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", that is, the second special figure. It is configured to execute the process related to the hold information for the first special figure on the condition that the hold information for the first special figure does not exist. Therefore, when the hold information is stored in both the first special figure hold area Ra and the second special figure hold area Rb, the second special figure stored in the second special figure hold area Rb. The hold information for the figure (second operating port 63) is preferentially processed.

In the data setting process for the first special figure, first, in step S602, the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first special figure is decremented by one. In step S603, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step S604, the data stored in the first area of the first special drawing reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

In step S605, a process of shifting the data (held information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area Ra is executed. In this process, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in the second area to the fourth area is sequentially moved to the lower area.

In step S606, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The second special figure flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the holding information of the second operating port 63 exists. If the second special figure flag is stored, the second special figure flag is deleted in step S607.

After the execution of step S607 or when a negative determination is made in step S606 (when the second special figure flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S608, and the effect control device 143 is informed that the data in the hold area has been shifted. Set the shift command (shift occurrence information) for notification. In this case, from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313 to the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the hold area Ra for the first special figure, that is, to the first operation port 62. A shift command including the corresponding information is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S608 is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). Based on the received shift command, the effect control device 143 executes a process for changing the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

In the data setting process for the second special figure, first, in step S609, the second start hold storage number RbN of the second special figure hold area Rb is decremented by one. In step S610, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step S611, the data stored in the first area of the second special drawing reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

In step S612, a process of shifting the data (held information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area Rb is executed. In step S613, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the second special figure flag is not stored, the second special figure flag is set in step S614.

After the execution of step S614 or when a positive determination is made in step S613 (when the second special figure flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S615, and the control device on the sub side indicates that the data in the hold area has been shifted. A shift command (shift generation information), which is information for being recognized by the effect control device 143, is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, it corresponds to the information that the hold area targeted for the data shift this time corresponds to the hold area Rb for the second special figure, that is, the second operation port 63. A shift command including information about what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S613 is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). Based on the received shift command, the effect control device 143 executes a process for changing the display in the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. The high-probability mode flag is for the MPU 312 to know that it is in the high-probability mode, and is set when shifting to the high-probability mode.

If it is not in the high-probability mode, the pass / fail judgment is performed in step S702 with reference to the pass / fail table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning for the low probability mode (for example, "7"). .. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, the pass / fail judgment is performed by referring to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode in step S703. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is set as the jackpot winning for the high probability mode (for example, "7", "17", "27", "37". , "47") to determine whether or not they match.

After the execution of step S702 or step S703, in step S704, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination in step S702 or step S703 is a big hit. If the jackpot is won, in step S705, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. If the second special figure flag is not stored, in step S706, a lottery for the jackpot type is performed with reference to the type table (FIG. 13 (a)) for the first special figure display unit. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 4R probability variation jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

On the other hand, when the second special figure flag is stored, in step S707, a lottery for the jackpot type is performed with reference to the type table for the second special figure (FIG. 13 (b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 10R probability variation jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

After the execution of step S706 or step S707, the type flags indicating the jackpot types selected by the lottery in S706 or step S707 in step S708 are stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. For example, when the jackpot type selected by lottery is a 10R probability variation jackpot, the 10R probability variation jackpot flag is stored.

In step S709, the stop result for the jackpot is set with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result of the current game round.

If a negative determination is made in step S704 (when a big hit does not occur), the process proceeds to step S710, and a stop result for disengagement is set. In the present embodiment, only one type of stop result for disengagement is provided, and the stop result is set in step S710.

After the execution of step S709 or step S710, in step S711, the variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the current game times in the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS. To execute.

Here, the variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination in the current game round is a big hit. If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S802, and a variable display time table (FIG. 14A) for the big hit is acquired as a table for drawing the variable display time (variable pattern). On the other hand, if it is not a big hit but a miss, the process proceeds to step S803 to acquire a variable display time table (FIG. 14 (b)) for the miss.

After the execution of step S802 or step S803, in step S804, the lottery process of the variation display time (variation pattern) is executed using the variation display time table acquired in step S802 or step S803. Specifically, one fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is specified from the fluctuation pattern group set in the fluctuation display time table.

In step S805, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified in step S804 is set as the variation display time of the current game times. In this step, the value of the fluctuation display time corresponding to the specified fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. For example, when the fluctuation display time is 15 sec, 7500 is set in the fluctuation display time counter area as a corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is activated. After the execution of step S805, the variable display time setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 23), after the execution of step S711, the variation start command and the type command are set in step S712. The fluctuation start command contains information on the fluctuation pattern. As the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern for jackpot and the fluctuation pattern for deviation are set separately (FIG. 14). Therefore, in the effect control device 143, the fluctuation pattern is analyzed from the fluctuation start command, so that the main control device 162 It is possible to determine the result of the winning / failing determination performed in. That is, the fluctuation start command includes not only the information regarding the fluctuation display time but also the information regarding the result of the winning / failing determination. In addition, the type command includes information on the jackpot type. The type command is set only when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit.

The fluctuation start command and the type command set in step S712 are transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 75, and the determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 143 to the display control device 350 as a display content command. NS. The display control device 350 controls the display of the symbol display device 75 so that the variable display of the symbol corresponding to each game is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 143.

In step S713, the variable display of the special figure display unit 43 is started. At that time, referring to the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314, when the second special figure flag is stored, it is assumed that this game time corresponds to the second special figure, and the pattern of the second special figure display unit BS Is displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, when the second special figure flag is not stored, the pattern of the first special figure display unit AS is variablely displayed, assuming that the current game times correspond to the first special figure. After the execution of step S713, the variable start processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the game times control process (FIG. 21), if an affirmative judgment is made in step S502 (when the special figure display unit 43 is in the variable display), the process proceeds to step S506, and the variable display time of the current game times is reached. Determines whether or not has passed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 314 is "0".

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display processing, the special figure display unit is displayed and controlled so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the special figure display unit related to the current game round (light emission control of each display segment). )do. After the execution of step S507, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S508. In the variation end processing, the special figure display units AS and BS are controlled so that the pattern displayed in the variation is stopped and displayed with the stop result set in step S709 or step S710.

In step S509, the variable end command is set, and then the game round control process is ended. The variation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The effect control device 143 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 350 while maintaining the information form. By receiving the fluctuation end command, the display control device 350 makes a definite display (final stop display) of the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round.

<Game state transition process>
The game state transition process of step S404 (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display on each special figure display unit AS and BS ends (confirmation display ends). If it is not the end timing of the variable display, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When it is the end timing of the variation display, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, that is, whether or not the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. do. In this step, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit by referring to whether or not the type flag (step S708 in FIG. 23) is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314. If the game result of this game time does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the main game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S903 (when the game result of this game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode), the process proceeds to step S904 to execute the start processing of the open / close execution mode. In the start process, the open / close execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. In addition, an opening period for waiting for the start of the first round is set while the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state. Further, when the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support flag are stored in the various flag storage areas 314e, a process of deleting these flags is executed.

In step S905, a round display start process for notifying the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode is executed. In this step, the current jackpot type is grasped based on the type flags stored in the various flag storage areas 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. The display of the number of rounds on the round display unit is continued until the open / close execution mode ends.

In step S906, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot result. If it is not a 10R probability variation jackpot result, that is, if it is either a 4R probability variation jackpot result or a 4R normal jackpot result, "4" is set in the round counter area RC provided in various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 in step S907. do. On the other hand, if the jackpot type this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot result, "10" is set in the round counter area RC in step S908.

After the execution of step S907 or step S908, in step S909, an opening command for notifying the effect control device 143 of the start of the opening and the opening period is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

In step S910, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to the output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. You can grasp what you have done.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901 (when the open / close execution mode is in progress), the process proceeds to step S911 to determine whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not passed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the opening period has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S912.

Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 65a is being opened. This determination is made based on the driving state of the driving unit 65d. If the large winning opening 65a is not open, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", that is, if there is a round game to be executed, the value of the timer area T provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314 in step S1003 is "0". Determine if it exists. This process determines whether or not the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T is "0", the process proceeds to step S1004, and the timer area T is set to "15000" as a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time (30 sec) of the variable winning device 65 in one round game. To set. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is activated. In step S1005, “10” is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 344b as a value corresponding to the maximum number of winnings (10) to the variable winning device 65 in one round game.

In step S1006, the variable winning drive unit 32c is driven in order to open the large winning opening 65a. In step S1007, an opening command for notifying the effect control device 143 that the opening of the large winning opening 65a (variable winning device 65) has started is set, and then the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is ended. This set release command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1002 (when the value of the round counter area RC is 0) or a negative judgment is made in step S1003 (when the value of the timer area T is not 0), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is performed as it is. finish.

Further, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S1001 (when the large winning opening 65a is being opened), the process proceeds to step S1008, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area T is "0". This process determines whether or not the upper limit opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in step S1004 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1009, and it is determined whether or not the winning opening 65a has been won based on the detection state of the winning sensor 65c for the winning opening. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when a prize has been generated, the value of the prize counter area PC is decremented by 1 in step S1010, and then whether or not the value of the prize counter area PC is "0" is determined in step S1011. judge. If the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

If the affirmative judgment is made in step S1008 (when the value of the timer area T is 0) or when the affirmative judgment is made in step S1011 (when the value of the winning counter area PC is 0), the process proceeds to step S1012 and the drive unit The 65d is switched to the non-driving state and the large winning opening 65a is closed. In step S1013, the value of the round counter area RC is decremented by 1, and in step S1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”.

If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", that is, if there are remaining round games, the process proceeds to step S1015, and the period of waiting for the start of the next round game with the variable winning device 65 closed. As a value corresponding to (2 sec), "1000" is set in the timer area T.

In step S1016, a closing command for notifying the effect control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round game has ended) is set, and then the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is ended. The set closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1014 (when the value of the round counter area RC is 0), that is, when the final round of the open / close execution mode is completed, the process proceeds to step S1017 and the ending start process is executed. In the start process, an ending period for waiting for the start of the next game round (the first game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends) is set while the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state. In step S1018, an ending command for notifying the effect control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period is set, and then the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. The set ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S912, it is determined in step S913 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is in order to continue the open / close execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S914, and it is determined whether or not the ending has ended (whether or not the ending period has elapsed). If the ending is not completed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is in order to continue the ending. On the other hand, when the ending is completed, the process proceeds to step S915, and the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

Here, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

First, in step S1101, the type flags stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot result. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step S1102, and the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e in step S1103. As a result, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode (so-called probabilistic gaming state with electric support). This gaming state continues until the next jackpot occurs. After the execution of step S1103, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101 (if the current jackpot is not a probabilistic jackpot result), that is, if the current jackpot is a normal jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1104, and the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 314e. To set. If the jackpot this time is a normal jackpot result, the high probability mode flag is not set. Therefore, by the processing of step S1104, the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (so-called time saving). Shift to the game state). In the following step S1105, "100" is set in the game count counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the special figure game is executed in the situation where the game is in a time-saving game state, and when the value of the game counter area becomes "0", the above-mentioned various flags are used. The high frequency support flag stored in the storage area 314e is cleared. Therefore, the above-mentioned time-saving game state ends when 100 game times are performed, and after that, the game state shifts to the game state (normal game state) in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. do. After the execution of step S1105, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode ends.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S915 is completed, the round display end process is executed in step S916. In this process, the round display unit is controlled so that the round display unit in the special figure display unit 43 is turned off.

In step S917, the end processing of the open / close execution mode is executed, and then the main game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, a process of deleting the type flag and the open / close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 314e is executed.

<Hold look-ahead processing>
The hold look-ahead process of step S305 (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. This process is executed when the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63, and the acquired hold information is changed according to the hold information. Prior to the execution of the start process (FIG. 23), a lottery is performed for the presence / absence of a jackpot, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern.

First, in step S1201, the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN stored in the hold ball storage areas Ra and Rb of the hold ball storage area 314b and the common hold number CRN stored in the total hold number storage area of the hold ball storage area 314b. Is read and the information is stored in the register of MPU 312.

In step S1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold information acquired in step S304 (FIG. 18) based on the current winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 (random number for determining whether or not to win). Numerical value) is grasped. In step S1203, the winning / failing determination is performed using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S1202. At this time, if the lottery mode when the hold information is acquired is the low probability mode, the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to, and if the lottery mode when the hold information is acquired is the high probability mode. The pass / fail judgment is made by referring to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode.

In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination in step S1202 is a jackpot winning. If the jackpot is won, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (lottery for the jackpot type) included in the hold information acquired based on the current winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 in step S1205. Random number for).

In step S1206, a lottery for the jackpot type is performed using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step S1205. At this time, if the information is on hold based on the winning of the first operating port 62, refer to the type table for the first special drawing (FIG. 13 (a)) and hold based on the winning of the second operating port 63. In the case of information, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is specified with reference to the type table for the second special figure (FIG. 13 (b)). The processing of steps S1203 to S1206 is the same as that of steps S701 to S707 in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 23).

In step S1207, the jackpot information indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot and the type information indicating the jackpot type drawn in step S1206 are stored in the register of the MPU 312.

After the execution of step S1207 or when a negative determination is made in step S1204 (when the jackpot is not won), the hold information acquired based on the current winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 in step S1208 is added. Grasp the value of the included variable type counter CS. In step S1209, a lottery of the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) is performed using the value of the fluctuation type counter CS grasped in step S1208. At this time, if the acquired hold information corresponds to the jackpot, refer to the variable display time table for the jackpot (FIG. 14 (a)), and if the acquired hold information corresponds to the loss. , The fluctuation display time table for deviation (FIG. 14B) is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is specified. The process of this step is the same as that of steps S801 to S804 in the variable display time setting process.

In step S1210, the fluctuation pattern information indicating the fluctuation pattern drawn in step S1209 is stored in the register of the MPU 312. In step S1211, a hold command is set as an output target to the effect control device 143, and then the hold look-ahead process ends. In the hold command, in addition to the information indicating whether the hold information of this time corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, various information stored in the register (information of the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN, common). Information on the number of pending CRNs, jackpot information, type information, fluctuation pattern information) is included. As described above, since the presence or absence of a jackpot can be grasped from the fluctuation pattern, a hold command may be set so as not to include the jackpot information. The hold command set in step S1211 is transmitted to the effect control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

<About the electrical configuration of the effect control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the effect control device 143 and the display control device 350 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 342 is mounted on the effect control board 341 provided in the effect control device 143. The MPU 342 is a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 343 is executed. A certain RAM 344, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control device 162, hold display control commands such as shift commands and hold commands, game turn control commands such as fluctuation start commands, type commands, and fluctuation end commands, open / close execution mode commands such as opening commands and ending commands, etc. Receive various commands.

As described above, the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 342, and the display control device 350 is connected to the output side.

Further, an effect operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. The effect operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. The MPU 342 determines whether or not the effect operation unit 36 has been operated based on the detection information, and determines the operation mode of what kind of operation has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 on which an MPU 372 in which a program ROM 373 and a work RAM 374 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377, respectively, are mounted. There is.

The MPU 372 analyzes the command received from the effect control device 143 or performs a predetermined arithmetic process based on the received command to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 372 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 374 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 372. These work data, flags, and the like are stored in each area of the work RAM 374.

The VDP375 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 75. Since the VDP375 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 375 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 372, the video RAM 377, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 377 from the character ROM 376 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 75.

The character ROM 376 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 75. The character ROM 376 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 376 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 376. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 373 is stored in the character ROM 376.

The video RAM 377 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the display content of the symbol display device 75 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 377.

<About various processes executed by the effect control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the effect control device 143 will be described.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the MPU 342 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a hold command from the main control device 162 has been received. The hold command received from the main control device 162 is stored in the command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the effect control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer in which a plurality of commands can be individually stored and can be read from the previously stored command. Therefore, even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each of these commands can be satisfactorily executed.

In the determination of step S1301, it is determined whether or not the hold command is stored in the area to be read this time in the command storage area 344a. When the hold command is stored (when the hold command is received), in step S1302, for displaying the hold image on the hold display unit 200 (FIG. 9B) of the display screen G. Executes pending command handling processing. The details of the pending command handling process will be described later.

After the execution of step S1302 or when a negative determination is made in step S1301 (when the hold command is not received), it is determined in step S1303 whether or not the shift command from the main control device 162 is received. If a shift command has been received, in step S1304, a shift command correspondence process for shifting the hold image displayed on the hold display unit 200 is executed. The details of the shift command handling process will be described later.

After the execution of step S1304 or when a negative determination is made in step S1303 (when a shift command has not been received), in step S1305, the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 displays variations of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, etc. The special figure variation display process for performing the above is executed. The details of the special figure variation display processing will be described later.

In step S1306, the opening / closing execution mode process for performing the effect in the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the open / close execution mode process, in addition to the round effect in the open / close execution mode, a process for performing an opening effect, an ending effect, a winning effect when a prize is awarded to the variable winning device 65, and the like are executed.

In step S1307, the effect mode switching process for switching the effect mode is executed. The details of the effect mode switching process will be described later.

In step S1308, other processing is executed, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In other processes, a demo screen display when the start winning prize does not occur for a predetermined period, a switch to a power saving mode for reducing power consumption by stopping the video display on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, etc. are performed. Perform the process to do.

<Processing for pending commands>
The command correspondence process in step S1302 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1401, the hold command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the hold information (big hit information, type information, fluctuation pattern information, etc.) is stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344.

As shown in FIG. 32, the holding storage area 344c is provided with a first special drawing holding area SRa and a second special drawing holding area SRb in correspondence with the holding ball storage area 314b on the main control device 162 side. Has been done. Each of the reserved areas SRa and SRb has four storage areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Further, the holding storage area 344c is provided with an execution area SAE corresponding to the execution area AE on the main control device 162 side.

In step S1401, based on the hold command, it is determined whether the hold information this time corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, and the number of hold information in the corresponding special figure. It is grasped, and the fluctuation pattern information (in the case of a big hit, further big hit information and type information) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the holding storage area 344c. For example, when the current hold information is the second hold information corresponding to the first special figure, the fluctuation pattern information or the like is stored in the second storage area of the first special figure hold area SRa.

After the execution of step S1401, in step S1402, the value of the hold number counter provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 (start hold storage number SN) is incremented by one. The various counter areas 344b are provided with a hold number counter for the first special figure and a hold number counter for the second special figure, and in step S1402, the start hold storage number SN on the corresponding side is updated.

In step S1403, the setting process for the hold notice for executing the hold notice effect is executed. Here, the hold notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 33.

In the present embodiment, depending on the display mode of the hold image displayed on the hold display unit 200 of the display screen G, the hold notice effect that notifies or suggests the degree of expectation that the hold image will generate a big hit in the corresponding game times. Is to be done. As the display mode of the hold image, a normal display mode when the hold notice effect is not performed and a specific display mode when the hold notice effect is performed are set, and a plurality of displays are further set in the specific display mode. The mode is set.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned expectation degree is suggested by the display color (color) of the reserved image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33A, a normal display mode HMa in which the main display color is a normal color (for example, white) is set as the normal display mode, and the main display color is set as the specific display mode. Four types are set: a blue display mode HMb in which is blue, a green display mode HMc in green, a red display mode HMd in red, and an rainbow color display mode HMe in rainbow colors. .. In FIG. 33A, different hatching is added according to the difference in display color.

In the specific display mode, the blue display mode HMb has the lowest expectation of a jackpot, and thereafter, the expectation of a jackpot is higher in the order of green display mode HMc <red display mode HMd <rainbow color display mode HMe. The rainbow-colored display mode HMe suggests a big hit.

In addition, each specific display mode also suggests an effect in which the holding image is performed in the corresponding game times. Specifically, the blue display mode HMb suggests that the reach effect (any of the normal reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect) having a higher rank than the normal reach effect is performed in the game times corresponding to the reserved image. However, the green display mode HMc suggests that the reach effect of the order higher than the SP reach effect is performed, and the red display mode HMd suggests that the SPSP reach effect is performed.

The above-mentioned hold notice effect using the hold image is the period from the display start to the end of the display of the hold image to be executed, in other words, the game round of the hold information ends from the generation of the hold information. It is done using at least a part of the period until. The execution timing of the hold notice effect during the period (hold period) in which the hold image is displayed in the first hold display area Ga or the second hold display area Gb is multiple, such as when the hold image is displayed at the start or when the hold image is shifted. Timing is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 33B, a plurality of execution timings of the hold notice effect during the execution of the game round are set as hold change points. Each pending change point is set according to, for example, the start timing of the game round (variation start timing), the start timing of various reach effects, the development timing of the reach effects, and the like.

Returning to the description of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 31), in the setting process for the hold notice in step S1403, when the execution lottery for whether or not to execute the hold notice effect for the current hold information or the hold notice effect is executed. The process of setting the display mode of the image for holding is executed. The details of the setting process for the hold notice will be described later.

In step S1404, the first execution process of the hold notice for executing the hold notice effect is executed. In the first execution process of the hold notice, the execution control of the hold notice effect is performed based on the setting result of step S1403. The details of the first execution process of the hold notice will be described later.

In step S1405, a process for displaying the hold image on the hold display unit 200 of the display screen G is executed. Specifically, a hold display command is created so that the hold image is additionally displayed in the corresponding unit hold display area in each hold display area Ga, Gb, and is set as an output target to the display control device 350. The hold display command includes information on whether the hold information this time corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, and information indicating the number of the hold information. After the execution of step S1405, the pending command correspondence process ends.

<Setting process for hold notice>
The setting process for the hold notice in step S1403 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

First, in step S1501, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern and the like (look-ahead result) in the holding information this time are grasped. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the current hold information corresponds to the jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern or the like grasped in step S1501.

If it does not correspond to the jackpot, that is, if it is the hold information corresponding to the deviation, the process proceeds to step S1503, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the hold information is the fluctuation pattern 1H (the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the complete deviation). To judge. When a negative judgment is made in step S1503 (when the fluctuation pattern is other than the fluctuation pattern 1H) or when a positive judgment is made in step S1502 (when the pending information corresponds to the jackpot), the current production mode is grasped in step S1504. do.

Here, the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 35. In the present embodiment, the effect mode A and the effect mode B are set as the effect modes of the game effect executed on the display screen G. These effect modes A and B can be identified from the viewpoint of the player. For example, the background images 401 displayed on the back side of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and the hold display unit 200 are different in both effect modes. It is supposed to be done.

These effect modes can be manually switched by the operation of the player. Specifically, the effect operation unit 36 (FIG. 1) performs a predetermined operation during the effective period of the mode switching. It is possible to switch by. For example, if a predetermined operation is performed by the production operation unit 36 in a situation where the production mode is the production mode A, the production mode is switched to the production mode B, and the production operation is performed in the situation where the production mode B is set. When a predetermined operation is performed by the unit 36, the effect mode is switched to the effect mode A.

Further, the frequency of occurrence of the above-mentioned hold notice effect is different between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, and the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect in the effect mode A is higher than that of the effect mode B. There is. The configuration for changing the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect is not particularly limited, but for example, in any of the effect modes, the hold notice effect is executed via the execution lottery, and then the effect mode B It is conceivable that the winning probability of the above-mentioned execution lottery when the pending information corresponds to the deviation is made lower than that of the effect mode A.

In this case, in the effect mode B, the proportion of the hold notice effect to be executed corresponding to the pre-reading of the jackpot is higher than that in the effect mode A, so that the jackpot expectation when the hold notice effect is executed is high. Become. That is, in the effect mode A, the hold notice effect is easily executed, and the effect is made to function as an easy-to-enjoy mode. It can function as a high mode.

Although not shown in FIG. 35, for example, in the effect mode A, a hold image imitating a game ball is displayed, whereas in the effect mode B, a hold image imitating a star is displayed. For example, the base image of the hold image may be different between the effect mode A and the effect mode B.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the hold notice (FIG. 34), after grasping the current production mode in step S1504, in step S1505, the corresponding hold notice execution lottery table is displayed from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. get. A plurality of hold notice execution lottery tables are set according to the presence or absence of a big hit and the production mode. For example, the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the hold information this time is a big hit is set to have a higher winning probability than the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the hold information is out of order. Further, the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the effect mode A and corresponding to the case where the current hold information is out of order corresponds to the effect mode B and the hold notice execution corresponding to the case where the present hold information is out of order. The winning probability is set higher than the lottery table.

In step S1506, an execution lottery for whether or not to execute the hold notice effect is performed based on the hold notice execution lottery table acquired in step S1505 and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344. I do. In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1506 is a winning result.

If the lottery result is an execution winning, the process proceeds to step S1508 to grasp the corresponding number of holdings. In this step, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and it is grasped whether the holding information of this time corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, and the number of holdings of the corresponding special figure is grasped. .. The number of pending information in this case is the number including the current pending information. For example, when the current hold information is stored in the third area of the first special figure hold area SRa in the hold storage area 344c, the hold information corresponds to the first special figure and the number of holds thereof. Is 3 is grasped. When the hold information this time is stored in the first area of the hold area SRa for the first special figure (when it is the first hold information), the hold information is stored in the execution area SAE. When (when the game times are executed), 1 is grasped as the above-mentioned hold number, and when the hold information is not stored in the execution area SAE (when the game times are not executed), 0 is grasped as the above-mentioned hold number. do.

In step S1509, the final display mode lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. In the present embodiment, not only the display mode of the hold image is changed only once to perform the hold notice effect, but also the display mode of the hold image may be changed a plurality of times to perform the hold notice effect. It is configured. The final display mode lottery table is a table for drawing the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice effect.

In the final display mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 36, a range of selectable final display modes and a selection probability of each display mode are set corresponding to each variation pattern. In FIG. 36, the item of "remarks (effect mode)" indicating the game rotation effect corresponding to each variation pattern is added for convenience, and is not set in the final display mode lottery table.

Further, in the final display mode lottery table, a final display mode lottery table for big hits (FIG. 36 (a)) and a final display mode lottery table for disengagement (FIG. 36 (b)) are set, and each of them is set. In the lottery table, the selection range of the final display mode and the selection probability of each option are different according to each variation pattern.

In the final display mode lottery table for big hits, as the range of the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice effect, when the hold information this time is the fluctuation pattern 1A (per normal reach), the blue display mode HMb and the rainbow color display mode HMe In the case of fluctuation pattern 2A (per SP reach A) or fluctuation pattern 3A (per SP reach B), blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc and rainbow color display mode HMe, fluctuation pattern 4A (per SP SP reach A) or fluctuation In the case of pattern 5A (per SPSP reach B), the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow color display mode HMe are set. Therefore, when the hold image of the blue display mode HMb is displayed as the hold notice effect, the hold information is more than the normal reach effect in the corresponding game times (the game times of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect). It is suggested that the reach effect of the rank is performed, and when the image for holding the green display mode HMc is displayed, it is suggested that the reach effect of the rank higher than the SP reach effect is performed, and the hold of the red display mode HMd is used. When the image is displayed, it suggests that the SPSP reach effect is performed.

In addition, even in the final display mode lottery table for disengagement, when the hold image of the blue display mode HMb is displayed as the hold notice effect, the reach effect of the order higher than the normal reach effect is performed in the game times corresponding to the hold image. When the hold image of the green display mode HMc is displayed, it is suggested that the reach effect of the order higher than the SP reach effect is performed, and the hold image of the red display mode HMd is displayed. In this case, the selection range of the final display mode corresponding to each variation pattern is defined so as to suggest that the SPSP reach effect is performed. Therefore, when the hold notice effect is performed and any of the blue, green, and red hold images is displayed, the player can predict what level of reach effect will be performed. However, it is not possible to determine whether or not there is a big hit.

In the final display mode lottery table for removal, the rainbow color display mode HMe is not set as an option of the final display mode, and the hold image of the rainbow color display mode HMe is displayed only when it is a big hit. It has become. Therefore, the hold image of the rainbow-colored display mode HMe suggests a big hit, and when the hold image is displayed, the player knows that the big hit will occur at the game times corresponding to the hold image. Can be predicted.

In the final display mode lottery table for big hits, the selection probability of the rainbow-colored display mode HMe is suppressed to a small probability (for example, 5%) in any variation pattern. This is because if the selection probability of the rainbow-colored display mode HMe is increased, the player often has a chance to recognize the jackpot before the game round is executed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game round production may be diminished. This is to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. As for the selection probability in the other options, the higher display mode is more likely to be selected than the lower display mode in each variation pattern. For example, in the case of the variation pattern 3A, the green display mode HMc is more likely to be selected than the blue display mode HMb.

On the other hand, in the final display mode lottery table for off, it is difficult to select a higher display mode than in the case of the final display mode lottery table for big hits. For example, in the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 4A) corresponding to the SPSP reach A effect in the final display mode lottery table for big hits, the selection probability of the red display mode HMd is 55%, whereas the final display mode lottery for loss In the variation pattern (variation pattern 5H) corresponding to the SPSP reach B effect on the table, the selection probability of the red display mode HMd remains at 10%.

In each final display mode lottery table for big hits and misses, the selection tendency of the display mode is set as described above, so that even if the type of reach effect performed in the game round is the same, the game The expectation of a big hit is higher when a higher display mode is displayed as a hold image corresponding to the times.

In the present embodiment, a common table is used in the effect mode A and the effect mode B as the final display mode lottery table for the jackpot and the final display mode lottery table for the miss, but different tables are used in each of the effect modes. It may be configured to be set.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process (FIG. 34) for the hold notice, in step S1509, the final display mode lottery table corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot of the hold information is acquired based on the fluctuation pattern or the like grasped in step S1501. In step S1510, this hold is based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S1501, the final display mode lottery table acquired in step S1509, and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344. A lottery will be drawn for the final display mode in the advance notice production.

The lottery counter is acquired when a hold command from the main control device 162 is received, in other words, when hold information to be subjected to the lottery process is generated. This also applies to the counter (random value) used for other lottery processing executed by the effect control device 143.

In step S1511, the production scenario lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. The production scenario lottery table is a table for drawing a production scenario of the hold notice production.

In the effect scenario lottery table, as shown in FIG. 37, a plurality of effect scenarios are set corresponding to the number of holds and the final display mode of the hold notice effect. Specifically, groups from the group of the effect scenario 0 corresponding to the number of holds = 0 to the group of the effect scenario 4 corresponding to the number of hold = 4 are set, and in each group, the final display modes of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are set. A group of production scenarios for each color is set corresponding to. Then, a lottery random number value of 0 to 99 is assigned as a group of production scenarios for one color. For example, when the number of reservations is 0 and the final display mode is the blue display mode HMb, the effect scenario 0 blue (1) and the effect scenario 0 blue (2) are selected from the effect scenarios. The one corresponding to the random value is selected.

Each effect scenario defines in which display mode the hold image is displayed at what timing in the hold notice effect in which the final display mode is determined. When the reserved information corresponding to the first special figure is pre-read, the number of reserved first special figures at that time is 4, and the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode by lottery. Taking the production scenario 4 red (1) as an example, in the scenario, the hold image is displayed in the blue display mode HMb in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga (FIG. 9B). Later, when the hold image is moved and displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode is changed to the green display mode HMc, and then the hold image is displayed in the execution display area D (for the hold). It is stipulated that the display mode is changed to the red display mode HMd during the execution of the game times corresponding to the image).

Although not shown in FIG. 37, in the production scenario in which the display mode of the hold image is changed in the execution display area D, the display mode is changed at which timing (which hold change point) in the game round. It is also stipulated. In addition, there is also an effect scenario in which the display mode is changed a plurality of times during the execution of the game round. For example, in the effect scenario 0 green (2), the hold image is displayed at the previous hold change point during the execution of the game round. After changing from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb, it is stipulated that the display mode HMc is further changed to the green display mode HMc at a later pending change point.

In addition, "G4 (maintenance 4)" to "G1 (maintenance 1)" in "remarks (effect mode)" of FIG. 37 are displays when the hold image is displayed in each unit hold display area of the hold display unit 200. The aspect is shown. Further, in "D (during the game)", the display mode when the hold image is shifted from the first unit hold display area to the execution display area D, and the hold image are displayed in the execution display area D. The display mode in the period is shown. By the way, the items in the "Remarks (Direction mode)" column are added for convenience, and are not set in the production scenario lottery table.

Further, as the production scenario lottery table, a production scenario lottery table for big hits and a production scenario lottery table for losing are set. In the present embodiment, a common table is used in the production mode A and the production mode B as the production scenario lottery table for the jackpot and the production scenario lottery table for the miss, but as a configuration in which a different table is set in each of the production modes. May be good. Note that FIG. 37 shows an example of a production scenario lottery table for big hits.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process (FIG. 34) for the hold notice, in step S1511, based on the fluctuation pattern and the like grasped in step S1501, the effect scenario lottery table corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot of the hold information is acquired. In step S1512, the number of holds grasped in step S1508, the final display mode determined in step S1510, the effect scenario lottery table acquired in step S1511, and the lottery counter (random value value) acquired from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. ) And, the production scenario in this hold notice production will be drawn.

In step S1513, the effect scenario data is set so that the effect scenario drawn in step S1512 is executed. In step S1514, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the setting process for the hold notice ends. The hold notice flag is for the MPU 342 to know that the hold notice effect should be executed.

In addition, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S1503 (when the fluctuation pattern of the hold information is the fluctuation pattern 1H (complete deviation)) or when a negative judgment is made in step S1507 (when the reservation notice effect is lost in the execution lottery). , Step S1515 is set, and the display mode of the reserved image is set to the normal display mode HMa. After that, the setting process for the hold notice is terminated.

<Process for the first execution of the hold notice>
The first execution process of the hold notice in step S1404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38 (a).

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. If the hold notice flag is not stored, that is, if the situation is not such that the hold notice effect should be executed, the first execution process of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the hold notice flag is stored and the hold notice effect should be executed, the process proceeds to step S1602, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect is displayed. Determine if it is the change timing. That is, it is determined whether or not the reserved image should be displayed in a specific display mode from the beginning. In this step, the above determination is made with reference to the setting result of the effect scenario of the hold notice effect set in step S1513 (FIG. 34). If it is not the timing to change the display mode, the process for the first execution of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is the change timing of the display mode, an execution lottery for whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect is performed in step S1603. The change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the reserved image changes (ranks up). The mode of the change suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the change suggestion effect is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 39. First, as shown in FIG. 39A, a predetermined character image 402 is displayed in the vicinity of the hold display unit 200 at a predetermined timing before the hold image changes. When performing the change suggestion effect according to the generation timing of the hold information, the hold image is first displayed in the normal display mode, and the character image 402 is displayed immediately after or at the same time. After that, an image in which the character performs a predetermined action is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the display mode of the hold image is changed to a higher display mode. The character image 402 is deleted after changing the display mode of the holding image.

In step S1603, the execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is performed based on the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the execution lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. .. In step S1604, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1603 is a winning result. If the lottery result is a winning result, the change suggestion effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 in step S1605. Specifically, a command to the effect that the change suggestion effect should be executed is set as an output target to the display control device 350.

In the present embodiment, the change suggestion effect can be executed only when the display mode of the hold image is changed, but the change suggestion effect is also executed when the display mode of the hold image is not changed. It may be a possible configuration. That is, the execution lottery for the change suggestion effect may be performed even when the display mode of the holding image is not changed.

As a change suggestion effect in such a case, for example, after displaying a predetermined character image 402 as shown in FIG. 39A, the character does not perform a predetermined action or performs an action different from the action. After that, it is conceivable that the character image 402 is erased without changing the display mode of the holding image, and the display mode before displaying the character image 402 is maintained as it is. However, if such a ghost effect occurs frequently, the player's expectation for the change suggestion effect may be lost, so it is advisable to keep the execution frequency low. Specifically, the execution winning probability of the change suggestion effect when the display mode is not changed is lower than that when the display mode is changed, in other words, the display mode of the hold image when the character image 402 is displayed. The frequency with which does not change should be lower than the frequency with which does change.

After the execution of step S1605 or when a negative determination is made in step S1604 (when the lottery for executing the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the change destination in the current change process is based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode of. Specifically, it is grasped which of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow color display mode HMe is used to display the reserved image.

In step S1607, the display mode of the holding image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S1606. When this process is performed when the hold command is received (when the hold image is additionally displayed), the initial display mode of the hold image to be additionally displayed is set to the display mode grasped in step S1606.

At that time, when the change suggestion effect is not executed, the hold image is set to be displayed in any of the specific display modes indicated by the effect scenario from the beginning. On the other hand, when the change suggestion effect is executed, it is set to change to the specific display mode indicated by the effect scenario after displaying in the normal display mode HMa. When the setting process of step S1607 is executed, in step S1405 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 31), the command is executed so that the information of the display mode set in step S1607 is included in the hold display command to the display control device 350. Set.

In step S1608, information indicating the display mode of the hold image this time is stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. As shown in FIG. 38 (b), in the display mode storage area 344e, an area is provided corresponding to the hold information (hold image) of each special figure and the hold information during the game round. The display mode of the reserved image can be stored in each area. For example, when the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2 of the first hold display area Ga, the display mode storage area 344e corresponds to the second area for the first special figure (corresponding to the second hold information). The information of being displayed in the blue display mode HMb is stored in the area). By the way, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the information indicating the display mode (display color) after the change is stored. The display mode storage area 344e may not be provided, and the display mode information may be stored in the corresponding area of the hold storage area 344c. After the execution of step S1608, the first execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

<Processing for commands during shift>
The shift command correspondence process in step S1304 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40 (a).

First, in step S1701, the first execution process of the hold notice is executed. This process is for changing the display mode of the hold image of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect when the hold image is shifted. The process of this step is basically the same as the process for the first execution of the hold notice in step S1404 (FIG. 31) (FIG. 38 (a)).

Explaining with reference to FIG. 38A, in the first execution process of the hold notice in step S1701, the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and the hold notice effect should be executed. If this is the case, in step S1602, the current shift timing is set for the hold image (hold image displayed in each hold display area Ga, Gb) corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect. It is determined whether or not it is the timing for changing the display mode (display color). This determination is made based on the setting result of the effect scenario of the hold notice effect set in step S1513 (FIG. 34).

If it is the timing to change the display mode, an execution lottery for whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect is performed in step S1603, and if the lottery is won, the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is performed in step S1605. Set so that the change suggestion effect is executed. After the execution of step S1605 or when a negative determination is made in step S1604 (when the lottery for executing the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the change destination in the current change process is based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode of.

In step S1607, the display mode of the holding image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S1606. Specifically, as an output command to the display control device 350, information indicating which display mode (display color) to change the display mode of the holding image and information indicating which display mode (display color) to change are included. In this way, a command is set to the effect that the display mode of the hold image should be changed at the current shift timing. As a result, at the current shift timing, the display mode of the hold image is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the effect scenario.

In step S1608, information on the changed display mode of the reserved image whose display mode is changed is stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. For example, when the hold image of the blue display mode HMb displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2 of the first hold display area Ga is changed to the green display mode HMc when shifting to the first unit hold display area Ga1. , Display mode After erasing the blue display information stored in the second area for the first special drawing (the area corresponding to the second hold information) in the storage area 344e, the green display information is stored in the same area. do.

Returning to the description of the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40), after executing the process of step S1701, the second execution process of the hold notice is executed in step S1702. Since this process is related to the effect mode switching process in step S1307 (FIG. 30), the switching process will be described in detail after the description of the switching process.

In step S1703, the value of the hold number counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is decremented by one. The various counter areas 344b are provided with a hold number counter for the first special figure and a hold number counter for the second special figure, and in this step, the start hold storage number SN on the corresponding side is updated.

In step S1704, a shift process for moving and displaying the hold image is executed, and then the process corresponding to the command at the time of this shift is terminated. In the shift process, the hold information stored in the first area of the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is moved to the execution area SAE, and the hold information stored in the second to fourth areas is sequentially moved to the lower area side. Shift. At this time, the information of the display mode stored in each area of the display mode storage area 344e is also shifted to the lower area side in order.

Further, in the shift process, the display control device 350 is controlled so as to change the display position of the hold image on the hold display unit 200 of the display screen G to the unit hold display area on the lower side. As a state before the control, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (b1), a hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1 and the second unit hold display area Ga2 of the first hold display area Ga. In this case, as shown in FIG. 40 (b2), the display positions of the holding images are changed to the execution display area D and the first unit holding display area Ga1 by the control. When the display mode of the hold image is changed in the first execution process of the hold notice in step S1701, the display position is changed and the display mode is changed at the same time.

<Process for displaying special figure fluctuation>
The special figure variation display process of step S1305 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41.

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the game round of either the first special figure or the second special figure is being executed. If none of the game times is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received. The variation start command includes information on the variation pattern drawn by the variation display time setting process (FIG. 24) in the main control device 162.

By referring to the information of this fluctuation pattern, it is possible to grasp at which fluctuation display time the special figure game times on the special figure display unit 43, which is displayed and controlled by the main control device 162, is performed. Further, as already described, since the fluctuation pattern for big hits and the fluctuation pattern for misses are set separately, it is possible to determine the result of the hit / fail judgment from the fluctuation pattern.

If the fluctuation start command has not been received, the special figure fluctuation display processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the variation start command is received, the process proceeds to step S1803, the variation start process for starting the effect for the game round is executed, and then the special figure variation display process ends.

In the fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern related to the special figure game times this time is specified. Furthermore, based on the specified fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display time in this special figure game is grasped. In the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343, an effect pattern table in which the variation display time is determined in association with each variation pattern is stored. The variation display time defined in the effect pattern table corresponds to the variation display time corresponding to each variation pattern (FIG. 14) in the main control device 162, and one variation in the effect control device 143 and the main control device 162. A common variable display time is assigned to the pattern. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern 1A, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is 15 seconds for both the effect control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the variation start processing, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern analyzed from the variation start command is specified with reference to the effect pattern table, and this is set as the variation display time of the special figure game times this time.

Further, the effect pattern table is associated with the effect pattern for the game rotation effect in association with each variation pattern. As each of these production patterns, the normal reach, the SP reach A, the SP reach B, the SPSP reach A, the SPSP reach B, the complete deviation, the normal reach deviation, and the SP reach A described in the explanation of the variable display time table are used. Off, SP reach B off, SPSP reach A off, and SPSP reach B off are set. Since the correspondence between the variation pattern and the effect pattern has already been described with reference to FIG. 14, the description thereof will be omitted. In the variation start process, the effect pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is specified with reference to the effect pattern table, and this is set as the effect pattern of the special figure game times this time.

Further, in the fluctuation start processing, when the result of the winning / failing determination regarding the special figure game round this time is a big hit, the big hit type is specified based on the type command from the main control device 162. When the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot, the stop result for the probability variation jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. On the contrary, when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the stop result for the normal jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the effective lines L1 to L5 in which the stop result for the jackpot is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In addition, if the result of the hit / fail judgment regarding the special figure game round this time is incorrect, each stop symbol of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is randomly determined. However, when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is to perform the reach effect, each stop symbol is determined so that the reach is formed on the effective lines L1 to L5 determined by the lottery. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the off-reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is set as the stop result this time.

In the variation start process, after executing each of the above processes, a command including the information of the stop symbol this time and the information of the effect pattern is set as the output target to the display control device 350. In the display control device 350, according to the received command, the symbols of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 are stopped by the stop result determined by the effect control device 143, or the game is played with the effect pattern determined by the effect control device 143. The symbol display device 75 is controlled so that the effect is performed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801 (when the game round is being executed), the process proceeds to step S1804, and it is determined whether or not a variation end command has been received from the main control device 162. If the fluctuation end command is not received, it means that the fluctuation display time has not elapsed in this special figure game. In this case, in step S1805, the variable processing process is executed. In the variable processing, the variation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 started by the fluctuation start processing is continued, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in order, and each reach effect is executed. Execute the process for doing so.

In step S1806, it is determined whether or not the special figure game time this time is the game time of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect. If it is not the game time of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, the process for displaying the special figure variation is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the case of the game times of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, the first execution process of the hold notice is executed in step S1807. This process is for changing the display mode of the hold image of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect during the game round of the hold information. The process of this step is basically the same as the process for the first execution of the hold notice in step S1404 (FIG. 31) (FIG. 38 (a)).

Explaining with reference to FIG. 38A, in the first execution process of the hold notice in step S1807, the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and the hold notice effect should be executed. If this is the case, in step S1602, is it the timing to change the display mode of the hold image (hold image displayed in the execution display area D) corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect? Judge whether or not. This determination is made based on the setting result of the effect scenario of the hold notice effect set in step S1513 (FIG. 34).

If it is the timing to change the display mode, an execution lottery for whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect is performed in step S1603, and if the lottery is won, the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is performed in step S1605. Set so that the change suggestion effect is executed. After the execution of step S1605 or when a negative determination is made in step S1604 (when the lottery for executing the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the change destination in the current change process is based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode of.

In step S1607, the display mode of the holding image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S1606. As a result, the display mode of the hold image is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the effect scenario at a predetermined hold change point during the game. In the following step S1608, the information of the changed display mode is stored in the area corresponding to the execution display area D in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344.

Returning to the description of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41), after executing the process of step S1807, the third execution process of the hold notice is executed in step S1808. Since this process is related to the effect mode switching process in step S1307 (FIG. 30), the switching process will be described in detail after the description of the switching process. After the execution of step S1808, the special figure variation display process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1804 (when the variation end command is received), it means that the variation display time has elapsed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1809, and the variable end process is executed. In the variation end processing, the variation display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 and the effect being executed are terminated (the symbols of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 are fixedly stopped).

In step S1810, it is determined whether or not the special figure game time this time is the game time of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect. If it is not the game time of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, the process for displaying the special figure variation is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the case of the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, in step S1811, it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag or the return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. The details of the return standby flag will be described later.

If either the hold notice flag or the return standby flag is stored, the flag stored in step S1812 is deleted. After the execution of step S1812 or when a negative determination is made in step S1811 (when neither the hold notice flag nor the return standby flag is stored), the special figure variation display process ends.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the variation display time has elapsed based on whether or not the variation end command is received from the main control device 162. However, when the effect control device 143 starts the variation. Since the fluctuation display time can be grasped from the transmitted fluctuation start command, it may be configured to determine whether or not the fluctuation display time related to the game being executed has elapsed based on the grasped fluctuation display time. In this case, the configuration may be such that the fluctuation end command is not transmitted from the main control device 162.

<Process for switching production mode>
The effect mode switching process of step S1307 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. The effect mode switching process is for switching between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, which have already been described.

First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the effect mode switching is in the valid period. In the present embodiment, the period during which the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is executed or the period during which the open / close execution mode is executed in the special figure game is set as an invalid period during which the effect mode cannot be switched, and other than that. The period of is the valid period for switching the production mode, including during the execution of the special figure game. In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the current timing belongs to the above valid period. If the effect mode switching is not in the valid period, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is.

If the effect mode switching is in the valid period, the process proceeds to step S1902, and the effect operation unit 36 determines whether or not a predetermined operation for switching the effect mode has been performed. If the predetermined operation has not been performed, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is.

When the predetermined operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S1903, and a switching process for switching the effect mode is executed. For example, when the current effect mode is the effect mode A, the effect data is set so as to switch to the effect mode B. The effect mode may be switched at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, or at the timing when the next special figure game round is started.

In step S1904, the effect mode flags corresponding to the effect mode after switching are set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. In the present embodiment, a mode A flag and a mode B flag are provided as flags corresponding to the effect mode A and the effect mode B, respectively. For example, when switching the effect mode from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, the above-mentioned various types are provided. The mode A flag stored in the flag storage area 344d is deleted, and the mode B flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d.

In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. The return standby flag will be described later.

If the return standby flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1906, and it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. If the hold notice flag is not stored, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the hold notice flag is stored, that is, when the hold notice effect is being executed or in the standby state thereof, the process proceeds to step S1907, and the hold notice flag is deleted. As a result, if the hold notice effect has been executed before the mode is switched, the continuation of the hold notice effect is cancelled. In addition, when the hold notice effect is in the standby state, the execution of the hold notice effect that was waiting is canceled.

In step S1908, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed, that is, whether or not there is a hold image displayed in the specific display mode. Specifically, among the hold images displayed in the hold display areas Ga and Gb, in any of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow color display mode HMe. Determine if the displayed item exists. This determination is performed with reference to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. If the holding image displayed in the specific display mode does not exist, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if there is a hold image displayed in the specific display mode (when the hold notice effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S1909, and any mode of the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is used. Information indicating whether or not it is displayed in is stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. In the return area 344f, areas are set corresponding to the hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4, Gb1 to Gb4 and the execution display area D of each special figure, and the display mode of the hold image can be stored in each area. It is possible.

In step S1909, the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e at that time is also stored in the return area 344f. Therefore, at the time of processing in step S1909, the same information is stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the return area 344f.

The information on the display mode may be identification information indicating the display mode or identification information indicating the display color. In short, it suffices if the display mode of the hold image can be specified from the information stored in the return area 344f, and it may be any one corresponding to the display mode of the hold image.

By the above processing, by referring to the return area 344f after switching the effect mode, it is possible to grasp which display mode the hold image was displayed before the effect mode is switched. When the shift process of step S1704 in the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40) is executed in the state where the display mode information is stored in the return area 344f, not only the display mode storage area 344e but also the return mode is executed. The information of the display mode stored in each area of the area 344f is also shifted to the lower area side in order.

In step S1910, a process for canceling the display of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is executed. That is, the holding image displayed in the specific display mode is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa as the effect mode is switched. The switching to the normal display mode HMa is performed according to the switching timing of the effect mode. For example, when the effect mode is switched at the timing when the above predetermined operation is performed, the hold image is switched to the normal display mode HMa at that timing, and when the effect mode is switched at the start timing of the next special figure game round, the effect mode is switched. The hold image is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa at the timing.

Further, in the release process of step S1910, a process of clearing the information of the display mode stored in the display mode storage area 344e is executed. Therefore, at the time of processing in step S1910, the information of the display mode is stored only in the return area 344f. Further, in the release process of step S1910, the process of erasing the effect scenario data set in step S1513 of the hold notice setting process (FIG. 34) is also executed.

In the present embodiment, when the effect mode is switched, the acquired hold information, in other words, the execution lottery for the hold notice effect (setting process for the hold notice in FIG. 34) has already been performed. The pending information is configured to limit the re-execution lottery. Specifically, the execution lottery for the hold notice effect will not be performed again, and the same hold information (holding image) will not be executed twice before and after the effect mode is switched. There is.

In step S1911, the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d. In the present embodiment, when the effect mode is switched and then the original effect mode is switched again, the display mode of the hold image is returned to the specific display mode. The return standby flag is a flag indicating that the state is waiting for the return process. After the execution of step S1911, the effect mode switching process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1905 (when the return standby flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S1912 to execute a process of clearing the return standby flag. Here, the situation in which the affirmative determination is made in step S1905 is the original effect mode as a result of the first effect mode switching being performed in the situation where the hold notice effect is being executed and then the mode switching operation being performed again. It means that the situation has returned to. For example, in a situation where one of the holding images is displayed in a specific display mode, the effect mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, and then switched to the effect mode A again. At that time, at the time of the previous mode switching (switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B), the hold notice effect is canceled after the display mode of the hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa, so that the effect mode A The holding image displayed in the specific display mode in (1) will continue to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa during the stay in the effect mode B.

After switching to the effect mode B and before switching to the effect mode A, the game round of the hold image (hold information) may end. In this case, since the return standby flag is erased in step S1811 and step S1812 of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41), a negative determination is made in step S1905.

After the execution of step S1912, in step S1913, the setting process for returning the advance notice for returning the display mode of the reserved image to the specific display mode is executed. After that, the effect mode switching process is terminated.

<About changing the display mode of the hold image by switching the production mode>
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode is switched in the situation where the hold image is displayed in the specific display mode, the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode HMa. , The hold notice effect is configured to be canceled. In this case, by switching the display state including not only the background image 401 but also the hold display unit 200, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the change of the effect mode.

Further, when the switching of the effect mode is merely a change of the display image, it is difficult for the player to impress the difference between the modes, but in the present embodiment, the execution frequency of the hold notice effect between the modes. It is possible to make the difference in the production mode stand out because the difference is made. However, in a configuration in which the execution frequency of the hold notice effect differs between modes, even if the display mode of the hold image on which the hold notice effect is performed is the same, the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the display mode is the effect mode. It may differ depending on the type of. Therefore, if the display mode before mode switching is maintained even after mode switching, the actual expectation of the hold information corresponds to the effect mode before switching, but it is as if the expectation corresponds to the effect mode after switching. Since it is displayed as if it suggests, there is a concern that the expectation level suggested by the hold notice production may be inconsistent with the actual expectation level. In this regard, by changing the display mode of the holding image to the normal display mode HMa with the switching of the effect mode, it is possible to preferably avoid such inconsistency in the degree of expectation.

In this way, by canceling the execution of the hold notice effect in response to the switching of the effect mode, it is possible to make the change of the effect mode easier to understand and to avoid the inconsistency of the expectation degree suggested by the hold notice effect. However, on the other hand, some players may misunderstand that the chances suggested by the hold notice effect have disappeared due to the cancellation of the hold notice effect, which may cause disappointment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting process for returning the notice in step S1913, the second execution process for the hold notice in step S1702, and the third execution process for the hold notice in step S1808 are provided, and after switching the effect mode, When the original effect mode is returned by switching again, the display mode of the hold image is restored. Hereinafter, the processing of each of the above steps will be described in detail.

<Setting process for returning to advance notice>
The setting process for returning to the notice in step S1913 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

First, in step S2101, the display status of the hold images displayed in the hold display areas Ga and Gb and the execution display area D is grasped before the specific display mode is released and the normal display mode HMa is set. For example, in a situation where the fourth holding image for the first special drawing (holding image of the fourth unit holding display area Ga4) is displayed in the blue display mode HMb, the effect mode is changed from the effect mode A to the effect mode B. When the switching is performed and then the production mode A is switched again, it is grasped that the holding image is displayed in the blue display mode HMb.

At that time, after switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, if the holding image is shifted to the lower area side due to the progress of digestion of the game times, it is displayed in the 4th unit hold display area Ga4 at the time of mode switching. It is understood that the hold image corresponding to the hold image that has been displayed is displayed in the blue display mode HMb before the release process. For example, when two game times have been exhausted after switching to the effect mode B, the hold image displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2 is displayed in the blue display mode HMb when the mode is switched. I understand that. This grasp is performed with reference to the return area 344f of the RAM 344.

In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the game of the holding image (target holding image) displayed in the specific display mode is being executed. That is, after switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, it is determined whether or not the game has been digested and the game has progressed to the game times of the target holding image. If the game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S2103, and the number of hold information (number of holds) prior to the target hold image is grasped. For example, when the target hold image is the third hold information, two images are grasped as the number of holds before that. It should be noted that the pending information during the game round is not included in the pending number. In addition, the number of reserved items is grasped separately for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In step S2104, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved items grasped in step S2103 is a predetermined number (for example, one) or more. If the number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S2105, and the lottery process for the return scenario is executed. The return scenario determines at which shift timing the target pending image is returned to the original specific display mode.

In the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343, a return scenario table is stored in which the timing for restoring the display mode of the hold image is determined according to the number of holds and the original specific display mode. There is. In the return scenario table, for example, in the case where the number of holds is 2, the return timing of the display mode is the first shift (shift to the second unit hold display area Ga2) and the second shift (shift to the second unit hold display area Ga2). It is possible to select between the first unit hold display area (when shifting to Ga1) and the third shift (when shifting to the execution display area D).

Further, in the return scenario table, when the original display mode is a specific display mode higher than the blue display mode HMb, the normal display mode HMa directly returns to the original specific display mode, or the original specific display mode is stepwise. It is also possible to select whether to return to. Therefore, there are cases where the specific display mode before the release is restored by one hold change display, and there are cases where the specific display mode before the release is restored after a plurality of hold change displays.

In step S2105, the return timing and the return mode of the display mode in the hold image are drawn based on the return scenario table and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344.

After the execution of step S2105 or when a negative determination is made in step S2104 (when the number of pending items is less than one), the return scenario setting process is performed in step S2106. When the lottery process of the return scenario is performed in step S2105, the display mode of the hold image is set to be returned in the lottered return scenario, and when the number of hold images is less than 1, the execution display is displayed. It is set so that the display mode of the reserved image is restored when shifting to the area D.

After the execution of step S2106 or when a positive determination is made in step S2102 (when the game round of the target holding image is being executed), the advance notice return flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step S2107. The notice return flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that a process for restoring the display mode of the reserved image should be executed. After the execution of step S2107, the setting process for returning to the notice is terminated.

<Process for the second execution of the hold notice>
The second execution process of the hold notice in step S1702 (FIG. 40 (a)) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is performed as a part of the process corresponding to the command at the time of shift, in other words, the process is executed at the shift timing of the pending image.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the advance notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. If the notice return flag is not stored, the process for the second execution of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If the advance notice return flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2202, and the return scenario set in step S2106 in the setting process for advance notice return is grasped. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the current shift timing is the return timing of the display mode of the target hold image based on the setting result of the return scenario grasped in step S2202. If it is not the return timing, the process for the second execution of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If it is the return timing, the process proceeds to step S2204, and the display mode of the change destination is grasped based on the setting result of the return scenario. For example, when the display mode before the release of the target hold image is the green display mode HMc and the display mode defined by the return scenario is the green display mode HMc, the green display mode HMc is used as the change destination display mode. To grasp. Further, when the display mode determined by the return scenario is the blue display mode HMb, which is a pre-stage to the green display mode HMc, the blue display mode HMb is grasped as the display mode to be changed.

In step S2205, the display mode of the target holding image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S2204. Specifically, as an output command to the display control device 350, information indicating a holding image whose display mode is to be changed and information indicating which display mode (display color) to be changed to be included are included. Set a command to change the display mode of the hold image at this shift timing. After the execution of step S2205, the second execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

<Third execution process of hold notice>
The process for executing the third execution of the hold notice in step S1808 (FIG. 41) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45. This process is performed as a part of the process for displaying the variation of the special figure, in other words, it is a process performed during the execution of the game round.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the advance notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. If the notice return flag is not stored, the process for executing the third execution of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If the advance notice return flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2302, and it is determined whether or not the promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. The promotion flag will be described later.

If the promotion flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2303 to determine whether or not the current display mode of the target hold image is the normal display mode HMa. The case where the current display mode of the target hold image is the normal display mode HMa is a case where the operation of switching to the original effect mode is performed during the game round of the target hold image.

When the current display mode is the normal display mode HMa, the process proceeds to step S2304, and it is determined whether or not the pending change point remains in the ongoing game round. For example, when the effect mode is changed at the end of the game round of the target hold image, or when the hold change point does not remain, the process proceeds to step S2314 and the flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. Clear the notice return flag. As a result, the return process of the hold notice effect is canceled, and the target hold image (hold image displayed in the execution display area D) continues to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa in the game round.

When the hold change point remains, in step S2305, the specific display mode before the release in the target hold image is grasped by referring to the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and this is grasped as the display mode of the change destination. do. In step S2306, the display mode of the holding image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S2305. Specifically, as an output command to the display control device 350, a command is set to indicate that the display mode of the hold image should be changed so as to include information indicating which display mode (display color) to change. do. As a result, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is changed (returned) to the specific display mode before the release at the latest hold change point.

After the execution of step S2306 or when a negative determination is made in step S2303 (when the current display mode in the target hold image is not the normal display mode HMa), the determined flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 344d in step S2307. Determine if it is. When the current display mode of the target hold image (hold image displayed in the execution display area D) is not the normal display mode HMa, the display mode of the hold image is a specific display mode before the release. The situation has been changed to.

If it is determined in step S2307 that the determined flag is stored, the third execution process of the hold notice is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the determined flag is not stored, the promotion process of the hold notice is executed in step S2308.

Here, the process for promoting the hold notice in step S2308 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the promotion process, first, in step S2401, the fluctuation pattern of the target hold image is grasped. This grasp is performed based on the fluctuation start command (step S712 in FIG. 23) transmitted from the main control device 162 at the start of the game times (running game times) of the target holding image.

In step S2402, the promotion determination of the hold notice effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S2401 and the promotion determination table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. In the promotion determination, the display mode of the target hold image (holding image displayed in the execution display area D) may be changed to a higher specific display mode (display mode higher than the display mode before cancellation). It determines whether or not it is possible.

As shown in FIG. 47, the promotion determination table has an upper limit of the display mode corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. For example, if the fluctuation pattern 5H corresponds to the deviation of SPSP reach A, the display mode is red. Changes up to HMd are allowed. Incidentally, in the case of each fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot, the change to the rainbow-colored display mode HMe is permitted in any of the fluctuation patterns 1A to 5A.

The promotion determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 47, and may have other configurations such that the upper limit display mode is different for each variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot, for example. In short, the upper limit display mode may be determined so as to correspond to the jackpot expectation of the game times (variation pattern) (in other words, to match the jackpot expectation).

In step S2402, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S2401 is specified with reference to the promotion determination table, and the current display mode of the target hold image is lower than the specified upper limit display mode. It is determined whether or not the display mode is used. As a result, if the current display mode is a display mode lower than the upper limit display mode, promotion of the display mode is permitted, and if not, promotion is not possible. When the display mode is changed in step S2306, it is determined whether or not the display mode is lower than the specified upper limit display mode for the changed display mode, and the result is the result. Whether or not promotion is possible is determined based on.

After the execution of step S2402, in step S2403, the determined flags are set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. The determined flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the promotion determination has been executed, in other words, for avoiding duplicate execution of the promotion determination.

In step S2404, it is determined whether or not the result of the promotion determination in step S2402 allows promotion of the display mode. If promotion is not allowed, the process for promoting the hold notice is exited, the process proceeds to step S2314 (FIG. 45), the notice return flag is cleared, and the third execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

If promotion is allowed, the process proceeds to step S2405, and the lottery process of the promotion scenario is executed. The promotion scenario determines which display mode the target hold image displayed in the execution display area D is changed at which timing (hold change point). Various table storage areas 343a of ROM 343 store promotion scenario lottery tables for drawing promotion scenarios, and in this promotion scenario lottery table, for execution lottery for drawing whether or not to execute promotion effect. In addition to the information, a plurality of types of promotion scenarios are set corresponding to each upper limit display mode of the hold notice effect. In step S2405, an execution lottery for whether or not to promote the display mode based on the promotion scenario lottery table and a lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, and a scenario for promotion. A lottery will be held.

In step S2406, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S2405 promotes the display mode. If the promotion is not performed, the process for promoting the hold notice is exited, the process proceeds to step S2314 (FIG. 45), the notice return flag is cleared, and the third execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

When promoting, the process proceeds to step S2407, and the promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario drawn in step S2405 is executed. After the execution of step S2407, in steps S2408 to S2410, the processing related to the change suggestion effect is executed. Since these processes are the same as those in steps S1603 to S1605 in the first execution process (FIG. 38 (a)) of the hold notice, the description thereof will be omitted.

After the execution of step S2410 or when a negative determination is made in step S2409, the promotion flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d in step S2411, and then the promotion process of the hold notice ends. The promotion flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the display mode of the target holding image should be promoted.

Returning to the description of the third execution process of the hold notice (FIG. 45), after executing the promotion process of the hold notice in step S2308, the third execution process of the hold notice ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302 (when the promotion flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S2309 to determine whether or not it is the promotion timing of the display mode. This determination is made based on the setting result of the promotion scenario in step S2407. If it is not the promotion timing, the process for the third execution of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If it is the promotion timing, the process proceeds to step S2310, and the display mode (upper display mode) of the change destination in the current change process is grasped based on the setting result of the promotion scenario. In the following step S2311, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S2310. Specifically, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is changed by including information indicating which display mode is to be changed as an output command to the display control device 350. Set a command to that effect.

In step S2312, it is determined whether or not the display mode grasped in step S2310 or the display mode set as the change destination in step S2311 is the final display mode in the promotion effect. For example, in the case where the promotion scenario is set so that the display mode is promoted in multiple stages by the change process multiple times, if the change process this time is a process in the middle stage, it is regarded as not the final display mode. The step is negatively determined, and the process for executing the third execution of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

In the final display mode, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is deleted in step S2313. In the following step S2314, the notice return flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is erased, and then the third execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

<About the flow of the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched>
The flow of the display mode of the holding image when the effect mode is switched will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50.

When a prize is generated in the first operating port 62 in a state where three hold information for the first special figure is acquired and the fourth hold information (hold image HW) is acquired, the main control device In 162, the hold look-ahead process (step S305) for the acquired hold information is executed. Here, as a result, it is assumed that the result of the hit / fail judgment being wrong and the fluctuation pattern being the fluctuation pattern 6H (SPSP reach B deviation) is pre-read.

Further, in the effect control device 143, the setting process for the hold notice (step S1403) is executed based on the pre-reading result in the main control device 162, and the execution lottery for the hold notice effect for the hold image HW and the final display mode are set. Lottery, lottery of production scenarios, etc. As a result of those lottery, the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode, and the scenario of displaying in the green display mode HMc at the beginning of the display and changing to the red display mode HMd at the later shift timing is selected as the effect scenario. And. In this case, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the hold image HW in the green display mode HMc is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga.

After that, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the effect operation unit 36, the effect mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B. At that time, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the display mode of the reserved image HW, which was set to the green display mode HMc in the effect mode A, is changed to the normal display mode HMa. In this case, the effect control device 143 stores information indicating the display mode (green display mode HMc) of the hold image HW before the mode switching in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. Note that FIG. 48B shows a case where the effect mode is switched in the middle of the game in which the hold information of the hold image HW is acquired.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round and the effect mode is switched from the effect mode B to the effect mode A, the effect control device 143 performs the advance notice return based on the information stored in the return area 344f. The setting process (step S1913) is executed, the original display mode (green display mode HMc) is grasped, the return scenario is drawn, and the like. As a result of the scenario lottery, it is assumed that a scenario is initially displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the original display mode HMc in the green display mode at the subsequent change timing.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 49A, at the time of switching to the effect mode A, the hold image HW is displayed in a state where the display mode is the normal display mode HMa. Then, when the selected return scenario changes the display mode of the pending image HW to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, and further changes to the green display mode HMc at the next shift timing, the figure is shown in the figure. As shown in 49 (b), the display mode of the hold image HW is returned to the original green display mode HMc at the timing when the hold image HW is shifted to the second unit hold display area Ga2. As a result, the display mode of the holding image HW, which is set to the normal display mode HMa at the time of switching to the effect mode B, is returned to the display mode before the switch to the effect mode B.

After switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A, until the game round of the hold image HW is started, a change suggestion effect suggesting a change (rank up) in the display mode of the hold image (FIG. 39). Execution lottery is not held. Therefore, when changing to the blue display mode HMb or changing to the green display mode HMc, the change suggestion effect is not performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50A, when the game round of the hold image HW is started, the effect control device 143 executes the third execution process (step S1808) of the hold notice, and the hold image Grasp the fluctuation pattern of the HW, grasp the upper limit display mode corresponding to the grasped fluctuation pattern, determine promotion to a higher display mode, and the like.

The fluctuation pattern of the image HW for holding is the fluctuation pattern 6H, and the upper limit display mode in this case is the red display mode HMd (FIG. 47). Therefore, in the promotion determination, the current display mode (green display mode HMc) is the upper limit display. Promotion of the display mode is permitted based on the mode lower than the mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 50B, the display mode of the hold image HW displayed in the execution display area D at a predetermined hold change point in the game round of the hold image HW is the red display mode HMd. That is, it is changed to a mode higher than the original display mode. At that time, if the execution lottery for the change suggestion effect is won, the change suggestion effect is performed and then the red display mode HMd is changed.

The red display mode HMd suggests that the SPSP reach effect is performed in the game times of the holding image. Here, since the variation pattern of the hold image HW is the variation pattern 6H corresponding to the SPSP reach B off effect, the SPSP reach B effect is performed in the game times of the hold image HW, and the hold image HW The suggestion by and the actual game performance are consistent.

After switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, the game round of the hold image HW may end without re-switching to the effect mode A. In this case, the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa without returning to the specific display mode.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the execution of the hold notice effect is canceled by switching the effect mode and the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, the target is held by shifting to the original effect mode. The display mode of the image HW for use is restored to the original specific display mode.

In the present embodiment, since the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player's expectation that the jackpot result will be obtained even before the start of the game round is aroused. be able to. Further, since a plurality of types of modes are set so that the jackpot expectation is different as a specific display mode, it is possible to give a magnitude to the expectation and suggest it, which is advantageous in arousing the player's expectation. It can be configured. Further, since the mode is switched between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and the tiredness of the game can be suppressed. In such a configuration, when the execution of the hold notice effect is canceled by switching the effect mode during the execution of the hold notice effect (the effect in which the hold image is set as a specific display mode), the effect notifies or suggests. There is a concern that the player may be misunderstood or anxious that the expected level has disappeared. In this case, it is conceivable to limit the switching of the effect mode during the execution of the hold notice effect, but this may lead to a situation in which the frequency of switching the effect mode is reduced, and the significance of providing a plurality of types of effect modes may be impaired. ..

In this regard, in this configuration, when the execution of the hold notice effect is canceled by switching the effect mode and the original effect mode is switched again in that state, the target hold image changed to the normal display mode HMa. Since the HW is restored to the original specific display mode, the degree of expectation can be notified again. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the degree of expectation has not disappeared, and it is possible to execute the hold notice effect without causing restrictions on the switching of the effect mode. That is, it is possible to preferably achieve both the execution of the hold notice effect and the switching of the effect mode.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold image when the hold notice effect is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and when the original effect mode is entered, the target is based on the return area 344f of the RAM 344. The configuration is such that the notification mode of the image HW for holding is set. As a result, when the mode shifts to the original effect mode, the display mode of the holding image, which is the normal display mode HMa, can be suitably returned to the original specific display mode.

At the time of the above setting, regardless of the result of the hold look-ahead processing performed on the target hold image, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f.

For example, when the effect mode A is changed to the effect mode B and then the effect mode A is changed, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead performed in the previous effect mode A. It is assumed that the display mode is set to a mode different from the display mode in the previous effect mode A. In this case, since the display mode of the target hold image HW in the later effect mode A does not match the display mode in the previous effect mode A, the player can see that the released hold notice effect has been restored. Hateful. In particular, in a configuration in which the display mode of the hold image can be changed stepwise, even if the same look-ahead result is obtained, the display mode of the hold image (hold notice effect) at the time of switching differs depending on the switching timing of the effect mode. Therefore, if the display mode in the later effect mode A is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, it is easy to set a mode different from the display mode in the previous effect mode A.

In this respect, in this configuration, the display mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f, not the result of the hold look-ahead processing. Therefore, when the mode shifts to the later effect mode A, the previous effect mode A It can be set in the same mode as the display mode actually displayed in. As a result, the display mode in the previous effect mode A and the display mode in the later effect mode B can be suitably matched, and the player recognizes that the display mode (hold notice effect) has been restored. It becomes possible to make it easier.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW is returned to the original specific display mode by the subsequent transition to the effect mode A, the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the original specific display mode. The configuration is such that the production scenario (return scenario) for this is reset.

When returning the target hold image HW to the original specific display mode in the later effect mode A, the target hold image HW is switched to the later effect mode A depending on the length of stay in the effect mode B immediately before that. It is assumed that the period until the game round of the image HW ends, that is, the remaining period in which the target holding image HW continues to be displayed fluctuates. In this regard, in this configuration, since the production scenario is reset when the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, the target holding image HW is displayed in the original specific display mode even when the remaining period fluctuates. Can be preferably changed.

At the time of the above, the configuration is such that the number of holdings before the target holding image HW is grasped and the production scenario is reset based on the result.

In this case, the effect scenario can be reset after appropriately grasping the remaining period, and the target hold image HW is suitably changed to the original specific display mode regardless of the period of stay in the effect mode B. be able to.

In the later effect mode A, the target holding image HW is set to the original specific display mode, and then promoted to a higher specific display mode.

In this case, the range of the display mode (suggested expectation) in the later effect mode A is limited to the display mode in the earlier effect mode A, and it is possible to prevent the range of suggestable expectations from being narrowed. .. At that time, if the specific display mode is suddenly set to a higher level, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence with the hold notice effect that was performed in the previous effect mode A, and the effect may be difficult to understand. In this respect, in this configuration, since it is possible to temporarily change from the original specific display mode to a higher display mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW has been restored (the released hold notice effect has been restored). ), And it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player.

In the above case, instead of unnecessarily promoting the display mode of the target hold image HW, a promotion determination is made as to whether or not to promote to a higher display mode based on the fluctuation pattern of the target hold image HW, and the result is Based on the above, it is configured to determine whether or not to use the upper mode. This makes it possible to promote the display mode of the target hold image HW while matching it with the game turn effect (reach effect, etc.) actually performed in the game times of the target hold image HW.

By making it possible to execute a change suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold image changes to a higher mode, and by shifting to the original effect mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW is displayed in the original specific display. When returning to the mode, the configuration is such that the execution of the change suggestion effect is restricted.

Since it is suggested that the change suggestion effect changes to the higher display mode, the expectation for the change to the higher display mode is aroused, and the player's attention to the reserved image can be increased. In such a configuration, for example, when the target holding image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in the previous effect mode A and the normal display mode HMa is changed to the green display mode HMc in the later effect mode A, a change suggestion effect is produced. When this is performed, the player actually returns to the original specific display mode, but the display mode is higher than the specific display mode (green display mode HMc) in the effect mode A that the player remembers. It is assumed that (red display mode HMd or rainbow color display mode HMe) is associated. In this case, since the actual display mode (green display mode HMc) in the target holding image HW is lower than the mode associated with the player, it may give an unpleasant impression to the player. In this respect, in this configuration, even if it corresponds to a change to a higher display mode, if it is only returned to the display mode in the previous effect mode A, the change suggestion effect is not executed, so that it is actually It is possible to prevent the player from associating an aspect higher than the display aspect of the above, and it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

The easiness of executing the hold notice effect differs between the effect mode A and the effect mode B.

In the case of such a configuration, since the production characteristics related to the suggestion of the jackpot expectation change by switching the production mode, the difference in the production mode is different from the case where only the appearance is changed by changing the background image or the character image. It can make a strong impression on people. However, on the other hand, if the effect mode is switched while the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the specific display mode (the state in which the ongoing hold notice effect is continued), the degree of expectation suggested by the target hold image HW is increased. There is a risk of causing a different situation before and after switching the production mode. In this case, such inconsistency in expectation can be suppressed by canceling the execution of the hold notice effect when the effect mode is switched, but this time, up to the expectation suggested by the specific display mode. There is a concern that the player may be misunderstood or anxious that the game has disappeared. By applying the present embodiment (such as a configuration in which the display mode of the target holding image HW is restored to the original specific display mode by shifting to the original effect mode) to such a configuration, each of them The features can be effectively functioned, and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, for example, when switching from one of the effect mode A and the effect mode B to the other is performed in the presence of the hold image in the specific display mode, before the switching. The display mode of the hold image is stored, and the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode. After that, if the original production mode (one production mode) is switched again before the game round of the holding image is completed, the display stored at the time of the previous switching (switching to the other production mode) is performed. Based on the information of the mode, the display mode of the reserved image is restored, and the display mode is changed to the original specific display mode or a higher specific display mode.

The game is played by the player between the time when the previous switching is performed and the time when the later switching (reswitching to the original production mode) is performed, that is, during the period in which the restoration process of the display mode is awaited. Therefore, new pending information may occur. In the present embodiment, the handling of the hold notice effect for the new hold information is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. In these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Processing for pending commands>
The pending command correspondence process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed when the hold command is received by the effect control device 143 (when the hold information is generated), and is executed instead of the hold command corresponding process shown in FIG. 31. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 31, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

When the value of the hold number counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is incremented by 1 in step S1402, the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step S2601. Determine if it is stored. The return standby flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that it is in a state of waiting for the return process (process for returning the display mode of the pending image to the original specific display mode), and is used for the return process. It is stored in various flag storage areas 344d during the waiting period. The waiting period for the return process is the period from when one of the effect mode A and the effect mode B is switched to the other and when the original mode is switched back to the original effect mode (the period of stay in the other effect mode). In addition, after switching to the other production mode, the game round of the target holding image (holding image to be the target of the display mode return processing) is completed without reswitching to the original production mode. There is a period until it is done.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601 (when the return standby flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S1403, and the hold notice setting process (FIG. 34) is executed. In the setting process for the hold notice, the setting for executing the hold notice effect is made for the generated hold information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601 (when the return standby flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S2602 without executing the hold notification setting process in step S1403, and the hold information corresponding to the generated hold information is held. The display mode of the image is set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, in the present embodiment, when new hold information is generated during the waiting period of the return process, the execution of the hold notice effect for the hold information is restricted.

The hold look-ahead process for the hold information is performed in the hold look-ahead process (FIG. 26) of the main control device 162 as in the case of other hold information. Therefore, although the effect control device 143 forcibly sets the display mode of the hold image to the normal display mode HMa as described above, the look-ahead result such as the fluctuation pattern is in a state of being acquired by the hold command from the main control device 162. ing.

In step S2603, the restricted occurrence information is stored in correspondence with the generated pending information. The information generated during the restriction indicates that the information is on hold information generated during the restricted period. The process of step S2603 is performed, for example, by storing the limited occurrence information together with the hold information such as the fluctuation pattern in the first area to the fourth area (FIG. 32) provided in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344. .. Therefore, when the shift process of step S1704 in the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40) is executed, the restricted occurrence information is shifted to the lower area side along with the hold information. As a result, even when the display area of the reserved image is shifted by the shift process, it is possible to grasp which of the reserved images was generated during the limited period. It should be noted that the information generated during the restriction may be stored in a storage area other than the hold storage area 344c after making it possible to recognize which hold information it is.

After the execution of step S2603, in step S1405, a process for displaying the hold image on the hold display unit 200 of the display screen G is executed. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step S2602, the hold image of the hold information generated during the limited period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601 (when the time limit is not reached) and step S1405 is reached via the setting process for the hold notice in step S1403 or the first execution process for the hold notice in step S1404. The hold image is displayed in the display mode set in those processes.

<Process for switching production mode>
The effect mode switching process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30) in the effect control device 143, and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG. 42. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 42, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the effect mode switching process in step S1903, the effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode after switching is set in step S1904. In the following step S1905, it is determined whether or not the return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. In the situation where the switching process of step S1903 is executed, the situation where the return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is the original effect after the effect mode is switched (destination). It means that the mode has been re-switched. On the contrary, the situation in which the return standby flag is not stored means that the above-mentioned previous switching has been performed (the situation in which the re-switching to the original production mode has not yet been performed).

If it is determined in step S1905 that the return standby flag is not stored (when the previous switching is performed), the process proceeds to step S1906, and the processes of steps S1906 to S1911 are performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. To execute.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1905 that the return standby flag is stored (reswitching is performed), the process proceeds to step S1912, and the return standby flag in the various flag storage areas 344d is deleted. As a result, the restricted state of the hold notice effect is released. Therefore, with respect to the hold information generated after the release, the hold notice effect setting process (step S1403) and the like are executed when the hold information is generated (when the hold command is received).

In step S1913, the setting process for returning to the notice is executed, and in the following step S2701, it is determined whether or not the pending information generated during the limited period exists. This determination is performed based on the restricted occurrence information stored in step S2603 of the hold response command process (FIG. 51).

If the hold information generated during the time limit does not exist, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the hold information generated during the restriction period exists, the second setting process for the hold notice is executed in step S2702, and then the effect mode switching process ends.

<Second setting process for hold notice>
The second setting process for the hold notice in step S2702 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

First, in step S2801, the pending information generated during the limited period is grasped. That is, based on the information generated during the restriction, it is specified which of the reserved information existing at that time is the reserved information generated during the restricted period.

After executing the process of step S2801, the processes of step S2802 and subsequent steps are executed for the generation hold during the grasped limited period. Since most of the processes after step S2802 are the same as each process in the setting process (FIG. 34) for the hold notice in step S1403 (FIG. 51), the description of the common process is simplified. The different processes will be described in detail.

In steps S2802 to S2804, the fluctuation pattern in the generation hold during the limited period is grasped with reference to the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. In step S2805, the effect mode after switching is grasped. For example, when the re-switching is the switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A, the effect mode A is grasped as the effect mode after the switch.

In steps S2806 to S2808, the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the effect mode after switching grasped in step S2805 is acquired, and the hold notice execution execution lottery is performed. If the execution lottery is won, in steps S2809 to S2814, the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice effect is determined, and the process (effect scenario) until the final display mode is displayed is determined. Or something.

At that time, if the final display mode lottery table for drawing the final display mode and the effect scenario lottery table for drawing the effect scenario are different in each effect mode, the effect mode after switching grasped in step S2805 is used. Acquire the corresponding table and draw a lottery. Although the hold during the limited period occurred during the effect mode before switching, the conditions set for the effect mode after switching are used for the execution lottery of the hold notice effect and the lottery of the final display mode. Apply and perform according to the production mode after switching.

In step S2815, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the second setting process for the hold notice ends. After the hold notice flag is set in this way, the first execution process of the hold notice in step S1701 in the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 38 (a)) and the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41). In the first execution process of the hold notice in step S1807, the process of changing the display mode of the hold image to the specific display mode is executed. That is, the hold notice effect for the hold information generated before the mode switching is performed in the effect mode after the mode switching.

<Process for displaying special figure fluctuation>
The special figure variation display process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. This process is executed in step S1305 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30) in the effect control device 143, and is executed in place of the special figure variation display process of FIG. 41. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 41, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

This processing is provided as a countermeasure when the game round of the target holding image (holding image to be the target of the return processing of the display mode) is completed without re-switching to the original effect mode. It is a thing.

After executing the variation end processing in step S1809, in step S1810, the holding information (the holding image to be the target of the display mode return processing) that triggered the holding notice effect of this special figure game round. It is determined whether or not the game is a game. In the case of the game times of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, in step S1811, it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag or the return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. If either the hold notice flag or the return standby flag is stored, the flag stored in step S1812 is deleted. As a result, the return process is canceled and the restricted state of the hold notice effect is released.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not the pending information generated during the restriction period exists. If there is hold information generated during the limit period, the process proceeds to step S2902 to determine which hold information is the hold information generated during the limit period. Each process of step S2901 and step S2902 is performed based on the restricted occurrence information stored in step S2603 of the hold correspondence command process (FIG. 51).

In step S2903, the setting process for the hold notice is executed for the occurrence hold during the limited period grasped in step S2902. This process is the same as the setting process (FIG. 34) for the hold notice effect in step S1403 (FIG. 51), and the setting process for executing the hold notice effect corresponding to the current effect mode is performed. Become.

That is, if the restricted state is released without reswitching to the original effect mode, the effect mode in which the hold notice effect is executed, the lottery for the final display mode, etc., is changed to the effect mode in which the user is staying at that time. The set conditions are applied. For example, when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B as the previous switch, a lottery for executing the hold notice effect is performed by applying the conditions set for the effect mode B. After the execution of step S2903 or when a negative determination is made in step S2902 (when there is no pending information generated during the restriction period), the special figure variation display process ends.

<About the flow of the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the occurrence hold during the restriction period>
The flow of the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the occurrence hold during the restriction period will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

When the fourth hold information of the first special figure is generated in the situation of the effect mode A, the hold look-ahead process (step S305) by the main control device 162 is performed, and the hold notice is given by the effect control device 143. The setting process (step S1403) is performed. As a result, when the hold notice effect in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the hold image HA in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed. Is displayed in the 4th unit hold display area Ga4 of the 1st hold display area Ga.

When the mode switching operation is performed by the player in the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the hold image HA is acquired, the effect mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B. At this time, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the display mode of the reserved image HA is changed from the green display mode HMc to the normal display mode HMa.

Then, it is assumed that two new hold information are generated in the period until the hold image HA is shifted to the second unit hold display area Ga2 while the effect mode is maintained in the effect mode B. For the newly generated hold information, the effect control device 143 does not perform the setting process for the hold notice, and the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, since the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted, the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the newly generated hold information is the normal display mode, as shown in FIG. 55 (c). It is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3 and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 in the state of being HMa, respectively.

The hold look-ahead process in the main control device 162 for the hold information of the hold images HB1 and HB2 is performed at the acquisition timing of the hold information like the other hold information. Since the pre-reading result is notified to the effect control device 143 through the hold command, the effect control device 143 is in a state in which the setting process for the hold notice is not performed, but the pre-reading result related to the hold information is acquired. It is in.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round and the effect mode is switched from the effect mode B to the effect mode A, the effect control device 143 displays the hold images HB1 and HB2 displayed in the normal display mode HMa. The second setting process (step S2702) for the hold notice is executed as the target. In the second setting process for the hold notice, the execution lottery of the hold notice effect, the lottery of the final display mode, the lottery of the effect scenario, etc. are performed based on the pre-reading result notified from the main control device 162 at the acquisition timing of the hold information. It is a thing. When performing those lottery, the lottery table used corresponds to the effect mode A which is the effect mode after switching. That is, although the hold information of the hold images HB1 and HB2 is acquired in the situation of the effect mode B, the lottery for the hold notice effect for them is the mode at which the hold notice effect is executed. The lottery conditions set for mode A are applied.

As a result of the above lottery, for example, when the hold notice effect is not executed for the hold image HB1 and the hold notice effect is executed for the hold image HB2 with the display mode set to the blue display mode HMb. As shown in FIG. 55 (d), the display mode of the hold image HB1 is maintained in the normal display mode HMa, and the display mode of the hold image HB2 is changed to the blue display mode HMb.

Regarding the hold image HA corresponding to the hold information acquired in the effect mode A before shifting to the effect mode B, the setting process for returning the notice by the effect control device 143 (step S1913), the second of the hold notice. By performing the execution process (step S1702), the display mode is changed to the green display mode HMc, which is the original display mode.

Further, unlike the case where the switching to the effect mode A is performed as described above, after the state shown in FIG. 55 (c), the game rotation of the holding image HA is performed while the effect mode B is maintained. When the game round of the last reserved information acquired in the previous effect mode A is completed, the restricted state ends with the end of the game round. In this case, at the end timing of the game round, the second setting process for the hold notice for the hold images HB1 and HB2 is executed. At this time, various lottery such as execution lottery of hold notice effect, lottery of final display mode, lottery of effect scenario, etc. are performed using the lottery table corresponding to the effect mode B. That is, a lottery condition different from that in the case of FIG. 55 (d) is applied.

As a result of the lottery, for example, when the hold notice effect is executed with the display mode being the blue display mode HMb for the hold image HB1 and the hold notice effect is not executed for the hold image HB2, FIG. As shown in 55 (e), the display mode of the reserved image HB1 is changed to the blue display mode HMb, and the display mode of the reserved image HB1 is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

For the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the hold information acquired during the restricted state in which the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted, the display mode after the restricted state ends is the hold look-ahead process executed during the restricted state. The configuration was set based on the results.

In the present embodiment, when the effect mode is switched during the execution of the hold notice effect, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted until the original effect mode is switched again. When new hold information is acquired in the restricted state, it is assumed that the specific display mode is not changed even for such hold information, and the player's expectation for the hold information acquired during the restricted state. There is a concern that it will not be possible to arouse.

In this regard, according to this configuration, the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the hold information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to the specific display mode after the end of the restricted state. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation about the pending information acquired in. At that time, since the change to the specific display mode after the restricted state (execution of the hold notice effect) is performed based on the result of the hold look-ahead process executed during the restricted state, the hold look-ahead is performed in the same manner as in the non-restricted state. Processing can be performed. That is, since it is not necessary to change the configuration of the hold look-ahead processing, it is possible to execute the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated. It will be possible.

Regardless of whether or not the hold look-ahead processing for the received hold information is in the restricted state, the configuration is such that the hold information is acquired at the same time.

In this case, since the hold look-ahead process can be performed according to the acquisition timing of the hold information in both the restricted state and the other case, the hold look-ahead process is distinguished between the former case and the latter case. You don't have to. Therefore, it is possible to execute the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The setting of the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 after the restricted state (setting of the hold notice effect) is executed at the end of the restricted state.

For example, when the display mode after the restricted state is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process executed during the restricted state, the setting may not be executed during the restricted state. However, when the game times of the holding images HB1 and HB2 for which the display mode is set are executed in the restricted state, the display period of the holding image ends without reflecting the setting of the display mode, and the setting is set. It may be wasted. In this respect, in this configuration, since the display mode is set at the end of the restricted state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such waste and perform efficient processing.

When the hold information is acquired during the restricted state, the restricted occurrence information indicating that the hold information was acquired during the restricted state is stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp after the restricted state that the reserved information is acquired during the restricted state based on the restricted occurrence information stored in the reserved storage area 344c of the RAM 344. Therefore, even if the hold information acquired before the restricted state and the hold information acquired during the restricted state are mixed after the end of the restricted state, the held information acquired during the restricted state can be easily used. Can be identified. As a result, when setting the display mode of each hold image after the restricted state, the hold information acquired during the restricted state and the held information not otherwise are identified, and only the held information acquired during the restricted state is identified. It becomes possible to perform processing on the target.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the case where the effect mode in which the hold notice effect occurs frequently (effect mode A) is switched to the low effect mode (effect mode B) and the case where the low effect mode is switched to the high effect mode are divided. Separately, it is configured to restore the display mode of the reserved image. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the effect mode is switched in a situation where a hold image of a specific display mode exists, and after the hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa, the original effect mode is restored. When the switching is performed, the display mode is restored to the holding image. However, in the present embodiment, even if the original production mode is not switched again, the switching is performed. It is configured to perform restoration processing of the display mode for the reserved image. By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect in the effect mode A (the execution probability of the hold notice effect when the look-ahead result is out of order) is higher than that of the effect mode B, in other words, the specific display mode of the same display color. On the other hand, the jackpot expectation in the effect mode A is lower than that in the effect mode B, which is the same as that of the first embodiment.

<Process for switching production mode>
The effect mode switching process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. This process is executed in step S1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30) in the effect control device 143, and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG. 42. In FIG. 56, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 42, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After the effect mode switching process is executed in step S1903, the effect mode flags corresponding to the effect mode after switching are set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step S1904. The effect mode flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp the effect mode after the switch before the effect mode is switched and the current effect mode after the effect mode is switched.

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. The hold notice flag is for the MPU 342 to know that the hold notice effect should be executed or that the hold notice effect is being executed.

If the hold notice flag is not stored, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the hold notice flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3102 to clear the hold notice flag. As a result, if the hold notice effect is executed before the mode is switched, the continuation of the hold notice effect being executed is canceled, and if the hold notice effect is in the standby state, the hold notice effect waits ( Execution reservation) is canceled.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not there is a hold image displayed in the specific display mode. Specifically, among the hold images displayed in the hold display areas Ga and Gb, in any of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow color display mode HMe. Determine if the displayed item exists. This determination is performed with reference to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. If the holding image displayed in the specific display mode does not exist, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is.

If there is a holding image displayed in a specific display mode, the process proceeds to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the mode switching this time is switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B. That is, whether or not the mode is switched from the effect mode on the side where the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect is high to the effect mode on the low side (in other words, the effect mode on the side where the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is low is changed to the effect mode on the high side. Whether or not it is a switch to the production mode) is determined. In the case of switching to the effect mode B, in step S3105, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the holding image displayed in the specific display mode is grasped.

In step S3106, the return determination is performed based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S3105 and the return determination table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. The return determination is to determine whether or not it is possible to return the holding image displayed in the specific display mode to the specific display mode again after switching the effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the return determination table, the upper limit of the display mode is set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern 5H corresponding to the SPSP reach A deviation, the green display mode is set. Return (change) to HMc is allowed. When the hold notice effect is executed while staying in the effect mode B, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 5H is the red display mode HMd, but the upper limit display mode in the return determination table is more than that. It is limited to the lower green display mode HMc. This also applies to other deviation-corresponding fluctuation patterns such as fluctuation pattern 3H and fluctuation pattern 4H. Incidentally, in the case of each fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot, the change to the rainbow-colored display mode HMe is permitted in any of the fluctuation patterns 1A to 5A. The return determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 57, and may have other configurations such that the upper limit display mode is different for each variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot.

In step S3106, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S3105 is specified with reference to the return determination table, and the current display mode of the target holding image is the display mode below the specified upper limit display mode. It is determined whether or not it is. As a result, if the current display mode is a display mode equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode, the return of the display mode is allowed, and if not, the return is not possible.

In step S3107, it is determined whether or not the result of the return determination in step S3106 allows the return of the display mode. If the return is not allowed, the process proceeds to step S3108, and a process for canceling the display of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is executed. That is, the holding image displayed in the specific display mode is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa as the effect mode is switched. Further, in the release process of step S3108, the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the effect scenario data set in step S1513 of the hold notice setting process (FIG. 34) are also deleted. To execute. After the execution of step S3108, the effect mode switching process ends.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3107 (when the return of the display mode is allowed), the information of the display mode of each holding image stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344 is returned to the RAM 344 in step S3109. Store in the use area 344f. In step S3110, similarly to step S3108, a process for canceling the display of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is executed.

In step S3111, the setting process for returning to the notice is executed, and then the effect mode switching process is terminated. The setting process for returning the advance notice in step S3111 is the same as the setting process for returning the advance notice (FIG. 43) in step S1913 of the effect mode switching process (FIG. 42) according to the first embodiment. In the setting process for returning to the notice, after switching to the effect mode B, at what timing the display mode of the hold image is restored (changed), how to restore (change with one change, or is it restored), or Perform setting processing such as (whether to restore by stepwise change).

When the setting process for returning the notice is performed as described above, the second execution process (FIG. 44) of the hold notice in step S1702 of the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40 (a)) and the special figure change. In the third execution process (FIG. 45) of the hold notice in step S1808 of the display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target hold image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the hold notice, the process is executed so as to return the display mode of the target hold image to the original specific display mode (specific display mode before switching to the effect mode B).

Further, in the third execution process of the hold notice, the current display mode of the target hold image (display mode restored by the return process) and the variation pattern of the target hold image in the game round of the target hold image. Is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether or not it is possible to change (promote) to a higher display mode. Then, when such a change is possible, the promotion process of the display mode is performed through the promotion determination and the promotion lottery.

At this time, the upper limit display mode referred to is the one set for the effect mode B (the one that meets the conditions of the hold notice effect in the effect mode B). Therefore, at the time of returning the display mode by switching to the effect mode B, even if the display mode that can be restored is limited to the lower upper limit display mode determined by the return determination table, the effect mode is finally set. The display mode of the target holding image can be changed within the range of the upper limit display mode suitable for B.

If a negative determination is made in step S3104 (switching from effect mode B to effect mode A), the process of steps S3105-step S3107 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S3109. That is, in the case of switching from the effect mode B on the low side where the hold notice effect occurs to the effect mode A on the high side, the display mode in the effect mode B is reflected as it is in the effect mode A after the mode is switched. It is configured.

<About the flow of the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched>
The flow of the display mode of the holding image when the effect mode is switched will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Here, a case of switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B will be described. As described above, the effect mode A has a relatively high frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect, and the effect mode B has a relatively low frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect.

When the third hold information (hold image HW) of the first special figure is generated in the situation of the effect mode A, the main control device 162 performs the hold look-ahead process (step S305) for the generated hold information. Run. Here, as a result, it is assumed that the result of the hit / fail judgment being wrong and the fluctuation pattern being the fluctuation pattern 4H (SP reach B deviation) is pre-read.

Further, in the effect control device 143, the setting process for the hold notice (step S1403) is executed based on the pre-reading result in the main control device 162, and the execution lottery for the hold notice effect for the hold image HW and the final display mode are set. Lottery, lottery of production scenarios, etc. As a result of those lottery, the green display mode HMc is selected as the final display mode, and the scenario in which the blue display mode HMb is initially displayed as the production scenario and the scenario is changed to the green display mode HMc at the first shift timing is selected. And. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (a1), the hold image HW set as the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3 of the first hold display area Ga.

After that, when the mode switching operation is performed by the player using the effect operation unit 36 in a state where the display mode of the hold image HW is the blue display mode HMb, as shown in FIG. 58 (a2), the effect is produced. The mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa.

Further, when switching to the effect mode B, the effect control device 143 determines whether or not to return the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode (step S3106). In the return determination, the fluctuation pattern of the hold image HW is specified, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is grasped based on the return determination table (FIG. 57), and the hold before switching to the effect mode B is performed. It is determined whether or not the display mode of the image HW is the mode equal to or less than the grasped upper limit display mode.

Here, the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 4H, which is the fluctuation pattern of the hold image HW, is the blue display mode HMb, and the display mode of the hold image HW before switching to the effect mode B is the blue display mode HMb. The display mode of the holding image HW before switching to the effect mode B is the following mode, which is the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is allowed, and the return scenario is set in the setting process for the advance notice return (step S3111).

As a result, assuming that a scenario for returning to the blue display mode HMb is set at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. 58 (a3), the display position of the hold image HW is the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second. When shifting to the unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

After that, when the display position of the hold image HW set to the blue display mode HMb shifts to the execution display area D and the game rotation of the hold image HW is started, the effect control device 143 performs the third execution of the hold notice. Processing (step S1808) is executed, and promotion determination to a higher display mode is performed. In this case, the promotion determination is performed by applying the determination condition of the effect mode B.

For example, if the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H in the effect mode B is set to the blue display mode HMb lower than that in the effect mode A, the promotion of the hold image HW is disallowed and the hold image HW is for hold. The display mode of the image HW is maintained in the blue display mode HMb. Further, when the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H in the effect mode B is set to the green display mode HMc as in the case of the effect mode A, promotion is permitted, and the predetermined image HW for holding is determined in the game round. At the hold change point, the display mode of the hold image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case where the effect mode is switched in the situation where the display mode of the hold image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in the effect mode A will be described.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a1), the hold image HW of the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the display position of the hold image HW is the first without switching the effect mode. It is assumed that the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the blue display mode HMb to the green display mode HMc as shown in FIG. 58 (b1) after shifting to the 2-unit hold display area Ga2.

In that state, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the effect operation unit 36, the effect mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B and the hold image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2). The display mode of the HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa.

At this time, the effect control device 143 makes a return determination, but the display mode of the hold image HW before switching to the effect mode B is higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is not permitted. As a result, the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa until it is shifted to the execution display area D.

After that, when the display position of the hold image HW set to the normal display mode HMa shifts to the execution display area D and the game rotation of the hold image HW is started, the effect control device 143 performs the third execution of the hold notice. Process is executed, and promotion judgment to a higher display mode is performed. For example, when the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H in the effect mode B is set to the blue display mode HMb, promotion to the blue display mode HMb is permitted, and when it is set to the green display mode HMc, it is set. , Green display mode Promotion up to HMc is allowed. Note that FIG. 58 (b3) shows a case where the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted to the blue display mode HMb.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the effect mode is switched in a situation where the hold image is set to a specific display mode (a situation in which the hold notice effect is executed), the display mode of the target hold image HW in the effect mode after switching is before switching. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the display mode is the same as the display mode in the effect mode.

In the present embodiment, since the mode is switched between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and the tiredness of the game can be suppressed. At that time, the effect mode B is set as an effect mode in which the hold notice effect is less likely to be executed than the effect mode A. In the case of such a configuration, since the production characteristics related to the suggestion of the jackpot expectation change by switching the production mode, the difference in the production mode is different from the case where only the appearance is changed by changing the background image or the character image. It can make a strong impression on people.

However, on the other hand, when the switching condition from the effect mode A to the effect mode B is satisfied in the situation where the hold image is set to the specific display mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW is maintained and the effect mode is set. When the switching is made, there is a concern that only the corresponding expectation level will change even though the display mode has not changed. For example, even if the specific display mode of the same green display mode HMc is used, the degree of expectation in the effect mode B is higher than that of the effect mode A. Therefore, the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the green display mode HMc. When the player switches from the production mode A to the production mode B, if the player understands the expectation of the green display mode HMc based on the expectation in the production mode B after the mode is switched, the game actually performed in the game times. There is a risk of associating with a higher degree of expectation than the rendition (reach production, etc.).

In this respect, in this configuration, when the effect mode is switched in a situation where the hold image is set to the specific display mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW is the same as the display mode in the effect mode before switching. Determine whether or not to do so. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistency in the degree of expectation, and it is possible to preferably display the hold image after the transition to the effect mode B.

The display mode of the target hold image HW at the time of transition to the effect mode B is compared with the upper limit display mode set corresponding to the effect mode B, and the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the result. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the display mode is the same as the display mode before switching.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the display mode can be the same as the display mode in the effect mode A by comparing the display mode at the time of transition to the effect mode B with the upper limit display mode set corresponding to the effect mode B. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not each mode (blue display mode HMb, etc.) has the same mode based on the corresponding expectation in the effect mode B, and the display of the hold image after the transition to the effect mode B is performed. Can be preferably performed.

In the above case, a plurality of upper limit display modes in the effect mode B are set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and among them, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the pre-read fluctuation pattern for the target holding image HW is applied and described above. It was configured to make a judgment. As a result, based on the pre-reading result of the target hold image HW, that is, the hit / fail result actually notified in the game times of the target hold image HW and the game time effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game time. It is possible to sort out whether or not the same mode is used.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW in the effect mode B is the same as the display mode in the effect mode A before the mode switching, the normal display mode HMa of the target hold image HW is changed to the same mode. And said.

In the above configuration, when the display mode of the target holding image HW is the same as that before the mode switching, it is possible to change the display mode from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. With such a configuration, the display mode of the target hold image HW can be switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B regardless of whether the mode is the same as before the mode is switched or not. Along with this, the configuration can be changed to the normal display mode HMa. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to the determination that the same mode is not used. In addition, by setting the configuration to change to the specific display mode after becoming the normal display mode HMa, the hold is set to the normal display mode HMa after the transition to the effect mode B, including the case where it is determined that the same mode is not used. It is possible to arouse a feeling of expectation that the image for holding is changed to a specific display mode, and it is possible to maintain the feeling of expectation for the image for holding (holding information).

In the case of switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A, the display mode of the target hold image in the effect mode A after the mode switch is the same as the display mode in the effect mode A before the mode switch without performing the above determination. It was configured as an aspect.

In the above configuration, when the mode is switched from the side where the expectation for the hold notice effect is high to the side where the expectation is low, it is not determined whether or not the same mode is used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuation of the hold notice effect (maintenance of the specific display mode of the hold image) from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the display mode of the hold image before and after the effect mode switching is targeted, but in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold image before and after the open / close execution mode is targeted. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 67. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the variable display time table in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (high probability game state) and the variable display time in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (time saving game state). The table is set separately from the variable display time table (FIG. 14) when the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode (normal game state) are set.

In the variable display time table of the high-probability gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), a jackpot and a miss are set respectively. In the variation display time table for jackpot, the variation pattern 11A corresponding to the SPSP reach A and the variation pattern 12A corresponding to the SPSP reach B are set corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS.

Further, in the variation display time table for deviation, the variation pattern 11H corresponding to the complete deviation, the variation pattern 12H corresponding to the SPSP reach A deviation, and the SPSP reach B deviation are supported according to the value of the variation type counter CS. The fluctuation pattern 13H is set. When the value of the variation type counter CS is in the range of 0 to 79, either the complete deviation (variation pattern 1H) or the normal reach deviation (variation pattern 2H) corresponds in the normal gaming state (FIG. 14 (b)). ), In the high-probability gaming state, only complete deviation (variation pattern 11H) corresponds (FIG. 59 (b)). That is, even if the variable type counter CS has the same value, different game rotation effects can be performed between the normal game state and the high probability game state.

In the variable display time table for the time-saving game state, as shown in FIGS. 59 (c) and 59 (d), a jackpot and a miss are set, respectively. In the fluctuation display time table for jackpots, the fluctuation pattern 21A corresponding to SP reach A, the fluctuation pattern 22A corresponding to SP reach B, and SPSP reach A are supported according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. The fluctuation pattern 23A and the fluctuation pattern 24A corresponding to each SPSP reach B are set.

Further, in the variation display time table for deviation, the variation pattern 21H corresponding to the complete deviation, the variation pattern 22H corresponding to the SP reach A deviation, and the SP reach B deviation correspond to the value of the variation type counter CS. The fluctuation pattern 23H, the fluctuation pattern 24H corresponding to the SPSP reach A deviation, and the fluctuation pattern 25H corresponding to the SPSP reach B deviation are set. Even in the variation display time table for the time-saving gaming state, when the variation type counter CS is compared with the same value, the game rotation effect different from the normal gaming state and the high-accuracy gaming state can be performed. In the variable display time table for deviation corresponding to the time saving game state, the ratio of complete deviation is smaller than that of other game states, but this is because the reach effect is generated by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the reach effect. This is to prevent the time-saving game state from ending without doing so.

The correspondence between the number of types of fluctuation patterns and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS in each fluctuation display time table shown in FIG. 59 is only an example, and the contents differ depending on the normal gaming state, the high-probability gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state. Other modes may be used as long as they are set.

<Setting process for hold notice>
The setting process for the hold notice according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed when the effect control device 143 receives the hold command from the main control device 162. This process is executed in step S1403 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 31), and is executed in place of the hold command setting process of FIG. 34. In FIG. 60, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 34, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step S1501, fluctuation pattern information and the like regarding the current hold information are grasped based on the hold information stored in step S1401 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 31). In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the current hold information corresponds to the jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern information and the like grasped in step S1501.

If it does not correspond to the jackpot, that is, if it is the hold information corresponding to the deviation, the process proceeds to step S3301, and the fluctuation pattern of the hold information is the fluctuation pattern 1H (the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the complete deviation in the normal gaming state). , It is determined whether or not the variation pattern 11H (variation pattern corresponding to the complete deviation in the high-probability gaming state) or the variation pattern 21H (the variation pattern corresponding to the complete deviation in the time-saving gaming state). If a negative judgment is made in step S3301 (if it is not any of the fluctuation pattern 1H, the fluctuation pattern 11H, and the fluctuation pattern 21H) or if a positive judgment is made in step S1502 (when the pending information corresponds to the jackpot), the step S3302 is performed. Grasp the current game status. Specifically, it grasps whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a high-probability gaming state, or a time-saving gaming state.

In step S3303, the corresponding hold notice execution lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. A plurality of hold notice execution lottery tables are set according to the presence or absence of a big hit and the game state. For example, the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the hold information this time is a big hit is set to have a higher winning probability than the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the hold information is out of order. In addition, in the hold notice execution lottery table that corresponds to the high-probability game state and corresponds to the case where the hold information of this time is out of order, in order to suppress the occurrence of the ghost effect in the high-probability game state, the normal game state and the time-saving game The winning probability is set lower than that of the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the state and when the hold information of this time is out of order.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to make the execution probability of the hold notice effect different according to the game state, and the execution probability of the hold notice effect may be common in the above three states or two of them.

In step S1506, an execution lottery for whether or not to execute the hold notice effect is performed based on the hold notice execution lottery table acquired in step S3303 and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344. I do. In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1506 is a winning result. If the lottery result is an execution winning, the process proceeds to step S1508 to grasp the corresponding number of holdings.

In step S3304, the final display mode lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state is acquired from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. In the final display mode lottery table, a range of selectable final display modes and a selection probability of each display mode are set corresponding to each variation pattern. In the present embodiment, since each variation pattern is set according to the game state, the final display mode lottery table corresponding to each game state is also set separately.

FIG. 61 shows a table for jackpot and a table for losing, respectively, as an example of the final display mode lottery table in the high probability gaming state. Further, FIG. 62 shows a table for jackpot and a table for losing, respectively, as an example of the final display mode lottery table in the time-saving game state.

In step S1510, this hold is based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S1501, the final display mode lottery table acquired in step S3304, and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344. A lottery will be drawn for the final display mode in the advance notice production. In step S1511, the production scenario lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. In step S1512, the number of holds grasped in step S1508, the final display mode determined in step S1510, the effect scenario lottery table acquired in step S1511, and the lottery counter (random value value) acquired from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. ) And, the production scenario in this hold notice production will be drawn.

In step S1513, the effect scenario data is set so that the effect scenario drawn in step S1512 is executed. In step S1514, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the setting process for the hold notice ends. The hold notice flag is for the MPU 342 to know that the hold notice effect should be executed.

When the setting process for the hold notice is performed as described above, based on the setting result of step S1513, step S1404 of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 31) and step S1701 of the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40). In the first execution process (FIG. 38) of the hold notice in step S1807 of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target hold image is changed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301 (when the variation pattern of the hold information is a variation pattern of a completely out-of-pair pair), the process proceeds to step S1515, and the display mode of the hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa. After that, the setting process for the hold notice is terminated.

<Processing for open / close execution mode>
The processing for the opening / closing execution mode according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. This process is executed in step S1306 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30).

First, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is being executed. If the open / close execution mode is not being executed, it is determined whether or not the opening command (step S909 in FIG. 25) has been received from the main controller 162 in step S3402, that is, whether or not it is the start timing of the open / close execution mode. judge. If the opening command has not been received, the open / close execution mode process ends as it is.

If the opening command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3403 to execute the opening process. In the opening process, a transmission command to the display control device 350 is set so that a predetermined opening effect is executed on the display screen G or the like of the symbol display device 75.

In step S3404, it is determined whether or not the number of holds (total number of special 1 hold and special 2 hold) is 0, that is, whether or not there is a hold. If the number of holdings is 0 (when there is no holding), the processing for the open / close execution mode is terminated as it is.

If the number of held items is not 0 and there is a hold, the process proceeds to step S3405, and it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. If the hold notice flag is stored, the hold notice flag is deleted in step S3406. As a result, if the hold notice effect is executed before the start of the open / close execution mode, the continuation of the hold notice effect being executed is canceled, and if the hold notice effect is in the standby state, the hold notice effect is displayed. Wait (execution reservation) is cancelled.

In step S3407, it is determined whether or not there is a holding image displayed in the specific display mode. Specifically, among the hold images displayed in the hold display areas Ga and Gb, in any of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow color display mode HMe. Determine if the displayed item exists. This determination is performed with reference to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344.

If there is a hold image displayed in the specific display mode, the process proceeds to step S3408, and information indicating which mode the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is displayed is used for returning the RAM 344. Store in area 344f. In the following step S3409, information indicating the game state before the open / close execution mode is stored in the RAM 344. For example, when the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is the normal gaming state, the information corresponding to the normal gaming state is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 344. In addition, this information is stored in a storage area different from the flag in order to distinguish it from the state flag indicating the current gaming state.

In step S3410, the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d. The return standby flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that it is in a state of waiting for a return process for returning the display mode of the hold image to the original specific display mode. In the following step S3411, a process of erasing the reserved image from the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the hold image displayed on the hold display unit 200 is deleted when the open / close execution mode is started. After the execution of step S3411, the process for opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S3405 (when the hold notice flag is not stored) or when a negative determination is made in step S3407 (when there is no hold image in a specific display mode), the process proceeds to step S3411 for hold. Performs image erasing processing. That is, even when the hold notice effect is not being executed, the hold image of the hold display unit 200 is deleted when the open / close execution mode is started.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3401 (in the open / close execution mode), the process proceeds to step S3412 to determine whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the ending effect. If it has not elapsed, the process for opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S3413, and then the processing for opening / closing execution mode is terminated. In the process for opening / closing execution mode, a transmission command to the display control device 350 is set so that a predetermined round effect, a winning effect, an ending effect, etc. are executed on the display screen G or the like of the symbol display device 75.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3412 (when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the ending effect), the process proceeds to step S3414 to determine whether or not the return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. If the return standby flag is not stored, the open / close execution mode process ends as it is.

If the return standby flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3415 to execute the process of clearing the return standby flag. Here, the situation in which the affirmative determination is made in step S3414 means that the opening / closing execution mode is performed in the situation where the hold notice effect is being executed, and the display of the hold image is erased. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3416, and the setting process for returning the advance notice for returning the display mode of the reserved image to the specific display mode is executed. The details of the process will be described later.

After the execution of step S3416, the setting for displaying the reserved image in the normal display mode HMa is performed in step S3417. That is, when returning the display mode of the hold image to the specific display mode, immediately after the end of the open / close execution mode, the display mode of the hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa and the display is resumed. After the execution of step S3417, the process for opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3414 (when the return standby flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S3418 to determine whether or not the number of holds (total number of special 1 hold and special 2 hold) is 0. do. If the number of holds is 0 and there is no hold, the process for opening / closing execution mode is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is not 0 and there are holdings, the holding images for those holdings are displayed in the normal display mode HMa in step S3417.

<Setting process for returning to advance notice>
The setting process for returning to the notice in step S3416 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3501, the game state before the open / close execution mode is grasped. This grasp is performed based on the information stored in step S3409 (FIG. 63). In step S3502, the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is grasped. This grasp is performed based on the hold information obtained by analyzing the fluctuation start command.

In step S3503, the display mode is restored based on the game state before the opening / closing execution mode grasped in step S3501, the jackpot type grasped in step S3502, and the return determination table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. Make a judgment. The return determination determines whether or not to return the holding image, which has been set to the specific display mode in the game state before the open / close execution mode, to the original display mode in the game state after the open / close execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the return determination table, whether the return of the display mode is allowed according to the game state before the open / close execution mode and the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the open / close execution mode this time. Whether or not it is decided. Specifically, when the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is the time-saving gaming state and the jackpot type is the normal jackpot, or when the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is the high-probability gaming state, the jackpot type is the probabilistic jackpot. When the game state is common before and after the open / close execution mode as in a certain case, the return of the display mode of the hold image is allowed. On the other hand, when the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is the time-saving gaming state and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot, or when the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability gaming state and the jackpot type is the normal jackpot. When the game state before the open / close execution mode is the normal game state and the game state is different before and after the open / close execution mode, such as when the jackpot type is the time-saving game state, the return of the above display mode is restricted.

However, when the game state before the open / close execution mode is the normal game state and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot, the possibility of return is determined by referring to the pre-reading result of the target hold image. Specifically, when the pre-reading result of the target holding image is a result other than the normal jackpot, the return of the above display mode is restricted, while when the pre-reading result of the target holding image is a normal jackpot, the above display mode is restricted. Allows the return of. This is to prevent the player from ending the high-accuracy gaming state without being able to fully enjoy the game in the high-accuracy gaming state.

That is, when the game state before the open / close execution mode is the normal game state and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot, the game of the first special figure (left-handed game state) to the second special figure across the open / close execution mode. The game mode is switched to the game (right-handed game state), but at that time, there is usually a big hit in the hold of the first special figure, and when the hold is exhausted, it is possible to shift to the high probability game state. Despite being able to do so, the situation will end early. Therefore, when there is such a possibility, the display mode of the holding image of the first special is returned to the specific display mode to alert the player, and the second operating port 63 (starting port for the second special drawing) is used. ) Is encouraged to win a prize promptly.

In the present embodiment, when the pre-reading result of the target holding image is a probability variation jackpot, the return of the above display mode is restricted, but a configuration that allows this may be used.

Returning to the description of the setting process for returning the advance notice (FIG. 64), after the execution of step S3503, in step S3504, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination process in step S3503 allows the return of the display mode. If the return is not allowed, the setting process for the advance notice return is terminated as it is. That is, the display mode of the target holding image after the open / close execution mode remains the same as the normal display mode HMa.

If the return is allowed, in step S3505, the return area 344f of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the display mode of the target hold image before the open / close execution mode is grasped. After the execution of step S3505, the processes of steps S3506 to S3510 are executed.

These processes are the same as those in steps S2103 to S2107 of FIG. 43, and display the display mode of the target hold image at any timing according to the number of holds before the target hold image. It sets whether to return to the mode. That is, in step S3506, the number of held images before the target holding image is grasped, and if the grasped number of held images is 1 or more, the return scenario for the display mode grasped in step S3505 in step S3508. Lottery. In step S3509, the return scenario data is set so that the lottery return scenario is executed, and in step S3510, the advance notice return flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. The notice return flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that a process for restoring the display mode of the reserved image should be executed.

When the setting process for returning the notice is performed as described above, the second execution process (FIG. 44) of the hold notice in step S1702 of the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40 (a)) and the special figure change. In the third execution process (FIG. 45) of the hold notice in step S1808 of the display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target hold image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the hold notice, the process is executed so as to return the display mode of the target hold image to the original specific display mode (specific display mode before the open / close execution mode).

Further, in the third execution process of the hold notice, the current display mode of the target hold image (display mode restored by the return process) and the variation pattern of the target hold image in the game round of the target hold image. Is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether or not it is possible to change (promote) to a higher display mode. Then, when such a change is possible, the promotion process of the display mode is performed through the promotion determination and the promotion lottery.

<About the display mode of the hold image before and after the open / close execution mode>
The display mode of the holding image before and after the opening / closing execution mode will be described. Here, in the situation where the game state before the open / close execution mode is the time-saving game state, it is usually a big hit, and when the game state shifts to the time-saving game state after the open / close execution mode, and in the situation where the game state before the open / close execution mode is the time-saving game state. An example will be described in which a probability change jackpot occurs and the player shifts to the probability change game state after the open / close execution mode.

First, a case where a game state before the open / close execution mode is a time-saving game state is usually a big hit and the game state shifts to the time-saving game state after the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG.

When the third hold information of the second special figure is generated in the situation where the game is in a time-saving game state, the hold look-ahead process (step S305) is performed by the main control device 162, and the hold notice is given by the effect control device 143. The setting process (step S1403) is performed. As a result, when the hold notice effect in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the hold image HW in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed. Is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

The normal jackpot result is obtained in the game times in which the hold image HW is acquired, and when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the display of all the hold images including the hold image HW is deleted as shown in FIG. 66 (b). .. This state is maintained from the start of the ending effect until a predetermined period elapses.

Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes the setting process for returning to the notice (step S3416), and changes the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode. Judgment for return is made as to whether or not to return. In the return determination, the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode are compared, and it is determined whether or not the two match. When a normal jackpot result is obtained in the time-saving game state, the game state after the open / close execution mode becomes the time-saving game state, so that the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode match. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is allowed, and the return scenario is drawn.

As a result, assuming that a scenario for returning to the green display mode HMc at the second shift timing after the open / close execution mode is drawn, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), at the end of the open / close execution mode, the hold image HW The display of each holding image is resumed in a state where the display mode of is set to the normal display mode HMa.

After that, at the first shift timing from the third unit hold display area Gb3 to the second unit hold display area Gb2, as shown in FIG. 66 (d), the display mode of the hold image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa. Will be done. Then, at the second shift timing from the second unit hold display area Gb2 to the first unit hold display area Gb1, the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case where the game state before the open / close execution mode is the time-saving game state and the probability change big hit occurs and the game state shifts to the probability change game state after the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

When the third hold information of the second special figure is generated in the situation where the game is in a time-saving game state, the hold look-ahead process (step S305) is performed by the main control device 162, and the hold notice is given by the effect control device 143. The setting process (step S1403) is performed. As a result, when the hold notice effect in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the hold image HW in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed. Is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

When the holding image HW is acquired and the probability change jackpot result is obtained and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the display of all the holding images including the holding image HW is deleted as shown in FIG. 67 (b). ..

Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes the setting process for the advance notice return (step S3416) to determine the return. If a probability change jackpot result is obtained in the time-saving game state, the game state after the open / close execution mode becomes the high probability game state, so that the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode do not match. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is disallowed and the return process is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 67 (c), at the end of the open / close execution mode, the display of each hold image is resumed in a state where the display mode of the hold image HW is the normal display mode HMa. After that, the display mode of the hold image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa until the hold image HW is shifted to the execution display area D. That is, if the game state before the open / close execution mode is different from the game state after the open / close execution mode, the hold notice effect made before the open / close execution mode is basically canceled, and the same hold is made after the open / close execution mode. The hold notice effect for the image HW for use is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (d), when the display position of the hold image HW set to the normal display mode HMa shifts to the execution display area D and the game rotation of the hold image HW is started, the effect control is performed. The device 143 executes the third execution process (step S1808) of the hold notice, and determines the promotion to the higher display mode. As a result, when the promotion to the higher display mode is drawn, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode as shown in FIG. 67 (e). Note that FIG. 67 (e) shows a case where the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case will be described in which a probability variation jackpot occurs in a situation where the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is the normal gaming state, and the game state shifts to the high probability gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode.

In this case, the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode do not match. Therefore, if the above example is applied, the display mode of the hold image HW will not be restored after the opening / closing execution mode. .. However, when switching from a low-probability game state (left-handed game) aiming to win a prize in the first operating port 62 to a high-probability game state (right-handed game) aiming to win a prize in the second operating port 63, the image for holding Whether or not to restore the display mode is switched based on the pre-reading result of the pending information corresponding to the HW.

Specifically, when the pre-reading result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW is a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the hold image HW is restored after the open / close execution mode. That is, when there is hold information that normally results in a big hit in the first special figure, and the game times of the hold information are executed, even though it was possible to shift to the high-probability game state, that Since the state ends early, the display mode is changed to the specific display mode in order to encourage the second operating port 63 to win a prize.

In this case, instead of changing from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, the reserved image HW may be displayed in the state of the specific display mode from the beginning. It is expected that the player's awareness will be promoted by setting the display mode different from the case where the display mode is restored when the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode match. NS. Further, by displaying in a specific display mode from the beginning, there is an advantage that it becomes easier for the player to quickly detect that there is pending information that usually results in a big hit in the first special figure, and it becomes easier to respond.

On the other hand, when the pre-reading result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW is a result other than the normal jackpot result, the display mode of the hold image HW is not restored after the open / close execution mode as a general rule.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the target hold image HW is set to the specific display mode (the state in which the hold notice effect is executed) and the open / close execution mode is entered, the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode are displayed. Is different, the display mode of the target holding image HW after the open / close execution mode is different from the display mode before the open / close execution mode.

In the present embodiment, since the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player's expectation that the jackpot result will be obtained even before the start of the game round is aroused. be able to. Further, when a plurality of types of game states are set as game states and the open / close execution mode is executed as a result of a big hit, the game state is shifted to one of the plurality of types of game states. In such a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the hold information used for the win / fail judgment is the same, the result of the win / loss and the game turn effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game turn differ depending on the game state. May occur.

In this respect, in this configuration, when the game state before and after the execution of the open / close execution mode is different for the target hold image HW which is set to the specific display mode before the execution of the open / close execution mode, the display after the open / close execution mode is performed. Since the mode is different from the display mode before the open / close execution mode, even if the grant determination result or the game rotation effect due to the difference in the game state changes, the target holding image HW gives the player a misunderstanding. This is suppressed, and it becomes possible to preferably display the hold image in the game state after the open / close execution mode.

When the target hold image HW is set to the specific display mode (the state in which the hold notice effect is executed) and the open / close execution mode is entered, the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode are displayed. The display mode of the target holding image HW after the open / close execution mode is different depending on whether the above is the same or not.

As described above, in the configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the hold information used for the win / fail judgment is the same, the result of the win / fail and the game turn effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game times depending on the game state. May make a difference. In this regard, in this configuration, the display mode of the target holding image HW, which is set to the specific display mode before the execution of the open / close execution mode, is displayed in the game state after the open / close execution mode, before and after the execution of the open / close execution mode. Since the game states are different depending on whether or not they are the same, the display mode can be set based on the result of the hit / fail judgment due to the difference in the game state and the change in the game rotation effect, and the game state after the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to preferably display the holding image in.

When the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode are different, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa.

With the above configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress the misunderstanding of the player by displaying the holding image that does not match the actual expected degree after the opening / closing execution mode. Further, by uniformly setting the normal display mode HMa, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustment of the display mode according to the change in the degree of expectation, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa based on the difference between the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode, the target hold image HW is subsequently set. It is determined whether or not the display mode of the above is promoted to a higher display mode (specific display mode), and the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed based on the result.

When the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode are different, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the open / close execution mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa. While it is possible to absorb the result of the hit / fail judgment due to the change and the fluctuation of the game rotation effect, there is a concern that the expectation level of the hold information corresponding to the target hold image HW cannot be notified or suggested. In this regard, in this configuration, since the target holding image HW set as the normal display mode HMa is given an opportunity to change to the specific display mode after that, when the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa. Even so, it is possible to promote to a specific display mode after the fact, and it is possible to notify the degree of expectation.

In the above case, when the game progresses to the game times of the target holding image HW set in the normal display mode HMa, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode of the target holding image HW to the specific display mode. Based on the result, the promotion is executed.

By promoting the display mode of the target hold image HW after the game round of the target hold image HW is started, the information on the hit / fail judgment acquired / transmitted at the start of the game round and the information on the game round production are utilized. Can make a promotion judgment. Since this information corresponds to the game state after the open / close execution mode, the promotion can be performed in a manner suitable for the game state after the open / close execution mode, which gives the player a misunderstanding such as the degree of expectation. Instead, it is possible to change the display mode of the target holding image HW set in the normal display mode HMa after the open / close execution mode to a specific display mode.

In particular, it is determined whether or not the target hold image HW is promoted to the specific display mode based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the execution of the hit / fail determination (start of the game) in the main control device 162. It is possible to determine whether or not promotion is possible by using the same information used for selecting the game time effect in the game time of the target holding image HW. As a result, when the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode are different, the target holding image HW is adapted to the game turn effect actually performed in the game turn after the open / close execution mode. The display mode of is changed to a specific display mode.

In addition, with the above configuration, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, it corresponds to the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode only for determining whether or not to promote the target hold image HW to the specific display mode. It is possible to avoid the addition of a dedicated process for transmitting the variation pattern (information on the result of the hit / fail judgment and the game rotation effect). That is, when executing the game times of the target hold image HW in the game state after the open / close execution mode, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the variation of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. In order to execute the game in synchronization with the special figure game times in the above, it is necessary to send a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 to the effect control device 143. By doing so, it is not necessary to notify the effect control device 143 from the main control device 162 of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the game state after the open / close execution mode by a dedicated command different from the fluctuation start command. Therefore, not only can the promotion determination be made using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but it is not necessary for the effect control device 143 to be equipped with the processing configuration when such a dedicated command is received. , It is possible to suppress the complicated processing configuration.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold image when the hold notice effect is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode are the same. In some cases, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f.

For example, if the display mode of the target hold image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the open / close execution mode, the display mode before the open / close execution mode is set. May be set to a different display mode. In this respect, in this configuration, when the open / close execution mode is executed in the situation where the reserved image set as the specific display mode exists, the information of the display mode at that time is stored, and the opening / closing is based on the stored information. Since the information display mode after the execution mode is set, the display mode after the opening / closing execution mode can be suitably returned to the original mode before the opening / closing execution mode.

By returning to the original mode before the open / close execution mode in this way, the target hold image HW (hold information) that aroused the player's expectation by changing to the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode is opened / closed. Even after the mode, it is possible to arouse a sense of expectation in the same way.

When the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode are the same, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the open / close execution mode is the same as the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode. In the case of the mode, the normal display mode HMa can be changed to the specific display mode.

In this case, regardless of whether the game state after the open / close execution mode and the game state before the open / close execution mode are the same, the display mode of the target hold image HW changes as the open / close execution mode is executed. The specific display mode can be changed to the normal display mode HMa. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to the difference in the gaming state. In addition, by causing an event that changes to a specific display mode after becoming the normal display mode HMa, the holding state is set to the normal display mode HMa in the game state after the open / close execution mode, including the case where the game state is different. It is possible to arouse the expectation that the image will be changed to a specific display mode, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the hold image (hold information).

It is configured to determine whether or not the game state before the open / close execution mode is the same as the game state after the open / close execution mode at the end of the open / close execution mode.

In this case, it is possible to promptly deal with the display mode of the target holding image HW after the open / close execution mode. Therefore, after the opening / closing execution mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW can be suitably adjusted even in a situation where the number of holdings before the target holding image HW is small.

The hold image is hidden during execution of the open / close execution mode.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed with the end of the open / close execution mode, if the target hold image HW that has been performed up to that point is suddenly changed to another display mode at the end of the open / close execution mode, the game is played. There is a concern that people will get an unnatural impression. In particular, when downgrading to the normal display mode HMa, it is assumed that the player is likely to notice and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, the hold image is hidden in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, when changing the display mode of the target hold image HW, the hold image display itself including other hold images is displayed. It is possible to intervene a period during which it does not occur. As a result, the change in the display mode is suppressed from being conspicuous, and the unnaturalness can be alleviated. In addition, since the hold image is hidden, there is an advantage that it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the effect for the open / close execution mode (big hit game effect).

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode for the holding image set as the specific display mode before the opening / closing execution mode is determined according to the relationship between the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode. Although the configuration is such that the later display mode is determined, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead process is executed again after the open / close execution mode for the hold image that was set as the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode, and the pre-reading process is executed again based on the result. It is configured to determine the display mode of the reserved image. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 76. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described.

<Information acquisition process>
The information acquisition process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (a). This process is executed when a prize is generated in the operating ports 62 and 63 (executed in step S205 of the winning process for the operating port (FIG. 17)), and is used in the information acquisition process of FIG. It is executed instead. In FIG. 68A, the same steps as those in FIG. 18 are assigned the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS in the corresponding holding area for the special figure display unit in step S304, the hold command setting process is executed in step S4101. .. After the execution of step S4101, the information acquisition process ends. Here, the setting process of the hold command in step S4101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 68 (b).

First, in step S4201, the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN stored in the hold ball storage areas Ra and Rb of the hold ball storage area 314b and the common hold number CRN stored in the total hold number storage area of the hold ball storage area 314b. Is read and the information is stored in the register of MPU 312. In steps S4202 to S4204, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold information acquired in step S304 (FIG. 68 (a)) based on the current winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 ( The value of the jackpot type counter C2 (random number for drawing the jackpot type) and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS (random number for drawing the fluctuation pattern) are grasped. The process of steps S4201 to S4204 is the same as the process of step S1202, step S1205, and step S1208 of the hold look-ahead process (FIG. 28) according to the first embodiment.

In the following step S4205, the hold command is set as the output target to the effect control device 143, and then the hold command setting process ends. In the hold command, in addition to the information indicating whether the hold information this time corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, the values of the various counters C1, C2, and CS grasped in the above steps S4202 to S4204 are input. Contains information to indicate.

That is, in the first embodiment, the hold look-ahead process (FIG. 28) performs a hit / fail determination process and a variation pattern lottery process based on the grasped values of the various counters C1, C2, and CS, and obtains the result. It was configured to be included in the hold command and transmitted to the effect control device 143, but in the present embodiment, the information of various counters C1, C2, and CS grasped is not the result of the hit / fail judgment process or the lottery process of the fluctuation pattern ( Random number information used for the hit / fail determination process and the lottery process of the variation pattern) is included in the hold command and transmitted to the effect control device 143.

The process performed by the MPU 342 of the effect control device 143 will be described.

<Processing for pending commands>
The pending command correspondence process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. This process is executed when a hold command from the main control device 162 is received (executed in step S1302 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30)), and instead of the hold command corresponding process of FIG. 31. It is what is executed. In FIG. 69, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 31, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After incrementing the value of the hold number counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 by 1 in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S4301 to execute the first hold look-ahead process. The first hold look-ahead process is a hold look-ahead process performed by the effect control device 143, and is acquired by the occurrence of a start winning prize based on the information of various counters C1, C2, and CS included in the hold command from the main control device 162. The result of the pass / fail judgment is pre-read for the reserved information. Here, the first hold look-ahead process in step S4301 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70.

First, in step S4401, the current gaming state is grasped. Specifically, it grasps whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a high-probability gaming state, or a time-saving gaming state. In step S4402, the hold command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information this time is grasped. In step S4403, the hit / fail determination table is acquired from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343.

In the present embodiment, as the pass / fail determination table for the effect control device 143, the same table data as the pass / fail determination table stored in the ROM 313 (win / fail table storage area 313a) of the main control device 162 is stored. Further, the jackpot type table for drawing the jackpot type and the variation display time table for drawing the variation pattern are also the jackpot type table (FIG. 13) and the variation display time stored in the ROM 313 of the main control device 162. The same table data as the table (FIGS. 14 and 59) is stored. Therefore, even if the effect control device 143 performs the lottery process separately from the winning / failing lottery and the variation pattern lottery in the main control device 162, the same lottery result can be obtained if the random number values used for the lottery are the same. It is supposed to be.

Since the winning / failing judgment table for the low probability mode (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state) and the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (high probability gaming state) are separately set in the winning / failing determination table, step S4403 Then, the table corresponding to the game state grasped in step S4401 is acquired.

In step S4404, as a look-ahead process for whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot, a hit / fail judgment is made based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S4402 and the hit / fail judgment table acquired in step S4403, and the hit / fail result is grasped. .. In step S4405, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing result grasped in step S4404 is a big hit winning. If the jackpot is won, in step S4406, the hold command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the hold information this time is grasped.

In step S4407, as a look-ahead process for the jackpot type, a lottery for the jackpot type is performed based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step S4406 and the type table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343, and the type lottery is performed. Grasp the result of. At this time, if the holding information is based on the winning of the first operating port 62, refer to the type table for the first special figure, and if the holding information is based on the winning of the second operating port 63, the first 2 Refer to the type table for special drawings.

In step S4408, the jackpot information as the information indicating the jackpot result grasped in step S4404 and the type information as the information indicating the jackpot type result grasped in step S4407 are stored. This information is stored in the corresponding area in the holding storage area 344c (FIG. 32) of the RAM 344.

In this embodiment, since the pre-reading result of the jackpot type is not reflected in the hold notice effect, the processes of step S4406 and step S4407 may be omitted.

After the execution of step S4408 or when a negative determination is made in step S4405 (when the jackpot is not won), the hold command from the main control device 162 is analyzed in step S4409, and the value of the variable type counter CS in the hold information this time is calculated. grasp. In step S4410, the corresponding variable display time table is acquired from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343 based on the game state grasped in step S4401 and the result of the winning / failing lottery grasped in step S4404. For example, when the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state and the grasping result in step S4404 is the deviation result, the deviation display time table (FIG. 59 (d)) for the time-saving gaming state is acquired.

In step S4411, as a look-ahead process of the variation pattern, a lottery process of the variation pattern is performed based on the value of the variation type counter CS grasped in step S4409 and the variation display time table acquired in step S4410, and the result is grasped. .. In step S4412, the information indicating the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4411 is stored in the corresponding area of the holding storage area 344c. After the execution of step S4412, the first hold look-ahead process ends.

Returning to the description of the hold command correspondence process (FIG. 69), after executing the first hold look-ahead process in step S4301, in step S1403, the hold notice setting process is performed using the process result of step S4301. The hold notice setting process is a setting process for executing the hold notice effect.

<Processing for open / close execution mode>
The processing for the opening / closing execution mode according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71. This process is executed in step S1306 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the process for opening / closing execution mode of FIG. 63. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 63, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After clearing the hold notice flag in step S3406, it is determined in step S3407 whether or not there is a hold image displayed in the specific display mode. That is, at the start timing of the open / close execution mode, among the hold images displayed in the hold display areas Ga and Gb, the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe. It is determined whether or not the one displayed in any of the modes exists.

If there is a hold image displayed in the specific display mode, the process proceeds to step S3408, and information indicating which mode the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is displayed is used for returning the RAM 344. Store in area 344f. After the execution of step S3408, the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step S3410 without performing the process of step S3409 (FIG. 63). That is, in the fifth embodiment, the process of storing the game state before the open / close execution mode was executed in step S3409, but in the present embodiment, the process is not executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3414 (when it is determined that the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344), the process of deleting the return standby flag is executed in step S3415.

Here, the situation in which the affirmative determination is made in step S3414 means that the opening / closing execution mode is performed in the situation where the hold notice effect is being executed, and the display of the hold image is erased. In this case, in step S4501, the second hold look-ahead process for performing the hold look-ahead again is executed. In the following step S4502, the setting process for returning the advance notice for returning the display mode of the reserved image to the specific display mode is executed. The details of the second hold look-ahead process in step S4501 and the setting process for returning to advance notice in step S4502 will be described later.

After the execution of step S4502, the process of displaying the reserved image in the normal display mode HMa is executed in step S3417, and then the process for opening / closing execution mode is terminated. That is, also in the present embodiment, the hold image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa immediately after the end of the open / close execution mode.

<Second hold look-ahead processing>
The second hold look-ahead process in step S4501 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 72.

First, in step S4601, the game state after the open / close execution mode is grasped. This determination is made with reference to the jackpot type for this jackpot that triggered the open / close execution mode. For example, if the current jackpot is the probability variation jackpot result, the probability variation game state is grasped as the game state after the open / close execution mode, and if it is the normal jackpot result, the time-saving gaming state is grasped as the game state after the open / close execution mode. do.

In step S4602, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each holding information stored in the storage area 344c is grasped. Note that this process may be performed on all the hold information stored in the hold storage area 344c, or the hold information that is the target of the return process (displayed in a specific display mode before the open / close execution mode). It may be performed only for the holding information of the holding image).

In step S4603, the winning / failing determination table corresponding to the gaming state grasped in step S4601 is acquired. In step S4604, as a look-ahead process of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S4602 and the winning / failing determination table acquired in step S4603, and the winning / failing result is grasped. .. The process of step S4604 is performed on the hold information for which the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped in step S4602. This also applies to the processing after step S4605.

Here, the processes of steps S4603 and S4604 are the same as those of steps S4403 and S4404 of the first hold look-ahead process (FIG. 70) performed at the time of starting winning (when the hold information is acquired). However, if the lottery mode changes before and after the open / close execution mode, for example, when the game state before the open / close execution mode is the normal game state and the game state after the open / close execution mode is the highly accurate game state, step S4603 Since the winning / failing determination table acquired in is different, a lottery result different from that of the first hold look-ahead processing may be obtained. For example, when the probability variation jackpot result is won under the normal game state, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the reserved information is "17", the opening / closing execution corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is executed. In the first hold look-ahead process before the mode is performed, the missed result is read ahead, but in the second hold look-ahead process assuming the gaming state after the open / close execution mode, the hit result is read ahead (FIG. 12).

In step S4605, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing result grasped in step S4604 is a big hit winning. If the jackpot is won, in step S4606, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped with reference to the holding storage area 344c. In step S4607, as a look-ahead process for the jackpot type, a lottery for the jackpot type is performed based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step S4606 and the type table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343, and the type lottery is performed. Grasp the result of.

In step S4608, the jackpot information as the information indicating the jackpot result grasped in step S4604 and the type information as the information indicating the jackpot type result grasped in step S4607 are stored in the corresponding storage area of the holding storage area 344c. do.

In step S4609, the value of the variable type counter CS is grasped with reference to the holding storage area 344c. In step S4610, the corresponding variable display time table is acquired from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343 based on the game state grasped in step S4601 and the result of the winning / failing lottery grasped in step S4604. For example, when the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is the high-accuracy gaming state and the grasping result of step S4604 is the deviation result, the deviation display time table for the high-accuracy gaming state (FIG. 59 (b)). To get.

In step S4611, as a look-ahead process of the fluctuation pattern, a lottery process of the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS grasped in step S4609 and the fluctuation display time table acquired in step S4610, and the result is grasped. .. The process of step S4611 is the same as step S4411 of the first hold look-ahead process performed at the time of starting winning (when the hold information is acquired), but when the gaming state changes before and after the open / close execution mode, step S4610 Since the variable display time table acquired in is different, a lottery result different from the first hold look-ahead process may be obtained.

In step S4612, the information indicating the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4611 is stored in the corresponding area of the holding storage area 344c, and then the second holding look-ahead process is terminated.

<Setting process for returning to advance notice>
The setting process for returning to the notice in step S4502 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73.

First, in step S4701, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the holding information corresponding to the target holding image (the holding image displayed in the specific display mode before the opening / closing execution mode) is grasped. The fluctuation pattern grasped in this case is the fluctuation pattern grasped by the second hold look-ahead processing.

In step S4702, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4701 is any of the fluctuation pattern 1H, the fluctuation pattern 11H, and the fluctuation pattern 21H. These fluctuation patterns correspond to complete deviations (FIGS. 14 and 59), and if any of them, the setting process for returning to the notice is terminated as it is.

If the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4701 is neither the fluctuation pattern 1H, the fluctuation pattern 11H, or the fluctuation pattern 21H, the process proceeds to step S4703, and the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4701 (the fluctuation pattern pre-read in the second hold look-ahead process). Understand the upper limit display mode corresponding to. The upper limit display mode table is stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. As shown in FIG. 74, the upper limit display mode table defines the upper limit of the display mode corresponding to each variation pattern. For example, in the variation pattern 12H corresponding to the SPSP reach A deviation in the high probability gaming state. , The red display mode HMd is set as the upper limit of the specific display mode. In step S4703, the upper limit display mode is referred to, and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is specified.

In step S4704, the return area 344f of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the display mode of the target hold image before the open / close execution mode is grasped. In step S4705, a return determination process is performed to determine whether or not to return the display mode of the target hold image to the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode in the game after the open / close execution mode. In this process, the upper limit display mode grasped in step S4703 is compared with the display mode before the open / close execution mode grasped in step S4704, and the display mode before the open / close execution mode is the same as or lower than the upper limit display mode. If there is, the judgment result is that the return is allowed, and if the display mode before the open / close execution mode is a display mode higher than the upper limit display mode, the judgment result is that the return is not allowed.

In step S4706, it is determined whether or not the result of the return determination in step S4705 allows the return. If the judgment result does not allow the return, the setting process for the advance notice return is terminated as it is.

If the determination result allows the return, the processes of steps S4707 to S4711 are executed. These processes are the same as those in steps S2103 to S2107 of FIG. 43, and display the display mode of the target hold image at any timing according to the number of holds before the target hold image. It sets whether to return to the mode. That is, in step S4707, the number of pending images before the target reserved image is grasped, and if the grasped number of reserved images is 1 or more, the lottery process of the return scenario is executed in step S4709. In step S4710, the return scenario data is set so that the lottered return scenario is executed.

Since the second hold look-ahead process (step S4501) is executed at the end of the open / close execution mode, it is possible to start displaying the hold image in a specific display mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, immediately after the end of the open / close execution mode, the normal display mode HMa is uniformly set (step S3417). That is, even when the target holding image is set to the specific display mode after the opening / closing execution mode, it is once displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the specific display mode after the fact. With such a configuration, there is a high possibility that the payout of the game ball continues immediately after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the player responds by discharging the game ball such as the lower plate 34. In such a case, it is expected that the attention to the reserved image will decrease. By avoiding the display of the specific display mode at such a timing, it is possible to prevent the player from being in the specific display mode without knowing it.

After the execution of step S4710, the advance notice return flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step S4711. The notice return flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that a process for restoring the display mode of the reserved image should be executed.

After the execution of step S4711, the setting process for returning to the notice is terminated. After that, as shown in FIG. 71, in step S3417, the hold image is set to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa for all the holds existing at the end of the open / close execution mode including the target hold image. .. That is, even when the return process is performed, the target hold image is displayed in the state of the normal display mode HMa immediately after the end of the open / close execution mode.

Then, the second execution process (FIG. 44) of the hold notice in step S1702 of the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40 (a)) and the hold notice in step S1808 of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41). 3 In the execution process (FIG. 45), the display mode of the target holding image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the hold notice, the process is executed so as to return the display mode of the target hold image to the original specific display mode (specific display mode before the open / close execution mode).

Further, in the third execution process of the hold notice, the current display mode of the target hold image (display mode restored by the return process) and the variation pattern of the target hold image in the game round of the target hold image. Is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether or not it is possible to change (promote) to a higher display mode. Then, when such a change is possible, the promotion process of the display mode is performed through the promotion determination and the promotion lottery.

<About the flow of the display mode of the hold image before and after the open / close execution mode>
The flow of the display mode of the holding image before and after the opening / closing execution mode will be described. First, a case where the pre-reading result of the hit / fail determination does not change before and after the open / close execution mode but the pre-reading result of the fluctuation pattern changes will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

As shown in FIG. 75 (a), when the third hold information (hold image HW) of the second special figure is generated in the situation where the game is in the high probability gaming state, the main control device 162 performs the information acquisition process ( FIG. 68 (a)) is executed. As a result, it is assumed that 25 is acquired as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and 80 is acquired as the value of the variation type counter CS.

Further, the effect control device 143 executes the first hold look-ahead process (step S4301) based on the result of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. In the first hold pre-reading process, the pre-reading process is executed using the game state at that time, that is, the hit / fail determination table or the variable display time table for the high-probability game state. Since the hit / fail result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a wrong result (FIG. 12) and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS = 80 is the variation pattern 12H (FIG. 59 (b)), the first hold The result of the look-ahead processing is out of alignment and has a variation pattern of 12H. The fluctuation pattern 12H is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation of SPSP reach A.

Further, the effect control device 143 executes the setting process for the hold notice (step S1403) based on the result of the first hold look-ahead process, and executes the hold notice effect for the hold image HW, and draws the final display mode. , Lottery of production scenarios, etc. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12H is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, and the red display mode HMd (FIG. 61 (b)). It is assumed that the red display mode HMd is drawn as the mode, and the production scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is drawn. In this case, the hold image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

When the game round in which the hold image HW is acquired results in a normal jackpot, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the display of all hold images including the hold image HW is erased as in the fifth embodiment. NS. This state is maintained from the start of the ending effect until a predetermined period elapses.

Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes the second hold look-ahead process (step S4501) based on the hold information stored in the hold storage area 344c. When a normal jackpot result is obtained, the game state after the open / close execution mode is the time-saving game state. do. Since the hit / fail result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a wrong result (FIG. 12) and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS = 80 is the variation pattern 23H (FIG. 59 (d)), the second hold The result of the look-ahead processing is out of alignment and the variation pattern 23H. The variation pattern 23H is not an SPSP reach A deviation, but a variation pattern corresponding to an SP reach B deviation that is lower than the reach effect.

Further, the effect control device 143 executes the setting process for returning the advance notice (step S4502) based on the result of the second hold look-ahead process, and returns the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode. Judgment for return is made as to whether or not to make it. In the return determination, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern read ahead by the second hold look-ahead process is grasped based on the upper limit display mode table (FIG. 74), and the display mode of the hold image HW before the open / close execution mode is changed. , The grasped upper limit display mode It is determined whether or not the mode is as follows.

Here, since the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 23H pre-read by the second hold look-ahead process is the green display mode HMc (FIG. 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the open / close execution mode, corresponds to the fluctuation pattern. The upper limit display mode is as follows. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is allowed, and the return scenario is set.

As a result, assuming that a scenario for returning to the blue display mode HMb is set at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the display position of the hold image HW is the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second. When the unit is shifted to the hold display area Ga2, the display mode is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

Even when the display mode of the hold image HW is the green display mode HMc when the open / close execution mode is started, the display mode before the open / close execution mode corresponds to the variation pattern pre-read by the second hold pre-reading process. The display mode of the holding image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc after the end of the open / close execution mode because the upper limit display mode is as follows.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold image HW is the red display mode HMd when the open / close execution mode is started, the display mode before the open / close execution mode is a variation pattern pre-read by the second hold look-ahead process. It is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is not permitted. That is, whether or not to return to the specific display mode differs depending on the display mode of the holding image HW when the open / close execution mode is started.

When the return to the specific display mode is disallowed, the reserved image HW is displayed in the normal display mode HMa at the end of the open / close execution mode until it is shifted to the execution display area D. The state is maintained (FIG. 75 (c)).

After that, when the display position of the hold image HW set to the normal display mode HMa shifts to the execution display area D and the game rotation of the hold image HW is started, the effect control device 143 performs the third execution of the hold notice. Processing (step S1808) is executed, and promotion determination to a higher display mode is performed. As a result, when the promotion to the higher display mode is drawn, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. For example, when the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 23H in the promotion determination is set to the green display mode HMc, the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted in the range up to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case where the pre-reading result of the hit / fail determination changes before and after the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 76.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the third hold information (hold image HW) of the second special figure is generated in the situation where the game is in the high probability gaming state, the main control device 162 performs the information acquisition process. Run. As a result, it is assumed that 17 is acquired as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and 45 is acquired as the value of the variation type counter CS.

Further, the effect control device 143 executes the first hold look-ahead process based on the result of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. Since the hit / fail result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 in the high-probability game state is the hit result (FIG. 12), and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS = 45 is the variation pattern 12A (FIG. 59 (a). )), The result of the first hold look-ahead processing is a hit and a variation pattern 12A. The fluctuation pattern 12A is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to each SPSP reach B.

Further, the effect control device 143 executes the setting process for the hold notice based on the result of the first hold look-ahead process. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12A is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow color display mode HMe (FIG. 61 (a)). As a result of the lottery, it is assumed that the rainbow-colored display mode HMe is drawn as the final display mode, and the production scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is drawn. In this case, the hold image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

The game times in which the hold image HW is acquired usually results in a big hit, and when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the display of all the hold images including the hold image HW is erased. This state is maintained from the start of the ending effect until a predetermined period elapses.

Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes the second hold look-ahead process based on the hold information stored in the hold storage area 344c. In the second hold look-ahead process, the look-ahead process is executed using the hit / fail determination table for the time-saving game state and the variable display time table. Since the hit / fail result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 is a wrong result (FIG. 12) and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS = 45 is the variation pattern 22H (FIG. 59 (d)), the second hold The result of the look-ahead processing is a deviation pattern 22H. The fluctuation pattern 22H is not a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the reach, but a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the reach deviation (SP reach A deviation).

Further, in the effect control device 143, whether or not to execute the setting process for the advance notice return based on the result of the second hold look-ahead process and return the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode. Judgment for return of. Since the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 22H pre-read by the second hold look-ahead process is the green display mode HMc (FIG. 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the open / close execution mode, is the upper limit display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Aspects The following aspects are used. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is allowed, and the return scenario is set.

As a result, assuming that a scenario for returning to the blue display mode HMb is set at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the display position of the hold image HW is the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second. When the unit is shifted to the hold display area Ga2, the display mode is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

Even when the display mode of the hold image HW is the green display mode HMc when the open / close execution mode is started, the display mode before the open / close execution mode corresponds to the variation pattern pre-read by the second hold pre-reading process. The display mode of the holding image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc after the end of the open / close execution mode because the upper limit display mode is as follows.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold image HW is the red display mode HMd or the rainbow color display mode HMe when the open / close execution mode is started, the display mode before the open / close execution mode is the second hold look-ahead process. This is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by. In this case, the return to the specific display mode is not permitted. That is, even when the result changes before and after the open / close execution mode, whether or not to return to the specific display mode differs depending on the display mode of the hold image HW when the open / close execution mode is started.

When the return to the specific display mode is disallowed, the reserved image HW is displayed in the normal display mode HMa at the end of the open / close execution mode until it is shifted to the execution display area D. The state is maintained (FIG. 76 (c)).

After that, when the display position of the hold image HW set to the normal display mode HMa shifts to the execution display area D and the game rotation of the hold image HW is started, the effect control device 143 performs the third execution of the hold notice. Process is executed, and promotion judgment to a higher display mode is performed. As a result, when the promotion to the higher display mode is drawn, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode.

Depending on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of the hold image HW, even if the result of the first hold look-ahead processing in the game state before the open / close execution mode is a hit and the fluctuation pattern is equal to or greater than the reach effect, the open / close execution mode ends. The result of the second hold look-ahead processing at the time may change to a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation and the complete deviation (for example, as described above, the normal jackpot result is obtained in the high-probability game state, and the time-saving game state after the open / close execution mode. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information of the hold image HW is 17 and the value of the variation type counter CS is 10). In such a case, the display mode is not restored in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the target hold image HW shifts to the open / close execution mode in the situation where the display mode is set to the specific display mode (the state in which the hold notice effect is executed), the hold look-ahead process (second hold look-ahead process) is performed again after the open / close execution mode. Is executed, and based on the result, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the open / close execution mode is set.

In the present embodiment, since the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player's expectation that the jackpot result will be obtained even before the start of the game round is aroused. be able to. Further, when a plurality of types of game states are set as game states and the open / close execution mode is executed as a result of a big hit, the game state is shifted to one of the plurality of types of game states. In such a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the hold information used for the win / fail judgment is the same, the result of the win / loss and the game turn effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game turn differ depending on the game state. May occur.

In this respect, in this configuration, when the mode is changed to the open / close execution mode during the execution of the hold notice effect, the pre-reading process is executed again after the open / close execution mode for the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect, and the result is Based on this, the display mode of the target hold image HW (holding image of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect) is set. For this reason, it is possible to adjust the display mode after the open / close execution mode so that the display mode after the open / close execution mode is suitable for the gaming state after the open / close execution mode for the target hold image HW for which the hold notice effect was performed before the open / close execution mode. This makes it possible to preferably display the hold image after the open / close execution mode.

When the hold look-ahead process is performed again after the open / close execution mode, the look-ahead is performed by applying the hit / fail judgment condition and the effect selection condition corresponding to the game state after the open / close execution mode. As a result, the display mode of the target holding image HW is matched with the success / failure result actually notified in the game times of the target holding image HW performed after the open / close execution mode and the game times effect actually performed in the game times. Can be adjusted.

The display mode of the target hold image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process again after the open / close execution mode and the display mode of the target hold image HW before the open / close execution mode. It was configured to be.

For example, if the display mode of the hold image changes frequently with the transition to the open / close execution mode, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this configuration, not only the read-ahead result but also the display mode before the open / close execution mode is taken into consideration to set the display mode after the open / close execution mode. In light of the read-ahead result, if there is no problem in the same display mode after the open / close execution mode, the display mode before the open / close execution mode can be taken over. As a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive change in the display mode of the hold image with the open / close execution mode as a boundary, and it is possible to display the hold image after the open / close execution mode in a natural manner.

A plurality of upper limit display modes are set corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of each game state, and among them, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the read-ahead process again after the open / close execution mode and before the open / close execution mode. Based on the result, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is set. More specifically, when the display mode before the open / close execution mode is the upper limit display mode derived from the fluctuation pattern or the following, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is changed to the open / close execution mode. The configuration is the same as the previous display mode.

In the present embodiment, as a specific display mode of the hold image (notification mode in the hold notice effect), a plurality of types of modes are set so that the jackpot expectation degree is different. In such a configuration in which the degree of expectation is set stepwise and a large number of display modes are provided, the range of the degree of expectation corresponding to one display mode is narrowed, so that the display mode is opened and closed before the open / close execution mode. When the hold image is displayed after the execution mode, the expected degree suggested before and after the open / close execution mode tends to be different. In this respect, with this configuration, even in a situation where a large number of display modes are set, it is possible to preferably display the hold image after the open / close execution mode by matching the degree of expectation.

When the display mode before the open / close execution mode is a display mode higher than the upper limit display mode derived from the variation pattern, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. It was configured to be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display mode after the opening / closing execution mode from exceeding the corresponding expectation in the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode, and it is possible to preferably display the holding image after the opening / closing execution mode.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW in the game state after the open / close execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, whether or not to promote the display mode to the specific display mode in the game times of the target hold image HW is determined. Judgment was made, and the promotion was executed based on the result.

When the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode are different, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the open / close execution mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa. While it is possible to absorb the result of the hit / fail judgment due to the change and the fluctuation of the game rotation effect, there is a concern that the expectation level of the hold information corresponding to the target hold image HW cannot be notified or suggested. In this respect, in this configuration, the target holding image HW set as the normal display mode HMa is given an opportunity to change to the specific display mode as the game progresses to the game times of the target holding image HW. Therefore, even when the display mode is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, it can be promoted to the specific display mode after the fact, and the degree of expectation can be notified. ..

In the above case, it is determined whether or not the target holding image HW is promoted to the specific display mode based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the execution of the hit / fail determination (start of the game round) in the main control device 162. And said.

In this case, since it is determined whether or not promotion is possible using the same information used for selecting the game rotation effect in the game times of the target hold image HW, the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game after the open / close execution mode When the state is different, the display mode of the target holding image HW can be changed to a specific display mode while adapting to the game turn effect actually performed in the game turn after the open / close execution mode.

In addition, with the above configuration, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, it corresponds to the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode only for determining whether or not to promote the target hold image HW to the specific display mode. It is possible to avoid the addition of a dedicated process for transmitting the variation pattern (information on the result of the hit / fail judgment and the game rotation effect). That is, when executing the game times of the target hold image HW in the game state after the open / close execution mode, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the variation of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. In order to execute the game in synchronization with the special figure game times in the above, it is necessary to send a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 to the effect control device 143. By doing so, it is not necessary to notify the effect control device 143 from the main control device 162 of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the game state after the open / close execution mode by a dedicated command different from the fluctuation start command. Therefore, not only can the promotion determination be made using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but it is not necessary for the effect control device 143 to be equipped with the processing configuration when such a dedicated command is received. , It is possible to suppress the complicated processing configuration.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode is the same as the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode, it is possible to change the display mode from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. It was configured.

In this case, regardless of whether or not the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the same mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW is usually changed from the specific display mode as the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The display mode can be changed to HMa. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to the determination that the mode is not restored to the same mode. In addition, in the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode, the normal display mode HMa and the normal display mode HMa, including the case where it is determined that the same display mode is not restored by causing an event that changes to the specific display mode after becoming the normal display mode HMa. It is possible to arouse the expectation that the reserved image will be changed to a specific display mode, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the reserved image (holding information).

The hold image is hidden during execution of the open / close execution mode.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed with the end of the open / close execution mode, if the target hold image HW that has been performed up to that point is suddenly changed to another display mode at the end of the open / close execution mode, the game is played. There is a concern that people will get an unnatural impression. In particular, when downgrading to the normal display mode HMa, it is assumed that the player is likely to notice and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, the hold image is hidden in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, when changing the display mode of the target hold image HW, the hold image display itself including other hold images is displayed. It is possible to intervene a period during which it does not occur. As a result, the change in the display mode is suppressed from being conspicuous, and the unnaturalness can be alleviated. In addition, since the hold image is hidden, there is an advantage that it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the effect for the open / close execution mode (big hit game effect).

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold image before the occurrence of the power failure state and the display mode of the hold image at the time of returning from the power failure state are targeted. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 86. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In each of the above embodiments, when the power failure monitoring unit 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191 detects the occurrence of a power failure state, a power failure flag (power failure state) is set in the backup area provided in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. (Generation information) is set, and power for power failure is supplied to the RAM 314 from the backup power supply unit 316 of the power supply and launch control device 191. That is, when a power failure state occurs, the game times of the special figure and the normal drawing in the main display unit 81 that were in progress at the time of the power failure state, and the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 when the power failure state occurs. Power is supplied to the RAM 314 so that the stored hold information and the like can be held, and the data in the RAM 314 is backed up. In the present embodiment, in addition, the data stored in the RAM 344 is backed up in the effect control device 143 as well.

However, since the effect control device 143 handles a larger amount of data than the main control device 162, the RAM 344 mounted on the effect control device 143 has a larger capacity than the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 and is large in scale. .. Therefore, if all the data stored in the RAM 344 of the effect control device 143 is to be backed up as it is, the power consumption under the power failure state becomes large. As a result, the power stored in the backup power supply unit 316 is consumed in a short period of time, the data retention period (backup period) is shortened, and the backup power supply unit 316 with a large storage amount is required, resulting in an increase in cost. There is a concern about inviting.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the entire data stored in the RAM 344 is not backed up, but as a part thereof, the information related to the holding image such as the holding information stored in the holding storage area 344c is backed up. It is configured to do. The electrical configuration for that purpose will be described with reference to FIG. 77.

In addition to the RAM 344, the effect control device 143 is provided with a backup RAM 345 as a storage medium dedicated to backup. The capacity of the backup RAM 345 is smaller than that of the RAM 344, and the information about the reserved image can be stored. The backup RAM 345 may be one chip with the MPU 342 like the RAM 344, or may be a chip separately from the MPU 342 and the RAM 344.

The RAM 344 and the backup RAM 345 are supplied with power for power failure from the backup power supply unit 316. In the present embodiment, when a power failure state occurs, the information related to the image for holding among the data stored in the RAM 344 is stored (copied) in the backup RAM 345, and the power at the time of the power failure to the RAM 344 is stored. The supply is for supplying the power required to read the information about the holding image stored in the RAM 344. Therefore, after the read process (write process to the backup RAM 345) is completed, the supply of power to the RAM 344 at the time of power interruption is stopped.

On the other hand, to the backup RAM 345, the power supply at the time of power interruption is continued even after the writing process of the information regarding the reserved image is completed. In this way, when a power failure occurs, the information to be backed up is stored in a small storage medium provided separately from the RAM 344, and power is supplied to the storage medium at the time of power failure. , Power consumption for data retention can be suppressed to a low level. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the data retention period is shortened and that the backup power supply unit 316 having a large storage amount is required.

Although not shown, the power supply and emission control device 191 or the effect control device 143 is provided with a switching unit (switch circuit) for switching the power supply state at the time of power interruption to the RAM 344. The switching unit supplies power to the RAM 344 at the time of power interruption from the backup power supply unit 316 while at least reading information about the holding image from the RAM 344 and writing it to the backup RAM 345, and writing information about the holding image to the backup RAM 345 is performed. After the end, it operates so as to stop the supply of power to the RAM 344 when the power is cut off.

The effect control device 143 is provided with an NMI terminal like the main control device 162, and a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 in the power supply and the launch control device 191 is output to the NMI terminal. That is, in the present embodiment, when a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring unit 315, both the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143 execute the power failure processing.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the effect control device 143 will be described. The processing of the MPU 342 is roughly divided into a main processing activated when the power is turned on, a normal processing for effect control, and an NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. Of these, the NMI interrupt processing is almost the same as the NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 15) in the main control device 162, and thus will be described with reference to FIG.

<NMI interrupt processing>
As shown in FIG. 15, in the NMI interrupt process, first, in step S11, the data of the register used in the MPU 342 is saved in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 344 or the backup RAM 345. In step S12, the power failure flag is set in the backup RAM 345. In step S13, the saved data is returned to the used register of the MPU 342 again, and then the NMI interrupt processing is terminated. If the power failure flag can be set without destroying the data in the register used by the MPU 342, the processes in steps S11 and S13 can be omitted.

<Main processing>
The main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. The main processing is when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the external power is supplied, or when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is executed when an external power supply is supplied.

In step S5101, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed, and in step S5102, access to the RAM 344 and the backup RAM 345 is permitted. In step S5103, the used area of RAM 344 is cleared to 0, and in step S5104, the initialization process of RAM 344 is executed. After that, the main process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the normal process described later.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 79.

First, in step S5201, the power-on notification process is executed. The power-on notification process is to perform a power-on notification corresponding to the power-on of the pachinko machine 10.

If a power failure occurs when the game is not being executed as the state before the power is turned on, a message such as "The power has been turned on" is displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 75 as the power on notification. It is done in G. This message display continues for a predetermined period of time, after which a predetermined demo video is displayed.

In addition, if a power failure occurs in the middle of the game and the continuation is resumed after the power is turned on (after power is restored), a message such as "The screen will be restored soon" is displayed as a power on notification. Is done on the display screen G. At that time, the main display unit 81 is in a state in which the subsequent game rounds are executed, but the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are not displayed on the display screen G, and the variation display due to them is not performed. Such a fluctuation display is performed from the start timing of the next game round (game round that starts after the power is turned on) after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). The above message display is deleted when the subsequent game rounds are completed (when the next game round is started).

In addition, the sound output from the speaker unit 29 is performed during the power-on notification, regardless of whether the power-off state occurs during the game round or when the power-off state occurs during the game round. It is not done and the silence is maintained. The sound output is performed from the start timing of the game round (if the subsequent game round is performed at the time of power restoration, the next game round) that is started after the power is turned on. With such a configuration, when the hall power to which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are connected is turned on and the pachinko machines 10 are started up at the same time when preparing for business in a game hall, each pachinko machine is used. It is possible to suppress the sound being output from 10 all at once and becoming noisy.

In step S5202, a process for returning the hold notice for displaying the hold image in the display mode before the power failure is executed. The details of the process will be described later. The processes of steps S5201 and S5202 are executed only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

After the execution of step S5202, the external signal output process is executed in step S5203. In the external signal output processing, the display control device 350 transmits the command set in the previous normal processing, and the control signal for driving and controlling the various lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 is transmitted. In step S5204, a counter update process for updating the counter value provided in various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is executed.

In step S5205, a command reception process for receiving a command from the main control device 162 is executed. The command received by the command reception process is stored in the command storage area 344a of the RAM 344 as described above. In step S5206, the effect setting process described with reference to FIG. 30 is executed.

In step S5207, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the backup RAM 345. If the power failure flag is not set, that is, if the power failure state has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S5208, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the current normal process. It is determined whether or not (2 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed.

If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step S5203 and the processes after step S5203 are executed. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process waits until the predetermined time elapses. In this case, the values of the various counters may be updated by using the remaining time, as in the normal process (FIG. 20) in the main control device 162.

Further, when a positive determination is made in step S5207 (when the power failure flag is set), it means that a power failure state has occurred. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5209 to create holding image information indicating in which display mode each holding image was displayed before the occurrence of the power failure state (immediately before the occurrence). In this step, when there is a hold image displayed in a specific display mode by referring to the effect scenario data for the hold notice effect stored in the RAM 344, or when such a hold image exists. , Which mode is displayed, etc., and create hold image information based on the grasped result.

In step S5210, information about the reserved image is stored in the backup RAM 345. At that time, in addition to the holding image information created in step S5209, the information stored in the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is also stored in the backup RAM 345, and the holding image is displayed when the power is restored. It is stored as information for. The information stored in the hold storage area 344c includes the hold information (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, variable type counter) stored in each area set for the first special figure and the second special figure. In addition to each value of CS, etc.), information indicating the number of pending items is included.

The storage process of the reserved image information created in step S5209 and the storage process of the information stored in the reserved storage area 344c do not necessarily have to be executed in the same step, and one of the storage processes is executed. After that, the other storage process may be executed.

In step S5211, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup RAM 345. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value of information about the reserved image stored in the backup RAM 345. In step S5212, access to the RAM 344 and the backup RAM 345 is prohibited, and then an infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

<Process for returning the hold notice>
The process for returning the hold notice in step S5202 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the backup RAM 345. When the power failure flag is not stored, it means that the power stored in the backup power supply unit 316 is exhausted and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is lost. In this case, the process for returning the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If the power failure flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S5302 to calculate the RAM determination value. In the following step S5303, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the RAM determination value calculated in step S5302 is compared with the RAM determination value (step S5211) saved when the power failure state occurs, and it is determined whether or not the two match.

If they do not match, it is considered that the RAM determination value is abnormal, and the data stored and held in the backup RAM 345 is recognized as invalid. In this case, the process for returning the hold notice is terminated as it is. The validity of the data stored and held in the backup RAM 345 can also be determined by whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the backup RAM 345 are correctly stored.

On the other hand, when the two match, it is considered that the RAM determination value is normal, and the data stored and held in the backup RAM 345 is recognized as valid. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5304, and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is referred to to grasp the number of holds when the power failure state occurs.

In step S5305, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved items grasped in step S5304 is 0. When the number of held items is 0, that is, when a power failure state occurs in a situation where there is no hold, the process for returning the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If the number of reserved items is not 0, the process proceeds to step S5306 to execute the display mode setting process. This process is for setting the display mode of the hold image to be displayed after the power is restored. Here, the setting process of the display mode in step S5306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S5401, the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is referred to, and the display mode of each holding image before the occurrence of the power failure state (immediately before the occurrence) is grasped. In step S5402, it is determined whether or not there is a holding image displayed in the specific display mode based on the grasping result of step S5401. If the holding image displayed in the specific display mode does not exist, the process proceeds to step S5403, and the display mode of all the holding images is set to the normal display mode HMa.

If there is a hold image displayed in the specific display mode, the process proceeds to step S5404, and the display mode of the hold image (target hold image) is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (for example, the red display mode HMd). It is determined whether or not it is. When the display mode of the target hold image is a mode lower than the predetermined display mode (for example, green display mode HMc or blue display mode HMb), the process proceeds to step S5405, and the display mode of the hold image is displayed before the power failure. Set to a specific display mode. In step S5406, the display mode of the hold image other than the target hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa.

When the display mode of the target hold image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (for example, red display mode HMd or rainbow color display mode HMe), the process proceeds to step S5407, and the display mode of the hold image is lower than the predetermined display mode. (For example, the green display mode HMc) is set. That is, when the display mode of the target hold image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the target hold image at the time of power restoration is limited to a mode lower than the specific display mode before the power failure.

In step S5408, the display mode of the hold image other than the target hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa. In step S5409, the return notice flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. The role of the return notice flag will be described later.

Returning to the description of the process for returning the hold notice (FIG. 80), after executing the process of setting the display mode in step S5306, each hold image is displayed in the display mode set in step S5306 in step S5307. The display control device 350 is controlled so as to. In step S5308, the hold information and the like stored in the backup RAM 345 are stored (restored) in the corresponding area of the RAM 344. In step S5309, the power failure flag stored in the backup RAM 345 is erased, and then the process for returning the hold notice is terminated.

<Process for displaying special figure fluctuation>
The special figure variation display process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82. This process is executed in step S1305 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the special figure variation display process of FIG. 41. In FIG. 82, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 41, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified. In FIG. 82, for convenience, the description of the first execution process and the like of the hold notice is omitted.

If a negative determination is made in step S1804 and the fluctuation is being displayed, the fluctuation processing is executed in step S1805. In step S5501, it is determined whether or not the special figure game times this time is the game times of the hold image (target hold image) displayed in the specific display mode before the power failure. If it is not the game time of the target hold image, the special figure variation display process is terminated as it is.

In the case of the game times of the target hold image, the fourth execution process of the hold notice is performed in step S5502, and then the special figure variation display process ends. The fourth execution process of the hold notice is for promoting the display mode of the hold image to a higher mode in the game round of the target hold image.

<Process for 4th execution of hold notice>
The fourth execution process of the hold notice in step S5502 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S5601, it is determined whether or not the return notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. The return notice flag indicates that, at the time of power recovery, a process of changing the display mode of the reserved image, which is a display mode lower than the specific display mode before the power failure, to a higher mode should be executed. It is for the MPU 342 to grasp. If the return notice flag is not stored, the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If the return notice flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S5602, and it is determined whether or not the promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. The promotion flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the display mode of the target holding image should be promoted, and is the same as the promotion flag according to the first embodiment.

If the promotion flag is not stored, in step S5603, it is determined whether or not the determined flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. If the determined flag is stored, the process for the fourth execution of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If the determined flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S5604, and it is determined whether or not the pending change points remain in the ongoing game round. If there are no pending change points remaining, the process proceeds to step S5611 to erase the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d, and then ends the fourth execution process of the hold notice. do.

If the hold change point remains, the process proceeds to step S5605 to execute the hold notice promotion process, and then ends the hold notice fourth execution process. Here, the process for promoting the hold notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84.

In the promotion process, first, in step S5701, the current display mode of the target hold image displayed in the execution display area D is grasped. The current display mode is the display mode set in step S5407 of the display mode setting process (FIG. 81).

In step S5702, the fluctuation pattern of the target holding image is grasped. This grasp is performed based on the fluctuation start command (step S712 in FIG. 23) transmitted from the main control device 162 at the start of the game times (running game times) of the target holding image.

In step S5703, the promotion determination of the hold notice effect is made based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S5701, the current display mode grasped in step S5702, and the promotion determination table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. conduct. The promotion determination determines whether or not it is possible to change the display mode of the target hold image displayed in the execution display area D to a specific display mode higher than the current state.

Similar to the promotion determination table (FIG. 47) according to the first embodiment, the promotion determination table defines an upper limit of the display mode corresponding to each variation pattern. In step S5703, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is specified with reference to the promotion determination table, and it is determined whether or not the current display mode is a display mode lower than the specified upper limit display mode. As a result, if it is a lower display mode, promotion of the display mode is allowed, and if not, promotion is not possible.

After the execution of step S5703, the determined flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d in step S5704. The determined flag is for the MPU 342 to know that the promotion determination has been executed.

In step S5705, it is determined whether or not the result of the promotion determination in step S5703 allows promotion of the display mode. If promotion is not allowed, the process for promoting the hold notice is exited, the process proceeds to step S5611 (FIG. 83), the return notice flag is cleared, and the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

If the promotion is allowed, the process proceeds to step S5706, and the lottery process of the promotion scenario is executed. The promotion scenario determines which display mode the target hold image displayed in the execution display area D is changed at which timing (hold change point). The lottery for the promotion scenario is acquired from the promotion scenario lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343 and each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, as in step S2405 (FIG. 46) according to the first embodiment. It is performed based on the lottery counter (random value).

In step S5707, the promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario drawn in step S5706 is executed. In step S5708, the promotion flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d, and then the promotion process of the hold notice is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the fourth execution process (FIG. 83) of the hold notice, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5602 (when the promotion flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S5606, and whether or not it is the promotion timing of the display mode. Is determined. This determination is made based on the setting result of the promotion scenario in step S5707. If it is not the promotion timing, the process for the fourth execution of the hold notice is terminated as it is.

If it is the promotion timing, the process proceeds to step S5607, and the display mode (higher display mode) of the change destination in the current change process is grasped based on the setting result of the promotion scenario. In the following step S5608, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S5607. Specifically, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is changed by including information indicating which display mode is to be changed as an output command to the display control device 350. Set a command to that effect.

In step S5609, it is determined whether or not the display mode grasped in step S5607 or the display mode set as the change destination in step S5608 is the final display mode in the promotion effect. For example, in the case where the promotion scenario is set so that the display mode is promoted in multiple stages by the change process multiple times, if the change process this time is a process in the middle stage, it is regarded as not the final display mode. The step is negatively determined, and the process for executing the fourth execution of the hold notice is terminated.

In the final display mode, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is deleted in step S5610. In the following step S5611, the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is erased, and then the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

<About the display mode of the image for holding before and after the power is restored>
The display mode of the holding image before the power failure and after the power recovery will be described. Here, first, a case where a holding image in the green display mode HMc exists before the occurrence of the power failure state will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three other hold information of the first special figure, and the hold of the third unit hold display area Ga3 is held. It is assumed that the image HW for use is displayed in the green display mode HMc. If a power failure occurs in that state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. Along with this, all the hold images including the hold image HW are not displayed.

At this time, the effect control device 143 stores the information regarding the reserved image in the backup RAM 345. Since power for data retention at the time of power failure is supplied to the backup RAM 345 from the power supply and the emission control device 191, information and the like regarding the holding image stored in the backup RAM 345 are held even during the power failure state. ..

After that, when the power failure state is resolved and the power is restored, the main control device 162 executes the power restoration process (steps S2004 to S2010 in FIG. 19) based on the data stored and held in the RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game times (game times of the first special figure) interrupted when the power failure state occurs is restarted on the special figure display unit 43.

At the time of power recovery, the effect control device 143 executes the power-on notification process (step S5201) for executing the power-on notification. As a result, the character display 461 such as "The screen will be restored soon" is displayed on the display screen G.

Further, the effect control device 143 executes a process for returning the hold notice (step S5202) for returning the display of the hold image. In the process for returning the hold notice, the number of hold images before the occurrence of the power failure state and the display mode of each hold image are grasped and grasped based on the information about the hold image stored and held in the backup RAM 345. It is determined whether or not there is an image for holding that has been displayed in a specific display mode. If there is a holding image displayed in a specific display mode, it is determined whether or not the display mode is a predetermined display mode (for example, a red display mode HMd) or higher, and the image is restored based on the result. Set the display mode at the time of electricity.

Here, since the display mode before the occurrence of the power failure state is the green display mode HMc, which is a mode lower than the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the reserved image HW is the display mode before the occurrence of the power failure state. Set to do. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85B, each holding image is displayed on the display screen G in the same state as when the power failure state occurs.

Since the information regarding the variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is not backed up, the variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is not displayed in the above case. Therefore, the character display 461 as the power-on notification and each of the hold images restored based on the information about the hold image stored in the backup RAM 345 are displayed when the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner. It is displayed on the background 462 for power recovery, which is different from the background. The background for power recovery 462 is, for example, a background for monochromatic display in a predetermined display color (for example, black).

After that, when the restarted continuous game rounds are completed, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), each holding image is shifted to the lower unit holding display area. As the next game round is started, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed on the display screen G, and the screen returns.

Next, a case where a holding image set to the red display mode HMd exists before the occurrence of the power failure state will be described with reference to FIG. 86.

As shown in FIG. 86 (a), in the situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three other hold information of the first special figure, which are displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3. It is assumed that the reserved image HW is displayed in the red display mode HMd. If a power failure occurs in that state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears.

After that, when the power cut state is resolved and the power is restored, the continuation of the game times (game times of the first special figure) interrupted when the power cut state occurs is restarted on the special figure display unit 43. Further, the effect control device 143 executes the process for returning the hold notice, and determines whether or not the specific display mode of the hold image HW before the occurrence of the power interruption state is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode.

Here, the display mode of the hold image HW before the occurrence of the power interruption state is the red display mode HMd, which is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode. Therefore, the display mode of the hold image HW at the time of power recovery is before the power failure. It is set to the green display mode HMc lower than the display mode of. As a result, as shown in FIG. 86B, the display of each holding image is restored in a state where the display mode of the holding image HW is the green display mode HMc.

After that, when the start timing of the game round of the hold image HW comes, the effect control device 143 grasps the change pattern of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW based on the change start command transmitted from the main control device 162. .. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether or not to promote to a display mode higher than the current display mode (green display mode HMc).

That is, when the display mode before the occurrence of the power failure state is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, the display mode is temporarily restored to a display mode lower than the display mode before the power failure, and the variable start command transmitted at the start of the game round is used. Based on this, the display mode of the holding image HW is reset. As a result, when promotion to the red display mode HMd (higher display mode) is determined, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), the display mode of the reserved image HW in the execution display area D is the green display mode. The display mode is changed from HMc to HMd. Since the game rotation effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game times of the hold image HW is determined based on the variation pattern analyzed from the variation start command, promotion is determined on the premise of the variation pattern. The display mode of the reserved image HW is consistent with the above-mentioned game rotation effect.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When a power failure occurs in a situation where the target hold image HW is set to a specific display mode (a situation in which a hold notice effect is being executed), and then the power failure is resolved and the power is restored, the power is cut off. The display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is set based on the display mode of the previous target hold image HW, and the hold notice effect is re-executed.

In the present embodiment, since the hold notice effect in which the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode is executed based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player can obtain a jackpot result even before the start of the game round. Can arouse a sense of expectation. Further, since a plurality of types of modes are set so that the jackpot expectation is different as a specific display mode, it is possible to give a magnitude to the expectation and suggest it, which is advantageous in arousing the player's expectation. It can be configured. Under such a configuration, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the hold notice effect and then the power is restored, the hold notice effect that was performed before the abnormality occurs is re-executed. As a result, the hold notice effect can be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and it is possible to prevent the hold notice effect from disappearing due to the occurrence of an abnormality. At that time, since the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the display mode before the occurrence of the abnormality, it is possible to preferably restore the hold notice effect that was performed before the power failure.

By storing the information about the hold image in the backup RAM 345 when the power supply state occurs, the information corresponding to the display mode of the hold image can be held even after the power failure state occurs.

According to the above configuration, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to the occurrence of the power interruption state and the control related to the holding image is stopped, the information held in the backup RAM 345 is stored after the power is restored. By referring to it, it is possible to grasp the display mode of the target holding image HW before the power failure. As a result, when the hold notice effect is re-executed after the power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW can be suitably restored to the display mode before the power failure.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW before the power interruption is a notification mode higher than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), the display mode of the target holding image HW after the power is restored is limited to the predetermined mode or less. And said.

For example, when the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 314b changes due to the influence of the power failure abnormality, the result of the hold look-ahead performed before the power failure and the success or failure performed in the game round after the power is restored. Inconsistency occurs between the judgment result and the selection result of the game rotation effect. In such a case, a high expectation level is suggested by the hold notice effect before the power failure, and if it is re-executed as it is after the power is restored, the notification result in the game times (result of the hit / fail judgment) and the game times There is a concern that the game rotation effect to be performed will not match the expectation level suggested by the hold notice effect, giving the player an unpleasant impression.

In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of the specific display mode performed at the time of the occurrence of the power failure is a mode equal to or higher than a predetermined value and suggests a certain degree of expectation, the display mode is limited to the lower display mode and the hold notice effect is produced. Re-execute. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the expectation degree that does not match the notification result in the game round is suggested by the hold notice effect, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to the display mode equal to or less than the predetermined mode, it is determined whether or not the display mode is promoted to a higher display mode in the game times of the target hold image HW, and the result is Based on the above, the promotion is executed.

In the above configuration, even when the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to the display mode equal to or less than the predetermined mode, the target hold image HW is promoted to a higher display mode by playing the game. Therefore, it is avoided that the suggested expectation remains low.

In the above case, the determination of whether or not to promote to the higher display mode is performed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment performed as the trigger of the game round and the selection result of the fluctuation pattern.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode of the target hold image HW by using the result after power recovery as the judgment material for the hit / fail judgment and the selection of the game rotation effect. As a result, the promotion can be performed while matching with the notification result or the like actually performed in the game round after the power is restored.

In the power recovery process that is executed when the power is restored from the power failure state, the setting process (return process of the hold notice) for re-executing the hold notice effect is executed.

In this case, when the power interruption state is resolved and the power is restored, the hold notice effect can be promptly re-executed. As a result, when a power failure state occurs in the middle of the game, and there is a period during which the symbol variation display is not performed on the display screen G after the power is restored, a hold notice effect is provided prior to the return of the symbol variation display. Can be re-executed.

<7th embodiment>
In the sixth embodiment, the effect control device 143 is provided with the backup RAM 345, but in the present embodiment, it is not provided and the effect control device 143 does not have the backup function. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect control device 143 according to the present embodiment has the same electrical configuration as the effect control device 143 according to the first embodiment, and is not provided with the backup RAM 345. Further, it does not have a function of backing up the data stored in the RAM 344. Therefore, if a power failure occurs in a situation where a hold exists (a situation in which a hold image is displayed on the hold display unit 200), the hold information or the like held by the effect control device 143 is displayed. Disappear.

In the present embodiment, the signal line for transmitting the power failure signal output from the power failure monitoring unit 315 of the launch control device 191 is not connected to the effect control device 143, and the power failure signal is input to the effect control device 143. It is configured not to be.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the hold look-ahead process (FIG. 28) of the main control device 162, the process result (look-ahead result of the variation pattern lottery or the like) is stored in the hold ball storage area 314b (FIG. 11) of the RAM 314. That is, in each area set in the hold ball storage area 314b, in addition to the hold information (values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS), the hold information is held. The look-ahead result is stored.

The information regarding the result of the look-ahead process stored in the hold ball storage area 314b is not erased and continues to be stored in the RAM 314 even after the information is transmitted to the effect control device 143. The purpose of such a configuration is to make it possible to grasp the result of the hold look-ahead processing performed before the occurrence of the power interruption state when the power is restored after the power interruption state occurs.

That is, in a normal pachinko machine, after the hold look-ahead process is executed by the main control device 162 and the result is transmitted to the effect control device 143 as a hold command or the like, the read-ahead result is sent to the control process on the main control device 162 side. It is not necessary to leave the information on the main control device 162 side because it is not used for the above. Therefore, after transmission to the effect control device 143, it is common to release the area in which the information regarding the look-ahead result is stored and erase the information by overwriting the look-ahead result or the like for the subsequent pending information. Is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even after the information regarding the look-ahead result is transmitted to the effect control device 143, the information is stored in the RAM 314. When a power failure occurs, power for power failure is supplied to the RAM 314 from the power supply and the emission control device 191, and the information in the RAM 314 is held without being erased. Therefore, with the configuration as in the present embodiment, it is possible to retain the information on the pre-reading result when the power failure state occurs, and the power failure state occurs when the power is restored after the power failure. You will be able to grasp the result of the previously performed hold look-ahead processing.

The information regarding the look-ahead result stored in the RAM 314 is not permanently stored, but is erased as the reserved information is erased. That is, the information regarding the look-ahead result in the RAM 314 is deleted according to the game round of the hold information that is the target of the hold look-ahead process.

By the way, the storage area of the information related to the look-ahead result is set to the hold ball storage area 314b so that the information about the look-ahead result corresponds to which hold information can be grasped and stored so that other information is not inadvertently overwritten. This is for convenience in allocating areas. Therefore, the storage area for the information does not necessarily have to be the reserved ball storage area 314b, and may be another storage area in the RAM 314.

The processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described.

<Main processing>
The main process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87 (a). This process is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is executed in place of the main process of FIG. In FIG. 87 (a), the same step numbers are assigned to the processes similar to those in FIG. 19, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003 (when the RAM erase switch is not pressed), it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. When the power failure flag is stored, that is, when the power is restored while the data of the RAM 314 is stored and held after the power failure state occurs, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S2005.

In step S2006, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value is normal, and if it is normal, the stack pointer is returned in step S2007. In step S2008, a power recovery command is output.

In step S6101, the hold command at the time of power recovery is set based on the information stored and held in the hold ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314, and is output to the effect control device 143. The power recovery hold command includes information indicating the number of holds when a power failure occurs, information indicating the result of hold look-ahead performed before the power failure occurs, and the like. After the execution of step S6101, the process of step S2009 (clearing the power failure flag) is executed.

The process performed by the MPU 342 of the effect control device 143 will be described.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87 (b). This process is executed in place of the normal process of FIG. 79. As shown in FIG. 87 (b), in the normal process according to the present embodiment, the backup process of the hold information when the power failure state occurs is not provided.

Specifically, in the normal process of FIG. 79 according to the sixth embodiment, in step S5207, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the backup RAM 345, and the presence or absence of the power failure state is determined. When the power failure flag is stored (when a power failure state occurs), the processes of steps S5209 to S5212 are executed, but in the normal process of FIG. 87 (b) according to the present embodiment, these processes are executed. Is not provided. Further, in the normal process of FIG. 79 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the process for returning the hold notice is executed in step S5202. In the normal process of 87 (b), such a process is not provided, and after the power-on notification process of step S5201 is executed, the external output process of step S5203 is executed.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88. This process is executed in step S5206 of the normal process (FIG. 87 (b)), and is executed in place of the effect setting process of FIG. 30. In FIG. 88, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 30, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step S6201, it is determined whether or not a power recovery hold command from the main control device 162 has been received. The power restore hold command is output when the power is restored from the power cut state (step S6101 in FIG. 87 (a)), and the command includes information indicating the number of holds when the power cut state occurs. Also, information indicating the result of hold look-ahead performed before the occurrence of the power failure state is included.

If the power recovery hold command has been received, the process proceeds to step S6202, and the number of holds when a power failure state occurs is grasped based on the power recovery hold command from the main control device 162. In step S6203, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved items grasped in step S6202 is 0. If the number of held images is not 0, the process proceeds to step S6204, and a display mode setting process for setting the display mode of the hold image after power recovery is executed. Here, the setting process of the display mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S6301, the fluctuation pattern of each hold information is grasped based on the hold command at the time of power recovery from the main control device 162. This fluctuation pattern is pre-read by the hold look-ahead process (FIG. 28) of the main control device 162 before the occurrence of the power failure state. Since the hold command at the time of power recovery includes information on the fluctuation patterns for the number of holds held in step S6202, in this step, all the fluctuation patterns are grasped.

When sending the hold command at the time of power recovery including the information of the fluctuation pattern for the number of holds, it is assumed that the amount of data will be large or the information of the fluctuation pattern cannot be stored. The information may be transmitted in multiple times. Specifically, first, the hold command at the time of power recovery may be transmitted in a form that does not include the fluctuation pattern information, and then the fluctuation pattern information of each hold information may be sequentially transmitted.

In step S6302, it is determined whether or not the jackpot pending information exists based on the grasping result of step S6301. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S6301 includes the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot, and whether there is pending information in which the jackpot is pre-read before the occurrence of the power failure state. Judge whether or not.

If the jackpot holding information exists, the process proceeds to step S6303, and the display mode of the holding image corresponding to the holding information is set to the first specific display mode. The first specific display mode is a specific display mode lower than the rainbow color display mode HMe, which is the upper limit of the final display mode selected when the jackpot is pre-read, and is, for example, the green display mode HMc.

In step S6304, the return notice flag is set corresponding to the hold image (target hold image). The return notice flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that a process (promotion process) for changing the display mode of the hold image should be executed in the game round of the target hold image. The return notice flag may be stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, or the corresponding area (corresponding area in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 so as to be shifted as a set with the hold information of the target hold image. It may be stored in the area corresponding to the target hold image).

After the execution of step S6304 or when a negative determination is made in step S6302 (when there is no jackpot hold information), there is a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect in the variation pattern grasped in step S6301 in step S6305. Judge whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the fluctuation pattern 5H, the fluctuation pattern 6H, the fluctuation pattern 12H, the fluctuation pattern 13H, the fluctuation pattern 24H, and the fluctuation pattern 25H exists. In this step, it is determined whether or not the pending information, which is the result of the pre-reading result before the power failure, includes the information corresponding to the reach effect in which the rank of the jackpot expectation is higher than the predetermined value. ..

If there is a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect, the process proceeds to step S6306, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information whose variation pattern is pre-read is set to the second specific display mode. The second specific display mode is a display mode lower than the first specific display mode, and is, for example, a blue display mode HMb. In step S6307, the return notice flag is set corresponding to the reserved image.

After the execution of step S6307 or when a negative determination is made in step S6305 (when there is no fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect), in step S6308, whether or not there is pending information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped in step S6301. To judge. If the fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, part of the information indicating the look-ahead result may be damaged due to the occurrence of a power failure state, or some data may be damaged due to the influence of noise when the hold command for power recovery is transmitted. It is possible that there is a problem.

If there is hold information for which the fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, the process proceeds to step S6309, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa. In step S6310, the return notice flag is set corresponding to the holding image.

After the execution of step S6310 or when a negative determination is made in step S6308 (when there is no hold information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped), the display mode is set by the remaining hold images (steps S6302 to S6310) in step S6311. The display mode of the reserved image) is set to the normal display mode HMa.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process (FIG. 88), after executing the display mode setting process in step S6204, in step S6205, the hold image of the display mode set in the setting process is displayed on the display screen G. The display control device 350 is controlled so as to be displayed. After the execution of step S6205, the process proceeds to step S1301, and thereafter, the processes of steps S1301 to S1308 are executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S6201 (when the power recovery hold command has not been received), the processes of steps S6202 to S6205 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1301. If a negative determination is made in step S6203 (when the number of pending items is 0), the processes of steps S6204 and S6205 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1301.

By the above processing, when the power is restored after the power failure state occurs, the hold image of the hold information whose jackpot result has been pre-read is displayed in the first specific display mode, and the reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is achieved. The hold image of the hold information for which the corresponding deviation result has been pre-read is displayed in the second specific display mode. After that, the display mode of the target hold image is promoted by performing the fourth execution process of the hold notice in step S5502 in the specific variation display process (FIG. 82). That is, the display mode of the target hold image is reset based on the fluctuation start command transmitted after the power is restored. Since the fourth execution process of the hold notice is the same as that of the sixth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the image for holding before and after the power is restored>
The display mode of the holding image before the power failure and after the power recovery will be described. Here, first, a case where the jackpot result is pre-read before the occurrence of the power failure state will be described with reference to FIG. 90.

As shown in FIG. 90A, in the situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three other hold information of the first special figure, and the hold of the third unit hold display area Ga3 is held. It is assumed that the image HW for use is displayed in the red display mode HMd. The look-ahead result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW is a jackpot result, and the look-ahead result of the hold information corresponding to the other hold image HW is a miss result (completely missed).

If a power failure occurs in that state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. Along with this, all the hold images including the hold image HW are not displayed.

At this time, since power for data retention at the time of power failure is supplied to the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 from the power supply and the emission control device 191, the data stored in the RAM 314 is held even during the power failure state. Will be done. The data stored in the RAM 314 includes the processing result of the hold look-ahead process (step S305) performed on the hold information of each hold image before the occurrence of the power failure state.

After that, when the power interruption state is resolved and the power is restored, the main control device 162 executes the power restoration processing (steps S2004 to S2010) based on the data stored and held in the RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game times (game times of the first special figure) interrupted when the power failure state occurs is restarted on the special figure display unit 43.

Further, at the time of power recovery, the main control device 162 includes information indicating the number of held data among the data stored in the RAM 314, and information on whether each held information corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure. The result information (variation pattern) of the hold look-ahead process for each hold information is read out and transmitted to the effect control device 143 as a hold command at the time of power recovery (step S6101).

The effect control device 143 executes a process for restoring the display of the hold image based on the various information transmitted from the main control device 162 (steps S6202 to S6205). In such processing, the display mode of the hold image HW in which the jackpot result is pre-read is set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc), and the display mode of the other hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa. .. At this time, if there is hold information for which the fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the display mode of the hold image HW is set to the green display mode HMc, and the display mode of the other hold images is set to the normal display mode HMa. The image display is restored. At the time of power recovery, the effect control device 143 executes the power-on notification process (step S5201) for executing the power-on notification. Therefore, on the display screen G, for example, a character such as "The screen will be restored soon" is displayed. Display 461 is displayed. Therefore, each holding image whose display has been restored is displayed together with the character display 461.

After that, when the start timing of the game round of the hold image HW comes, the effect control device 143 grasps the change pattern of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW based on the change start command transmitted from the main control device 162. .. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether or not to promote to a display mode higher than the current display mode (green display mode HMc).

That is, the holding image HW of the holding information whose jackpot result is pre-read before the occurrence of the power failure state is temporarily limited to the display mode (first specific display mode) below the predetermined display mode, and the game round is started. The display mode of the holding image HW is reset based on the fluctuation start command transmitted at times. As a result, when promotion to a higher display mode (red display mode HMd or rainbow color display mode HMe) is determined, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), the reserved image HW is displayed in the execution display area D. The display mode is changed to a higher mode (for example, red display mode HMd).

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern grasped from the fluctuation start command transmitted at the start of the game round of the hold image HW does not correspond to the jackpot, that is, when the jackpot is not notified in the game round. Is not permitted to be promoted to a higher display mode, and the display mode of the reserved image HW in the execution display area D is maintained in the first specific display mode.

Next, a case where the SP reach loss result and the SPSP reach loss result are pre-read before the occurrence of the power failure state will be described with reference to FIG. 91.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a), in the situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three other hold information of the first special figure, and the hold of the first unit hold display area Ga1 is held. It is assumed that the image HW1 for holding is displayed in the blue display mode HMb, and the image HW for holding in the third unit holding display area Ga3 is displayed in the green display mode HMc.

The look-ahead result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW1 is the variation pattern 3H (SP reach A out), and the look-ahead result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW2 is the variation pattern 6H (SPSP reach B out). The look-ahead result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image in the second unit hold display area Ga2 is the fluctuation pattern 1H (completely off).

If a power failure occurs in that state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. After that, when the power cut state is resolved and the power is restored, the continuation of the game times (game times of the first special figure) interrupted when the power cut state occurs is restarted on the special figure display unit 43.

Further, the effect control device 143 executes a process for restoring the display of the hold image based on the power recovery hold command transmitted from the main control device 162 (steps S6202 to S6205). At this time, for the hold image HW1 in which the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 3H) corresponding to the SP reach loss is pre-read, the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, and the SPSP reach loss higher than that is set. With respect to the reserved image HW2 in which the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 6H) to be used is pre-read, the display mode is set to the second specific display mode (blue display mode HMb).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 91B, each holding image is in a state where the display mode of the holding image HW1 is the normal display mode HMa and the display mode of the holding image HW2 is the blue display mode HMb. Is restored. That is, the hold image of the hold information corresponding to the out-of-reach effect lower than the predetermined order is displayed in the normal display mode HMa regardless of whether or not it was displayed in the specific display mode before the occurrence of the power failure state. , The holding image of the holding information corresponding to the reach effect of the predetermined order or higher is limited to the display mode (second specific display mode) of the predetermined or lower display mode.

The point that the promotion determination to the higher display mode is performed when the game round of the holding image HW2 is executed is the same as the case where the jackpot result described with reference to FIG. 90 is pre-read. , The description is omitted.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When a power failure occurs in a situation where the target hold image HW is set to a specific display mode (a situation in which a hold notice effect is being executed), and then the power failure is resolved and the power is restored, the power is cut off. Based on the result of the hold look-ahead processing performed before, the display mode of the target hold image HW after the power is restored is set, and the hold notice effect is re-executed.

In the present embodiment, since the hold notice effect in which the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode is executed based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player can obtain a jackpot result even before the start of the game round. Can arouse a sense of expectation. Further, since a plurality of types of modes are set so that the jackpot expectation is different as a specific display mode, it is possible to give a magnitude to the expectation and suggest it, which is advantageous in arousing the player's expectation. It can be configured. Under such a configuration, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the hold notice effect and then the power is restored, the hold notice effect that was performed before the abnormality occurs is re-executed. As a result, the hold notice effect can be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and it is possible to prevent the hold notice effect from disappearing due to the occurrence of an abnormality. At that time, since the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process before the occurrence of the abnormality, it is possible to preferably re-execute the hold notice effect after the power is restored.

By storing the pre-reading result, the fluctuation pattern, and the like by the hold pre-reading process in the hold ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314, the information corresponding to the pre-reading result can be held even after the occurrence of the power failure state.

In the above configuration, since the information corresponding to the look-ahead result is retained without being lost when a power failure occurs, the display mode of the target holding image HW is based on the information held in the RAM 314 after the power is restored. Can be determined, and it becomes possible to preferably re-execute the hold notice effect after the power is restored.

When the hold notice effect is executed after the power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc) or less.

For example, when the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 314b changes due to the influence of the power failure abnormality, the result of the hold look-ahead performed before the power failure and the success or failure performed in the game round after the power is restored. Inconsistency occurs between the judgment result and the selection result of the game rotation effect. In such a case, a high expectation level is suggested by the hold notice effect before the power failure, and if it is re-executed as it is after the power is restored, the notification result in the game times (result of the hit / fail judgment) and the game times There is a concern that the game rotation effect to be performed will not match the expectation level suggested by the hold notice effect, giving the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of the specific display mode performed at the time of the occurrence of the power failure is a mode equal to or higher than a predetermined value and suggests a certain degree of expectation, the display mode is limited to the lower display mode and the hold notice effect is produced. Re-execute. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the expectation degree that does not match the notification result in the game round is suggested by the hold notice effect, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to the display mode equal to or less than the predetermined mode, it is determined whether or not the display mode is promoted to a higher display mode in the game times of the target hold image HW, and the result is Based on the above, the promotion is executed.

In the above configuration, even when the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to the display mode equal to or less than the predetermined mode, the target hold image HW is promoted to a higher display mode by playing the game. Therefore, it is avoided that the suggested expectation remains low.

In the above case, the determination of whether or not to promote to the higher display mode is performed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment performed as the trigger of the game round and the selection result of the fluctuation pattern.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode of the target hold image HW by using the result after power recovery as the judgment material for the hit / fail judgment and the selection of the game rotation effect. As a result, the promotion can be performed while matching with the notification result or the like actually performed in the game round after the power is restored.

When the result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power failure cannot be specified after the power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa.

For example, if the result of the hold look-ahead processing performed before the power failure for some of the hold images cannot be specified, and the display of the hold image itself is canceled, the player can be appropriately notified of the number of holds. There is a concern that it will disappear. In addition, when the hold notice effect is re-executed on the hold image for which the result of the hold look-ahead process can be specified (the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode), the result of the hold look-ahead process cannot be specified for hold. Due to the lack of display of the image, the order of the reserved image and the game times, which are set to the specific display mode, may be out of order, resulting in a result suggesting the degree of expectation so as to correspond to another game time. .. In this respect, in this configuration, the hold image that can specify the result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power failure and the hold image that cannot be specified are distinguished, and the display mode of the latter is redisplayed as the normal display mode HMa. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the number of holds and to appropriately perform the hold notice effect on other hold images.

When the power is restored from the power failure state, the main control device 162 outputs the power recovery hold command to the effect control device 143, and the effect control device 143 receives the power recovery hold command, and the hold notice effect is re-released. The configuration is such that the setting process for execution (setting process of display mode) is executed.

In this case, when the power interruption state is resolved and the power is restored, the hold notice effect can be promptly re-executed. As a result, when a power failure state occurs in the middle of the game, and there is a period during which the symbol variation display is not performed on the display screen G after the power is restored, a hold notice effect is provided prior to the return of the symbol variation display. Can be re-executed.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the switching of the effect mode is restricted when the reserved image is displayed in a specific display mode. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, the effect mode is configured to be switched by manual operation, but in the present embodiment, the effect mode is automatically switched without the operation of the effect operation unit 36. It is configured as follows. It should be noted that the effect mode includes an effect mode A and an effect mode B, and these have different frequencies of occurrence of the hold notice effect as in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the effect mode A, the hold notice effect is easily executed and functions as a mode in which the effect is easy to enjoy, and in the effect mode B, although the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed, it is a big hit when it is executed. It is configured to function as a mode with high expectations.

<Process for switching production mode>
The effect mode switching process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92. This process is executed in step S1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG. 42.

First, in step S7101, it is determined whether or not it is the lottery timing for switching the effect mode. In the present embodiment, a period in which a predetermined state (for example, a normal game state and a state in which an effect performed across a plurality of game times such as a continuous effect is not performed) is set as an effect mode switching effective period. In the switching valid period, the effect mode switching lottery is performed at a predetermined timing (for example, the start timing of the game round) in each game round. In this step, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the switching lottery. If it is not the lottery timing for switching the effect mode, the process for switching the effect mode is terminated as it is in order to maintain the current effect mode.

If it is the lottery timing for switching the effect mode, the process proceeds to step S7102, and the first mode switching lottery for executing the effect mode switching is executed. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the first mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. The first mode switching lottery table is a lottery table for drawing whether or not to switch the effect mode. It should be noted that this table may have a common winning probability regardless of the type of effect mode in which it is staying, or the winning probability may vary depending on the effect mode in which it is staying.

In step S7103, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S7102 is a winning result. If the lottery result is out of order, the production mode switching process is terminated as it is in order to maintain the current production mode.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S7104, and the mode switching determination process is executed. The mode switching determination process determines whether or not switching of the effect mode is allowed. Here, the mode switching determination process in step S7104 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 93.

First, in step S7201, the current number of reserved items is grasped with reference to the reserved storage area 344c of the RAM 344. In step S7202, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved items grasped in step S7201 is 0. If the number of holdings is 0, it is determined in step S7203 that the effect mode switching is allowed, and then the mode switching determination process is terminated.

If the number of reserved images is not 0, the current display mode of each reserved image is grasped in step S7204. In the following step S7205, the hold display is displayed in the specific display mode (either the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe) based on the grasping result of step S7204. Determine if the image exists. If there is no hold image in the specific display mode, the process proceeds to step S7203, and it is determined that the effect mode switching is allowed.

If there is a hold image in a specific display mode, it is determined in step S7206 whether or not the mode switching this time is switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B. That is, whether or not the mode is switched from the effect mode on the side where the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect is high to the effect mode on the low side (in other words, the effect mode on the side where the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is low is changed to the effect mode on the high side. Whether or not it is a switch to the production mode) is determined.

In the case of switching to the effect mode B, the process proceeds to step S7207, and it is determined whether or not the pre-reading result for the hold information of the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is the jackpot result. If the look-ahead result is not a jackpot result, it is determined in step S7208 that the effect mode switching is not allowed, and then the mode switching determination process is terminated. In general, in the winning / failing judgment, the losing probability is much higher than the winning probability (big hit probability), and most of the hold look-ahead results are wrong results. Therefore, most of the judgment results in step S7207 are negative judgments. The production mode switching is not allowed. That is, in the case of switching to the effect mode B, in the situation where the holding image of the specific display mode exists, the switch of the effect mode is basically not allowed and is restricted.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7207 (when the pre-reading result is a jackpot result), the process proceeds to step S7209, and a second mode switching lottery for re-drawing the mode switching is executed. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the second mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. The second mode switching lottery table is a lottery table for drawing whether or not to switch the effect mode, like the first mode switching lottery table. The winning probability at the second mode switching lottery table may be the same as or different from the winning probability at the first mode switching lottery table.

In step S7210, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S7209 is a winning result. If the lottery result is out of order, the process proceeds to step S7208, and it is determined that the effect mode switching is not allowed.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S7203, and it is determined that the effect mode switching is allowed. That is, in some cases where the look-ahead result is a jackpot result, switching of the effect mode is exceptionally permitted even in a situation where the holding image of the specific display mode is displayed.

As described above, when the jackpot look-ahead hold does not exist in the situation where the hold image of the specific display mode exists, the effect mode switching is not allowed, and the jackpot look-ahead hold exists. However, if the second mode switching lottery is not entered, switching of the production mode is not allowed. That is, since it is rare that the effect mode is allowed to be switched in the situation where the holding image of the specific display mode exists, the player recognizes that the law is broken and the jackpot is confirmed.

When a negative determination is made in step S7206 (when switching from effect mode B to effect mode A), that is, when switching from the effect mode on the side where the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect is low to the effect mode on the side where the hold notice effect occurs is high. (In other words, when switching from the effect mode on the side where the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is high to the effect mode on the side where the jackpot expectation is low), the hold image displayed in the specific display mode in step S7211. It is determined whether or not the display mode is equal to or higher than a predetermined mode (for example, green display mode HMc).

When the display mode is a mode lower than the predetermined mode (for example, the blue display mode HMb), the process proceeds to step S7203, and it is determined that the effect mode switching is allowed. That is, in the case of switching to the effect mode A, even if the hold image of the specific display mode is displayed, the switch of the effect mode is permitted as long as the display mode is lower than the predetermined mode. .. In this case, the effect mode is switched while the specific display mode of the holding image is maintained. When the form of the hold image changes depending on the effect mode, the display color is set to the same display color as before the mode switching while the form is changed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S7211 (when the display mode is equal to or higher than the predetermined mode), the pre-reading result of the reserved information is the jackpot result for the reserved image whose display mode is equal to or higher than the predetermined mode in step S7207. Judge whether or not. After that, the processes of steps S7208 to S7210 are executed, and switching of the effect mode is allowed on condition that the second mode switching lottery is won.

Returning to the description of the effect mode switching process (FIG. 92), after executing the mode switching determination process in step S7104, in step S7105, is the result of the determination process in step S7104 permitting the mode switching? Judge whether or not. If the result does not allow mode switching, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is in order to maintain the current effect mode.

If the result allows mode switching, the process proceeds to step S7106, and a switching process for switching the effect mode is executed. For example, when the current effect mode is the effect mode A, the effect data is set so as to switch to the effect mode B. The production mode may be switched at the start timing of the game round, or may be performed in the middle of the game round.

In step S7107, the effect mode flags corresponding to the effect mode after switching are set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the effect mode switching process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the second execution process of the hold notice of step S1702 in the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40) and the third execution process of step S1808 in the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41). , The processing associated with them is not executed.

<Restrictions on switching production modes>
A mode of limiting the switching of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 94. First, a case of switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (a).

When it is time to switch the effect mode, if there is no hold, or if there is a hold but there is no hold image in a specific display mode, the change of the effect mode is allowed.

When there is a hold image in a specific display mode, switching of the effect mode is basically not allowed. That is, from the production mode A in which the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect is relatively high (the effect mode in which the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is relatively low) to the effect mode B (the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is relatively low). When switching to a higher effect mode), switching of the effect mode is restricted on condition that a holding image of a specific display mode exists.

However, even if there is a hold image in a specific display mode, if there is an image in which the jackpot result is pre-read, switching of the effect mode is exceptionally permitted. In this case, as already explained, the jackpot is determined due to the contradiction in the production. In addition, when there is hold information in which the jackpot result is pre-read, and the display mode is the normal display mode HMa, it is permissible to switch the effect mode on the assumption that the hold image of the specific display mode does not exist.

Next, a case of switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (b).

When it is time to switch the effect mode, if there is no hold, or if there is a hold but there is no image for hold in a specific display mode, the same as when switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, as in the case of switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B. Switching of the production mode is allowed.

If there is a hold image in a specific display mode, whether or not mode switching is allowed depends on the display mode. Specifically, when the display mode of the holding image displayed in the specific display mode is a display mode lower than the predetermined display mode (blue display mode HMb), switching of the effect mode is permitted. That is, from the production mode B in which the occurrence frequency of the hold notice effect is relatively low (the effect mode in which the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is relatively high) to the effect mode A (the jackpot expectation of the hold notice effect is relatively high). When switching to a lower production mode), the switching restriction is relaxed compared to the opposite case. In this case, the display mode for the reserved image is not changed to the normal display mode HMa, and the specific display mode before the mode switching is maintained.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the reserved image is a display mode equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, switching of the effect mode is not allowed unless there is a pre-read result of the jackpot. That is, when the player is notified of a certain degree of expectation by the hold notice effect, the switching of the effect mode is restricted.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the hold notice effect is being executed in which the display mode of the hold image is the specific display mode, the switching of the effect mode is restricted.

In the present embodiment, since the hold notice effect in which the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode is executed based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player can obtain a jackpot result even before the start of the game round. Can arouse a sense of expectation. Further, since the mode is switched between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and the tiredness of the game can be suppressed. In such a configuration, for example, if the effect mode is switched during the execution of the hold notice effect, the attention to the hold notice effect is reduced due to the change in the effect mode, or conversely, the hold notice effect is used. As a result of concentration, there is a concern that the production mode may be changed without the player noticing it, causing confusion.

In this respect, in this configuration, since the switching of the effect mode is restricted when the hold notice effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent the execution of the hold notice effect and the switching of the effect mode from overlapping. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to each of the execution of the hold notice effect and the switching of the effect mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. Further, if the effect mode after switching is not suitable for the pending advance notice effect during execution, it is necessary to make advance adjustments to match the two when designing the effect. According to this configuration, such adjustment is performed. There is also an advantage that it becomes unnecessary and the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

The easiness of executing the hold notice effect differs between the effect mode A and the effect mode B.

In the case of such a configuration, since the production characteristics related to the suggestion of the jackpot expectation change by switching the production mode, the difference in the production mode is different from the case where only the appearance is changed by changing the background image or the character image. It can make a strong impression on people. However, on the other hand, if the effect mode is switched while the hold notice effect is being executed, the degree of expectation suggested by the hold notice effect may differ before and after the change of the effect mode. In this case, in the effect mode after switching, there is a concern that the expected degree suggested by the hold notice effect and the result of the hit / fail determination actually notified may be inconsistent, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying the present embodiment (a configuration that restricts switching of the effect mode when the hold notice effect is being executed) to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discrepancy is avoided, which is unpleasant for the player. It is possible to preferably suppress giving an impression.

The effect mode B is an effect mode in which the hold notice effect is less likely to be executed than the effect mode A, and the switching to the effect mode B is restricted when the hold notice effect is executed in the effect mode A.

When the ease of executing the hold notice effect in the effect mode B is lower than that of the effect mode A, if the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B while the hold notice effect is being executed, the apparent expectation is increased. There is a concern that the player will be shown a higher degree of expectation than the actual one. In this respect, in this configuration, the hold notice effect is easy to be executed (the expectation degree corresponding to the hold notice effect is relatively low), and the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed from the effect mode A (the expectation degree corresponding to the specific notification is relative). When switching to the effect mode B, if the hold notice effect is being executed, the execution of the switch is restricted, so that it is possible to preferably suppress the suggestion of a higher degree of expectation than the actual level. become.

When the hold notice effect is being executed in the effect mode A, the switch to the effect mode B is basically restricted, and the exception is when the hold advance notice effect and the hold look-ahead result that triggered the effect are jackpot results. The configuration allows switching to the production mode B.

In this case, although the production mode is not originally switched, the switching causes the player to break the law and suggest a big hit. That is, it is possible to utilize the switching of the effect mode as one of the expected degree suggestion effects.

If the condition for switching to the effect mode A is satisfied when the hold notice effect is being executed in the effect mode B, is the switch to the effect mode A restricted depending on the type of the specific display mode when the switching condition is satisfied? The configuration is such that whether or not it is different.

When the hold notice effect is being executed, if the effect mode switching is uniformly restricted, the effect mode switching may be excessively restricted or the hold notice effect may be executed less frequently. , There is a concern that the significance of providing multiple types of production modes and the significance of installing the execution function of the hold notice production will be diminished. In this respect, in this configuration, in the case of switching from the effect mode B having a high expectation corresponding to the hold notice effect to the effect mode A having a low expectation corresponding to the hold notice effect, the restriction of mode switching is relaxed and the switching is performed. Switching is permitted provided that the specific display mode when the condition is satisfied is equal to or less than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the switching of the effect mode and the execution of the hold notice effect from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to suitably secure those opportunities.

<9th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted when the effect mode is switched. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the switching guidance notification is performed during the switching valid period of the production mode, and when the player operates the production operation unit 36 in the situation where the notification is performed, the production mode is switched from the next game time. It is configured as follows. Here, an example of such mode switching will be described.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a), the switching guide image 451 as the switching guide notification is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 during the predetermined game times during the switching effective period of the effect mode. The switching guide image 451 is displayed over a predetermined period (for example, a period until the game round is completed).

In FIG. 95 (a), as a display example of the switching guide image 451, a character display such as "When the effect button is pressed, the effect mode is switched" is displayed as a telop above the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. Is shown. The switching guidance notification is not limited to this, and may be such that a window in which the above character display is performed is displayed, or a predetermined light emitting unit corresponding to the switching guidance is made to emit light. .. Further, the notification is not necessarily limited to visual notification, and voice guidance using the speaker unit 29 may be used.

In such a state, when the player performs a predetermined operation by the effect operation unit 36, the switching standby notification is performed. The switching standby notification notifies that the switching of the effect mode is in a standby state. The specific mode of the switching standby notification is not particularly limited, but for example, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the switching standby is in progress in which characters such as "mode change is being prepared" are displayed on the display screen G. It is conceivable to display the image 452.

When the game round in which the switching standby image 452 is displayed ends and the next game round is entered, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the display of the switching standby image 452 is erased and the effect mode is switched. ..

Further, if the effect operation unit 36 is not operated by the player during the display period of the switching guide image 451 of FIG. 95 (a), the effect mode is not switched and the current situation is that the game shifts to the next game. The production mode of is maintained.

It should be noted that the effect mode includes an effect mode A and an effect mode B, and these have different frequencies of occurrence of the hold notice effect as in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the effect mode A, the hold notice effect is easily executed and functions as a mode in which the effect is easy to enjoy, and in the effect mode B, although the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed, it is a big hit when it is executed. It is configured to function as a mode with high expectations.

<Process for switching production mode>
The effect mode switching process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. This process is executed in step S1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG. 42.

First, in step S8101, it is determined whether or not the effect mode switching is in the valid period. Also in the present embodiment, similarly to the eighth embodiment, a predetermined state (for example, a state in which the game is in a normal game state and the effect performed across a plurality of game times such as a continuous effect is not performed). The period is set as the effective period for switching the effect mode. If the effect mode switching is not in the valid period, the effect mode switching process is terminated in order to maintain the current effect mode.

If the effect mode is in the switching valid period, the process proceeds to step S8102, and it is determined whether or not the switching standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. The switching standby flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that it is in a state of waiting for mode switching, in other words, that the effect mode is switched after that.

If the switching standby flag is not stored, that is, if the mode switching standby state is not stored, the process proceeds to step S8103, and it is determined whether or not the guidance display flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. The guidance notification flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the switching guidance notification is being executed.

If the guidance notification flag is not stored, that is, if the switching guidance notification is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S8104, and it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the execution lottery for the switching guidance notification. The execution lottery of the switching guidance notification is a process of drawing whether or not to execute the switching guidance notification. The lottery timing of the switching guidance notification is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the start timing of the game round is set to the above lottery timing. If it is not the lottery timing, the effect mode switching process is terminated as it is.

If it is the lottery timing, the process proceeds to step S8105, and the execution lottery for the switching guidance notification is performed. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the switching guide lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. In step S8106, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S8105 is a winning result. If the lottery result is out of order, the effect mode switching process is terminated so that the switching guidance notification is not executed.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S8107, and the display control device 350 is controlled to display the switching guide image 451 as the switching guide notification. Specifically, a command to display the switching guide image 451 is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350. As a result, the switching guide image 451 is displayed on the display screen G. In step S8108, the guidance notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d, and then the effect mode switching process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8103 (when the guidance notification flag is stored), that is, if switching guidance notification is being executed, the process proceeds to step S8109, and the effect operation unit 36 switches the effect mode. It is determined whether or not the predetermined operation of is performed. When the predetermined operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S8110, and the guidance notification flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is deleted.

In step S8111, the switching standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d. As a result, the state shifts to the standby state for mode switching. In step S8112, the display control device 350 is controlled in order to display the switching standby image 452 as the switching standby notification. Specifically, as a transmission command to the display control device 350, a command to display the switching standby image 452 is set. As a result, the switching standby image 452 is displayed on the display screen G. After the execution of step S8112, the effect mode switching process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S8109 (when the predetermined operation is not performed), the process proceeds to step S8113 to determine whether or not the display period of the switching guidance image 451 (notification period of switching guidance notification) has elapsed. If the display period has not elapsed, the effect mode switching process is terminated in order to continue the display of the switching guide image 451.

If the display period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S8114, and the guidance notification flags stored in the various flag storage areas 344d are deleted. As a result, the acceptance period for the effect mode switching operation ends. Further, in step S8114, the display control device 350 is controlled so as to erase the switching guide image 451. After the execution of step S8114, the effect mode switching process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8102 (when the switching standby flag is stored), that is, in the mode switching standby state, the process proceeds to step S8115 to determine whether or not it is the mode switching execution timing. .. The switching timing of the effect mode is not particularly limited as long as it is the timing after the transition to the standby state, but in the present embodiment, the start of the next game round performed after the end of the game round in which the switching operation is performed. The timing is set to the above switching timing. If it is not the switching timing, the effect mode switching process is terminated in order to continue the standby state for mode switching.

If it is the switching timing, the process proceeds to step S8116, and the switching standby flag stored in the various flag storage areas 344d is deleted. As a result, the standby state for mode switching ends. In step S8117, a switching process for switching the effect mode is executed. For example, when the current effect mode is the effect mode A, the effect data is set so as to switch to the effect mode B.

In step S8118, the effect mode flags corresponding to the effect mode after switching are set in the various flag storage areas 344d. In step S8119, the second setting process of the hold notice is executed, and then the effect mode switching process is terminated. The second setting process of the hold notice is to set the execution of the hold notice effect for the hold information generated during the waiting period for mode switching. The details of the setting process will be described later.

<Processing for pending commands>
The pending command correspondence process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97. This process is executed when a hold command from the main control device 162 is received (executed in step S1302 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30)), and instead of the hold command corresponding process of FIG. 31. It is what is executed. In FIG. 97, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 31, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S1402, after incrementing the value of the hold number counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 by 1, the process proceeds to step S8201 and the switching standby flag is moved to the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. Is stored. When the switching standby flag is not stored, that is, when the mode switching standby state is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1403, and the setting process for holding notice (FIG. 34) is executed. In the setting process for the hold notice, the setting for executing the hold notice effect is made for the generated hold information.

When the switching standby flag is stored (in the standby state for mode switching), the process proceeds to step S8202, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the generated hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, in the present embodiment, when new hold information is generated during the waiting period for mode switching, the execution of the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information is restricted.

The look-ahead for the hold information is performed in the hold look-ahead process (FIG. 26) of the main control device 162, similarly to the other hold information. Therefore, the effect control device 143 does not execute the setting process for the hold notice in step S1403, and forcibly sets the display mode of the hold image to the normal display mode HMa, but mainly controls the look-ahead result such as the fluctuation pattern. It is in the state acquired by the hold command from the device 162.

In step S8203, the waiting occurrence information indicating that the holding information is generated during the waiting period is stored in correspondence with the generated holding information. This process is performed, for example, by storing the waiting generation information in the first to fourth areas (FIG. 32) provided in the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344. Therefore, when the shift process of step S1704 in the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 40) is executed, the waiting occurrence information is shifted to the lower area side along with the hold information (variation pattern information, etc.). As a result, even when the display area of the hold image is shifted by the shift process, it is possible to grasp which of the hold images was generated during the waiting period. The waiting information may be stored in a storage area other than the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 as long as it can recognize which hold information is to be targeted.

After the execution of step S8203, in step S1405, a process for displaying the hold image on the hold display unit 200 of the display screen G is executed. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step S8202, the hold image of the hold information generated during the waiting period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

<Second setting process for hold notice>
The second setting process for the hold notice in step S8119 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 98. The second setting process for the hold notice is to set the execution of the hold notice effect for the hold information generated during the waiting period for mode switching.

First, in step S8301, the hold information generated during the waiting period for mode switching is grasped. That is, based on the waiting information, it is specified which of the holding information existing at that time is the holding information generated during the waiting period.

After executing the process of step S8301, the processes of step S8302 and subsequent steps are executed for the generation hold during the grasped waiting period. Since most of the processes after step S8302 are the same as each process in the setting process for hold notice (FIG. 34), the description of the common process will be simplified and the different processes will be described in detail. ..

In steps S8302 to S8304, the fluctuation pattern in the generation hold during the waiting period is grasped with reference to the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. In step S8305, the effect mode after switching is grasped. For example, when the mode switching this time is the switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, the effect mode B is grasped as the effect mode after the switch.

In steps S8306 to S8308, the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the effect mode after switching grasped in step S8305 is acquired, and the hold notice execution execution lottery is performed. When the execution lottery is won, in steps S8309 to S8314, the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice effect is determined, and the effect scenario is determined. At that time, if a different table is set in each production mode as the final display mode lottery table for drawing the final display mode and the production scenario lottery table for drawing the production scenario, it is grasped in step S8305. A table corresponding to the production mode after switching is acquired and a lottery is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, with respect to the hold information generated during the mode switching waiting period, the hold notice effect is set (display mode setting process based on the look-ahead result) when the wait state is released. At that time, although the generation hold during the waiting period occurred during the effect mode before switching, the execution lottery for the hold notice effect and the lottery for the final display mode are set for the effect mode after switching. The above conditions are applied to correspond to the effect mode after switching.

In step S8315, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, and then the second setting process for the hold notice ends. After the hold notice flag is set in this way, the first execution process of the hold notice in step S1701 in the shift command correspondence process (FIG. 38 (a)) and the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41). In the first execution process of the hold notice in step S1807, the process of changing the display mode of the hold image to the specific display mode is executed. That is, the hold notice effect for the hold information generated during the mode switching standby period is performed after the effect mode is switched.

<About the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched>
The display mode of the holding image when the effect mode is switched will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 99. Here, a case where the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B will be described as an example.

If the execution lottery for the switching guidance notification is won during the switching valid period of the mode switching, the switching guidance image 451 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 as shown in FIG. 95 (a). When the player performs a mode switching operation by the production operation unit 36 in that state, the mode shifts to a standby state for mode switching (a state in which the player knows that the mode switching will be performed later), and is shown in FIG. 99 (a). As described above, the switching standby image 452 is displayed on the display screen G. The mode switching standby state ends when the mode switching timing (start timing of the next game round) is reached.

Assuming that two new hold information are generated during the standby period, the main control device 162 executes the hold look-ahead process (step S305) in the same manner as the hold information generated in the situation not during the wait period, and holds each of them. Look ahead to fluctuation patterns of information. Further, the effect control device 143 does not execute the setting process (step S1403) for the hold notice for each of the hold information, and changes the display mode of the hold images HW1 and HW2 corresponding to them to the normal display mode HMa. Set.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 99B, the holding images HW1 and HW2 in the second unit holding display area Ga2 and the third unit holding display area Ga3 of the first holding display area Ga are set to the normal display mode HMa. Is displayed. The state in which the display mode of the holding images HW1 and HW2 is set to the normal display mode HMa is continued until at least the standby state ends.

When the mode switching timing comes with the start of the next game round, the mode switching standby state ends, and the effect mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B as shown in FIG. 99 (c). At this time, the effect control device 143 executes the second setting process (step S8119) for the hold notice for the hold information (holding images HW1, HW2) generated during the waiting period.

In the second setting process for the hold notice effect, various lottery for executing the hold notice effect (execution lottery for the hold notice effect, final display) based on the result of the hold look-ahead process executed when the hold information is acquired. Lottery of modes, lottery of production scenarios, etc.). At that time, the lottery table set for the effect mode B, which is the effect mode after switching, is used for those lottery.

As a result of the second setting process for the hold notice, it is assumed that the hold notice effect is not executed for the hold image HW1 and the result of changing the hold image HW2 to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing is drawn. As shown in FIG. 99 (d), when the hold image HW2 is shifted from the second unit hold display area Ga2 to the first unit hold display area Ga1, the display mode is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb. Is changed to. That is, the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information generated during the mode switching standby period is executed after the mode switching.

It should be noted that the switching guidance image 451 (FIG. 95A) may be displayed in a situation where the execution lottery for the switching guidance notification is won during the execution of the holding notice effect and the holding notice effect is being executed. In this case, the hold notice effect is not subject to the execution restriction, and the state shifts to the standby state while the hold notice effect is continued.

In addition, when the hold information is generated between the time when the switching guide image 451 is displayed and the time when the switching operation is performed (until the transition to the standby state), and the hold information is used as an opportunity to execute the hold notice effect. There is also. That is, there is a case where the hold image of the hold information acquired after the display of the switching guide image 451 shifts to the standby state in a state in which the hold image is set to the specific display mode. In this case as well, the hold notice effect is not subject to execution restrictions, and the state shifts to the standby state while the hold notice effect is continued.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In a configuration in which the effect mode switching condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the standby state, and then the effect mode is switched when the switching timing is reached, the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode during the standby state. The configuration is such that the execution of the notice effect is restricted.

In the present embodiment, since the hold notice effect in which the display mode of the hold image is set to the specific display mode is executed based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player can obtain a jackpot result even before the start of the game round. Can arouse a sense of expectation. Further, since the mode is switched between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and the tiredness of the game can be suppressed. In such a configuration, for example, if the effect mode is switched during the execution of the hold notice effect, the attention to the hold notice effect is reduced due to the change in the effect mode, or conversely, the hold notice effect is used. As a result of concentration, there is a concern that the production mode may be changed without the player noticing it, causing confusion.

In this regard, according to this configuration, in the state where it is known that the effect mode will be switched later (standby state for mode switching), the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted, so that the effect mode is set during the execution of the hold notice effect. Switching can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to each of the execution of the hold notice effect and the switching of the effect mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. Further, if the effect mode after switching is not suitable for the pending advance notice effect during execution, it is necessary to make advance adjustments to match the two when designing the effect. According to this configuration, such adjustment is performed. There is also an advantage that it becomes unnecessary and the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

The configuration is such that the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted for the hold information acquired during the standby state.

With the above configuration, the range of the special state to be restricted by the hold notice effect is widened, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the hold notice effect from being excessively restricted. In particular, if the hold information acquired between the display of the switching guide image 451 and the transition to the standby state is subject to the execution restriction of the hold notice effect, it is uncertain whether the effect mode is actually switched. Execution of the hold notice effect will be restricted even for the hold information acquired in. In this case, if the player does not execute the switching operation and the effect mode is not switched, as a result, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted for the hold information that did not need to be restricted. However, according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress such useless restrictions.

Regardless of the result of the hold look-ahead processing, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to forcibly restrict the execution of the hold notice effect regardless of the result of the hold look-ahead process. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the switching of the effect mode during the execution of the hold notice effect. In addition, since the execution restriction of the hold advance notice effect is not affected by the result of the hold look-ahead process, the hold look-ahead process proceeds in the same manner as in the non-standby state even in the standby state (during the limit period of the hold advance notice effect). be able to. That is, since it is not necessary to change the configuration of the hold look-ahead process, it is possible to limit the execution of the hold advance notice effect during the standby state while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The easiness of executing the hold notice effect differs between the effect mode A and the effect mode B.

In the case of such a configuration, since the production characteristics related to the suggestion of the jackpot expectation change by switching the production mode, the difference in the production mode is different from the case where only the appearance is changed by changing the background image or the character image. It can make a strong impression on people. However, on the other hand, if the effect mode is switched while the hold notice effect is being executed, the degree of expectation suggested by the hold notice effect may differ before and after the change of the effect mode. In this case, in the effect mode after switching, there is a concern that the expected degree suggested by the hold notice effect and the result of the hit / fail determination actually notified may be inconsistent, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying the present embodiment (a configuration that limits the execution of the hold notice effect in the case of a standby state in which the effect mode is being prepared for switching) to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above discrepancy can be avoided. , It is possible to preferably suppress giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

The effect mode B is an effect mode in which the hold notice effect is less likely to be executed than the effect mode A, and the switching to the effect mode B is restricted when the hold notice effect is executed in the effect mode A.

When the ease of executing the hold notice effect in the effect mode B is lower than that of the effect mode A, if the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B while the hold notice effect is being executed, the apparent expectation is increased. There is a concern that the player will be shown a higher degree of expectation than the actual one. In this respect, in this configuration, the hold notice effect is easy to be executed (the expectation degree corresponding to the hold notice effect is relatively low), and the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed from the effect mode A (the expectation degree corresponding to the specific notification is relative). When switching to the effect mode B, if the switch to the mode is being prepared, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect, and it is possible to preferably suppress the suggestion of a higher degree of expectation than the actual state.

The hold notice effect corresponding to the hold information acquired during the standby state is executed after the effect mode is switched. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the hold notice effect from being restricted for the hold information acquired during the standby state, and to prevent the expectation level from being suggested.

In the above case, the hold advance notice effect after the mode switching is executed based on the result of the hold look-ahead process (hold look-ahead process when the hold information is acquired) performed during the standby state. In this case, it is possible to execute the hold advance notice effect corresponding to the hold information acquired during the standby state without executing the hold look-ahead process again after the effect mode is switched. As a result, the existing configuration can be used as it is for the hold look-ahead processing of the main control device 162, and it is possible to suppress the configuration from becoming complicated.

After switching the effect mode for the hold information acquired during the standby state, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice effect, and then the lottery conditions (winning probability, etc.) of the execution lottery are switched. The configuration is such that the conditions set corresponding to the production mode are applied.

In the above configuration, when drawing a lottery whether or not to execute the hold notice effect after switching the effect mode, the lottery condition when the target hold information is acquired (lottery set corresponding to the effect mode before the switch). The lottery condition set corresponding to the effect mode after switching is applied instead of the condition). As a result, even if the hold information is acquired during the standby state (before the change of the effect mode), the hold notice effect can be performed corresponding to the effect mode after the switch.

When the hold information is acquired during the standby state, the waiting occurrence information indicating that the hold information was acquired during the standby state is stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp after the waiting state that the holding information is acquired during the waiting state based on the waiting occurrence information stored in the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344. Therefore, even if the hold information acquired before the standby state and the hold information acquired during the standby state are mixed after the end of the standby state, the hold information acquired during the standby state can be easily obtained. Can be identified. As a result, when the hold notice effect is executed after the mode is switched, the hold information acquired during the standby state and the hold information that is not are identified, and only the hold information acquired during the standby state is processed. Will be able to do.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and the contents of each modification, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information based on the winning of the first operating port 62 is stored up to four pieces, but may be less than four pieces (one piece). It may be 5 or more. Further, the upper limit number of stored information based on the winning of the second operating port 63 may be less than 4 (may be 1) or 5 or more. Further, the upper limit number of stored information based on the winning of each of the operating ports 62 and 63 may be different.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the reserved information based on the winning of the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63 is distinguished, but it may not be distinguished. Further, the hold information based on the winning of the second operating port 63 is prioritized over the holding information based on the winning of the first operating port 62 and is subject to the winning / failing judgment, but the relationship is reversed. There may be a configuration in which the winning or failing judgment is made in the order of winning.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, only the game ball flowing down the right route can pass through the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63 or win a prize, but only the game ball flowing down the left route passes through. Alternatively, it may be configured so that a prize can be won, or it may be configured so that it can pass or win a prize from either the right route or the left route. However, in order to improve the sharpness of the game, only the game ball that flows down one of the right route and the left route can win a prize in the first operating port 62, and only the game ball that flows down the other of the right route and the left route is a through gate. It is preferable that the configuration is such that it can pass through 64 and the second operating port 63 or win a prize.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, by displaying the hold image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, the hold notification is performed so that the player can recognize the number of holds, but the symbol display. An image for holding may be displayed on a display unit different from that of the device 75, or a holding lamp unit (light emitting unit) provided in a number corresponding to the upper limit storage number may be made to emit light, depending on the number of light emitting holding lamp units. It may be configured to notify the number of holds. In the case of causing the hold lamp unit to emit light, the hold advance notice effect is performed by setting the light emission mode (for example, the light emission color) to a specific light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead processing. be able to.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the result of the hit / fail judgment is the jackpot result, so that the game shifts to the jackpot game (open / close execution mode). The result is a small hit result, and the game ball hits the V winning opening (V winning sensor) in the small hit game (a game state in which a variable winning device having a V winning opening or a V winning opening and an exit opening is opened and closed). When the game is passed (when the result of the grant determination is a predetermined result and the predetermined game result is obtained), the game may be shifted to the jackpot game.

In addition, in the present invention, "a privilege can be given to a player based on the result of grant correspondence" and "a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of grant correspondence" is shifted. As described above, it can be understood that "to let" include the case where the result of the winning / failing determination becomes the small hit result and the game shifts to the big hit game through the V winning.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, as the specific notification, the hold notice effect in which the display mode of the hold image is set as the specific display mode is executed, but instead of the hold notice effect using the hold image, the hold look-ahead process is performed. The configuration of each embodiment may be applied to a game rotation effect (so-called continuous advance notice effect or look-ahead zone effect) executed over a plurality of game times based on the result of.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the effect of straddling the game times is executed as the specific notification, but the specific notification does not necessarily have to straddle the game times, and is performed in one game time. There may be. For example, in the case of the first embodiment, it is assumed that the effect mode is switched a plurality of times during the game. In this case, the effect performed in the one game round does not necessarily have to be triggered by the result of the hold look-ahead process, but is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment performed at the start of the game round. It may be.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the symbols that are variablely displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are scrolled in the left-right direction, but the symbols are displayed side by side in the left, middle, and right directions. The design may be varied and displayed so as to be scrolled in the vertical direction. That is, the arrangement direction and scroll direction of the symbols are not particularly limited. Further, the number of symbols (the number of columns in the symbol row) is not limited to three, and may be two or four or more.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the execution display area D is provided to notify the player that the execution of the reserved game times can be recognized by the player, but the execution display area D may not be provided. good.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, when the hold notice effect is executed, the effect scenario is set including the notification period in the execution display area D, but the target hold image HW is set in the execution display area D. The production scenario may be set for the period before it is displayed (the period during which the game times of the target hold image HW are pending).

(11) In each of the above embodiments, when the hold notice effect is executed, the setting is made step by step, such as setting the effect scenario after determining the final display mode of the hold image. The final display mode and the effect scenario may be set by the process of. For example, the configuration may be such that both the final display mode and the effect scenario are determined by the table of 1.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the variation pattern information is transmitted when the result of the hold look-ahead process executed by the main control device 162 is notified to the effect control device 143, but the data capacity of the transmission command is large. As a configuration for transmitting predetermined information (identifier corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, rank information when the fluctuation pattern is ranked according to the degree of expectation, etc.), which has a smaller amount of data than the fluctuation pattern, in order to suppress the increase. May be good. This also applies to the hold command at the time of power recovery in the sixth embodiment.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the game rotation effect (effect pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern, but the game rotation effect may be determined based on the values of the fluctuation type counter CS and the jackpot random number counter C1. good. In this case, the main control device 162 does not execute the hold look-ahead process, and the effect control device 143 uses the hold command (information indicating the value of the variation type counter CS or the jackpot random number counter C1) from the main control device 162. It is preferable to execute the hold look-ahead process (the process of pre-reading the result of the hit / fail judgment and the game round effect).

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the mode of the hold notice effect (display mode of the hold image) is set based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the hold look-ahead process. The effect pattern (game round effect) may be pre-read based on the information of the variation pattern (variation pattern specified by the hold look-ahead process) transmitted from, and the mode of the hold notice effect may be set based on the result. .. Such a configuration is particularly effective when, for example, a plurality of types of effect patterns (game times effect) correspond to one variation pattern.

(15) In the first to fourth and sixth to ninth embodiments described above, the hold look-ahead process is performed by the main control device 162, but it may also be performed by the effect control device 143 and the display control device 350. good. When the hold look-ahead process is executed by the effect control device 143, the information corresponding to the value (acquired random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the variation type counter CS is transmitted from the main control device 162 as in the fifth embodiment. It is preferable that the effect is transmitted to the effect control device 143, and the result of the hit / fail determination, the lottery result of the fluctuation pattern, and the like are pre-read by the effect control device 143. Further, in the fifth embodiment, at least one of the first hold look-ahead process and the second hold look-ahead process may be performed by the main control device 162.

(16) In the first to fifth embodiments, the display mode of the target holding image HW is restored to the original specific display mode and then promoted to a higher display mode. However, the original specific display mode is used. The configuration may be such that the display mode is promoted to a higher level without returning to the mode. Further, as a configuration in which both a case of returning to the original specific display mode and then promoting to a higher display mode and a case of promoting to a higher display mode without returning to the original specific display mode can occur. good.

(17) In the first to fifth embodiments, when the display mode of the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW is gradually returned. However, a configuration in which a stepwise return mode does not occur may be used. That is, it may be configured to uniformly return to the original specific display mode by one change of the display mode.

(18) In the first to fifth embodiments, the return scenario is set including the display period in the execution display area D, but the first hold display area Ga or the second hold display area Gb The return scenario may be set only for the display period (not including the display period in the execution display area D).

(19) In the first to fifth embodiments, the promotion process of the target holding image HW may not be executed.

(20) In the first to fifth embodiments, the original specific display is performed during the period (holding period) in which the target holding image HW is displayed in the first holding display area Ga or the second holding display area Gb. It was configured to return to the mode and then promote to a higher display mode in the game times of the target hold image HW, but it is not always necessary to wait for the promotion until the game times of the target hold image HW, and the above hold period It may be configured so that promotion can be performed at. When the promotion process is performed before the game round is started, the hold look-ahead process performed for the target hold image HW (hold information) is performed instead of the change start command transmitted from the main control device 162 at the start of the change. See the results.

(21) In the first to fifth embodiments, when the target holding image HW is promoted to a higher display mode in the game times, the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 at the start of the fluctuation is executed. Although it is configured to be referred to, the above promotion may be performed based on the result of the hold look-ahead process performed on the target hold image HW (hold information).

(22) In the first to third embodiments, the effect mode is switched by the player's operation (manual), but as in the eighth embodiment, the player does not operate. The production mode may be automatically switched to.

(23) In the first to third embodiments, the effect mode is switched during the game rotation, but the effect mode may be switched via the open / close execution mode (big hit game). For example, for a configuration in which a plurality of production modes are set as production modes for a high-probability gaming state, and the player can select which production mode to play in the opening / closing execution mode immediately before that. , The configuration according to the first to third embodiments may be applied.

For example, when applying the configuration according to the first embodiment, the configuration can be as follows. In the effect mode A during the high probability game state, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set as the specific display mode, and the game times of the hold information before the target hold image HW become a probability change jackpot and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Then, when an effect mode B different from the effect mode A is selected during the open / close execution mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW is normally displayed in the effect mode B (high probability gaming state) after the open / close execution mode. Aspect HMa is set. Then, in the game round of the hold information before the target hold image HW, it becomes a probability change jackpot again and shifts to the open / close execution mode, and when the effect mode A is selected during the open / close execution mode, after the open / close execution mode. In the effect mode A (high probability gaming state), the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the original specific display mode.

In the above configuration, the effect mode is not limited to the case where the effect mode is switched by the player's operation (manual), and the effect mode may be automatically switched regardless of the player's operation.

(24) In the first to third embodiments, the ease of execution (execution probability) of the hold notice effect is different between the effect mode A and the effect mode B. The configuration may be such that the ease of execution is the same.

(25) In the first to third embodiments, the configuration includes two types of effect modes, the effect mode A and the effect mode B, as a plurality of types of effect states, but the configuration includes three or more types of effect modes. May be. At that time, for example, in a configuration in which the effect mode A to the effect mode C are provided as three or more types of effect states, it becomes difficult to execute the hold notice effect in the order of effect mode A> effect mode B> effect mode C. In the effect mode, the ease of execution of the hold notice effect may be different from each other, or in the effect modes A to C, the ease of execution of the hold notice effect may be the same, or the effect may be the same. Mode A and effect mode C have the same ease of executing the hold notice effect, but effect mode B has the same ease of execution of the hold notice effect, such as difficulty in executing the hold notice effect. The configuration may be such that the effect modes having different ease of execution are mixed.

In addition, in the configuration in which the effect mode in which the hold notice effect is the same in the ease of execution and the effect mode in which the ease of execution is different are mixed, in the switching between the effect modes in which the ease of execution is the same. Also, as in the case of switching between different effect modes, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be set to the normal display mode HMa as the effect mode is switched. That is, the configuration may be such that switching between production modes having the same ease of execution and switching between different production modes are not distinguished.

Further, in the switching between the production modes having the same ease of execution, unlike the switching between different production modes, the normal display mode HMa is not changed even if the production mode is switched, and the specific display before the mode switching is performed. The configuration may be such that the aspect is maintained. That is, the switching between the effect modes having the same ease of execution and the switching between the different effect modes may be distinguished, and the handling of the hold notice effect may be different between the two.

(26) In the first to third embodiments, the hold notice effect can be executed in the effect mode B in which the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed, but the hold notice effect is not executed in the effect mode B. May be good. That is, it is understood that the "effect state in which the specific notification is difficult to be executed" of the present invention includes not only the effect mode in which the execution probability of the hold notice effect is low, but also the effect mode in which the hold notice effect is not executed. Can be done.

(27) In the first to third embodiments described above, the hold notice effect is executed in the effect mode A and the effect mode B by making the execution probabilities of the hold notice effect different when the hold information corresponds to the deviation. Although the configuration is such that the susceptibility is different, the execution probability of the hold notice effect when the hold information corresponds to the big hit is different, and the execution probability is different both when dealing with the deviation and when dealing with the hit. As a result, the ease of execution of the hold notice effect in those effect modes may be different.

(28) In the first to third embodiments, when the effect mode is switched during the execution of the hold notice effect, the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is also changed to the normal display mode HMa. However, the configuration is such that the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb are distinguished from the execution display area D, and the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is not changed to the normal display mode HMa. May be good.

(29) In the first to third embodiments, when the display mode of the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, the execution of the change suggestion effect is restricted. It may be configured to execute a dedicated effect (different from the change suggestion effect) corresponding to the above. With such a configuration, there are cases where the display mode of the hold image is changed to a purely higher display mode and a case where the hold image is returned to the original specific display mode by the return process. It can be easily identified by a person.

(30) In the first embodiment, when the effect mode A is changed to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect, and then the mode A is changed again (the original hold notice effect is executed). The display mode of the target hold image HW is returned to the original specific display mode (when the production mode is returned to). In the situation where the hold notice effect is being executed, the display mode is switched to the effect mode B, and the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa. When switching to C (an effect mode different from the effect mode A), the original specific display mode may be restored.

In the above case, the ease of executing the hold notice effect is the same in the effect mode A and the effect mode C, or the hold notice effect is more likely to be executed in the effect mode C than in the effect mode A (expectation for the hold notice effect). Is low), and it is preferable to use the effect mode. However, the present invention is not limited to these, and the effect mode C may be configured in which the hold notice effect is less likely to be executed than the effect mode A. At that time, the effect mode C may be an effect mode in which the hold notice effect is more easily executed than the effect mode B, or may be an effect mode in which the hold notice effect is less likely to be executed. It may be an effect mode in which the ease of being performed is the same. Further, the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C may have the same ease of executing the hold notice effect.

(31) In the first embodiment, there are a case where the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect and a case where the effect mode B is switched to the effect mode A during the execution of the hold notice effect. In both cases, the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa, but in the latter case, that is, from the effect mode having a high expectation corresponding to the hold notice effect to the effect mode with a low expectation. When switching, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be maintained in the specific display mode (not changed to the normal display mode HMa).

(32) In the first embodiment, the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect, and then the effect is performed before the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect is completed. When the mode A is switched, the display mode of the target hold image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, but the hold information is produced before the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect is started. When the mode A is switched to, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be restored to the original specific display mode. That is, when the mode A is switched to the effect mode A after the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect is started, the display mode of the target hold image HW may not be returned to the original specific display mode. ..

(33) In the first embodiment described above, when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect and new hold information is generated while staying in the effect mode B, the effect is produced. In mode B, the hold notice effect is not executed triggered by the hold information, but by performing a lottery to execute the hold notice effect under the conditions set corresponding to the effect mode B and winning the lottery. It may be configured to execute the hold notice effect.

However, while the hold image that was set as the specific display mode in the effect mode A before switching to the effect mode B is changed to the normal display mode HMa by switching to the effect mode B, the hold information generated in the effect mode B When the hold notice effect is performed, the player's anxiety that the hold image (hold information), which is normally displayed as HMa, may have disappeared to the jackpot or the degree of expectation is further aggravated. There are concerns. Further, if the mode A is switched to the effect mode A again during the execution of the hold notice effect started in the effect mode B, there is a concern about how to handle the hold notice effect, and the processing becomes complicated as a whole. ..

In that sense, as in the first embodiment, the target holding image HW which is in the state of staying in the effect mode B (in other words, the target hold image HW which is the specific display mode in the previous effect mode A). It is preferable to limit the execution of the hold notice effect for the hold information newly generated in the state of waiting for the return process for returning the display mode to the original display mode). In addition, when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B in a situation where the hold notice effect is not being executed, the execution of the hold notice effect triggered by the newly generated hold information in the effect mode B is not restricted. You may.

(34) In the first embodiment described above, the number of hold information including the current hold information is grasped in step S1508, but the hold number is grasped for the hold information before the current hold information. May be good.

(35) In the second embodiment, the target holding images HB1 and HB2 (holding images of the holding information generated in the restricted state) in the restricted state are set as the normal display mode HMa, but the normal display mode HMa and A predetermined display mode (for example, a black display mode) different from any of the specific display modes may be used. In this case, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand that the hold notice effect is in the restricted state, in other words, the player may change to the specific display mode when the restricted state ends. Will be able to inform.

(36) In the second embodiment, when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect, that is, when the state shifts to the restricted state of the hold notice effect, the state is restricted. It may be configured to perform a notification (for example, a predetermined display for teaching that the restricted state is in effect) different from the reserved image.

(37) In the second embodiment described above, the display of the hold image may not be executed during the restricted state. More specifically, not only the hold image HA set as the specific display mode in the effect mode A and the hold images HB1 and HB2 of the hold information generated in the effect mode B, but all the hold images including other hold images. It may be configured so that the display is not executed.

At that time, in order to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the number of holdings, the number of holdings may be notified by another display such as a numerical display (notification of the number of holdings different from the image for holding). However, if the display is suddenly switched to the above-mentioned separate display, it will be difficult for the player to understand. When the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B, it is preferable to delete only the display of the hold image in the effect mode B. In this case, it is preferable not to change the display portion of the separate display in order to prevent the player from losing sight of the separate display.

(38) In the second embodiment described above, the mode of the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information generated during the limit state is set at the end of the limit period (step S2702), but during the limit period. It may be set or it may be set after the end of the time limit.

(39) In the second embodiment described above, the hold look-ahead process is executed when the hold information is acquired during the restricted state, and based on the result of the hold look-ahead process performed during the restricted state after the end of the restricted state. The display mode of the target hold images HB1 and HB2 is set, but the hold look-ahead process for the hold information acquired during the restricted state is executed after the restricted state, and the target after the restricted state is executed based on the result. The display mode of the holding images HB1 and HB2 may be set. At this time, the hold look-ahead process may be performed by the main control device 162 or the effect control device 143. Further, the hold look-ahead process when the hold information is acquired during the restricted state may not be executed, or may be configured to be executed.

(40) In the third embodiment, when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect, the display mode of the effect mode B is the same as that of the effect mode A. , When the notification mode of the hold image is distinguished between the effect mode A and the effect mode B, it is not always necessary to return to the same specific display mode, and the player recognizes that the display mode is the same. The display mode may be changed so that the display mode can be changed. For example, in the effect mode A, the blue display mode HMb <green display mode HMc <red display mode HMd <rainbow color display mode HMe is ranked in this order, while in the effect mode B, the yellow display mode <brown display mode <brown display mode. <Purple display mode <In a configuration in which the display mode is ranked in the order of the rainbow color display mode, when the display mode of the target hold image HW is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B in the state where the display mode is the green display mode HMc. In the effect mode B, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be a brown display mode.

In addition, in a game machine that suggests the degree of expectation by changing the hold image to a predetermined character image, if the configuration is set so that the character's costume, pose, facial expression, etc. differ depending on the production mode, the target is held. When the effect image HW is changed to a character image such as a costume corresponding to the effect mode A (a state in which the hold notice effect is being executed) and the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B, the target is in the effect mode B. While returning the hold image HW to the same character image as in the effect mode A, the costumes and the like may correspond to the effect mode B.

In short, it is sufficient that the player can recognize that the display mode of the target holding image HW in the effect mode B is the same as the display mode in the effect mode A. This also applies to the case where the display mode of the target holding image HW is promoted to a higher display mode in the effect mode B. That is, it suffices as long as it can be recognized as a higher display mode from the viewpoint of the player. In the above example, the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed to the brown display mode and then promoted to the purple display mode.

In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the display mode of the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode when the original effect mode A is returned. When the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode are the same in the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the target holding image HW after the opening / closing execution mode is the same as before the opening / closing execution mode. A configuration having a specific display mode, an upper limit display in which the specific display mode of the target hold image HW in the gaming state before the open / close execution mode in the fifth embodiment corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the second hold look-ahead process. Aspects In the following aspects, the display mode of the image HW for holding the target after the opening / closing execution mode is the same specific display mode as before the opening / closing execution mode, and the target is held after the power is restored in the sixth embodiment. Even for a configuration in which the display mode of the image HW is the same as the display mode at the time of power failure, the display mode of the target reserved image HW can be recognized by the player as having the same rank. It can be said that it is a concrete example of returning.

(41) In the third embodiment, when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B during the execution of the hold notice effect, the display mode of the target hold image HW is temporarily changed to the normal display mode HMa. However, the configuration may not be changed to the normal display mode HMa. That is, when the determination result is that the display mode of the same rank is displayed in the effect mode B (when the affirmative judgment is made in step S3107), the display mode of the target holding image HW is not set to the normal display mode HMa ( The display mode may be the same (without executing the process of step S3110).

(42) In the third embodiment, when the determination result is that the display mode of the same rank is not displayed in the effect mode B (when a negative determination is made in step S3107), the display mode of the target holding image HW. Is set to the normal display mode HMa, but may be set to the specific display mode within a range that does not exceed the actual expected degree. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target holding image HW before switching the effect mode is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode set in the return determination table, the display mode is equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode. (A display mode lower than the specific display mode before switching the effect mode) may be configured to have the specific display mode.

(43) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, the game state includes three types of game states: a normal game state, a high probability game state, and a time-saving game state. For example, the normal game state and the high probability game state are provided. It may be configured to have a gaming state other than the three types, such as having two types of gaming states. That is, it suffices if it has a plurality of types of gaming states.

(44) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, the display of the hold image is not executed during the open / close execution mode, but the hold image may be displayed. In this case, the display mode of the holding image in the open / close execution mode may be the normal display mode HMa, or may be the specific display mode before the open / close execution mode. Further, a predetermined display mode (for example, a black display mode) different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode may be used. In this case, the predetermined display mode may be one that does not correspond to the jackpot expectation or the like of each reserved information (those that do not suggest the expectation or the like).

(45) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, the display of the hold image is restarted during the ending period, but the display of the hold image is restarted before the start of the ending period. Alternatively, the display of the hold image may be resumed after the end of the ending period (for example, when the first game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends).

(46) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the gaming state after the open / close execution mode. It may be configured to display with a specific display target without setting the aspect HMa. That is, the display of the hold image may be resumed in a state where the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the specific display mode.

(47) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, as the applicable configuration, the game state (variation pattern table) is changed via the open / close execution mode in which a plurality of round games are executed. As illustrated, it is also possible to apply to a configuration in which the variation pattern table is changed via a small hit game (opening / closing execution mode in which one round game is executed). It should be noted that the change of the fluctuation pattern table is not limited to the trigger that the result of the winning / failing determination becomes the winning result or the opening / closing execution mode (the game state in which the variable winning device 65 is opened / closed) is executed, for example. It may be performed based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition such as the number of game times for which the result of the hit / fail judgment is out of the question has reached a predetermined number of times is satisfied.

(48) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, even if the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS are the same, the results obtained by the lottery are different, and the open / close execution mode is used as an opportunity. Although the game state is changed, the above difference may occur due to an event other than the opening / closing execution mode. As such an event, for example, it is conceivable that the number of game times in which the result of the winning / failing judgment is wrong has reached a predetermined number of times, or that some kind of lottery has been won. In other words, what is the trigger is arbitrary, and the point is that it may be in a state where the above difference occurs due to the occurrence of some event. Further, the above difference is not limited to the one caused by the change of the gaming state, and may be caused by, for example, the change of the effect state without the change of the jackpot probability or the like.

(49) In the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the holding image is stored when the opening / closing execution mode is started, but the storage timing of the display mode is not particularly limited. For example, it may be configured to be stored in the winning game times that trigger the opening / closing execution mode.

However, if the display mode of the hold image is gradually promoted in the hold notice effect, the display mode of the hold image may change during the execution of the winning game, so that the display mode is changed. It is preferable to store the display mode after the fixed state, in other words, the state in which the change of the display mode is restricted. Specifically, it is preferable to store the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing execution mode is started (when the winning game round ends) as in the fourth embodiment.

(50) In the fourth embodiment, the return determination and the setting of the return process (step S3416) are executed during the ending period, but these processes may be performed after the end of the open / close execution mode. Further, it may be performed after the start of the open / close execution mode and before the start of the ending period.

When each of the above processes is performed in the open / close execution mode, it is preferable to perform each process during a period in which the variable winning device 65 is closed, such as an opening period, an ending period, and a round interval period. When the variable winning device 65 is in the open state in the open / close execution mode, the processing load becomes relatively high, for example, it is necessary to perform processing for performing a winning effect based on the occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 65. It is assumed that there is. If the return judgment and the return processing are set using such a period, there is a concern that a higher load may be caused. In this respect, it is possible to reduce the processing load by configuring each of the above processes by utilizing the period in which the variable winning device 65 is closed.

(51) In the fourth embodiment, when the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is the normal gaming state and the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode is the high-probability gaming state, the result of the hold look-ahead process is normal. The display mode of the target hold image HW is restored when it is a jackpot result, but the jackpot result is pre-read by the hold look-ahead process regardless of whether it is a normal jackpot result or a probability variation jackpot result. In this case, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be restored.

(52) In the fifth embodiment, the acquisition random number itself such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the variation type counter CS is transmitted from the main control device 162 to the effect control device 143, but the data of the transmission command is In order to suppress the increase in capacity, predetermined information (identifier corresponding to the random number, etc.) having a smaller amount of data than the acquired random numbers may be transmitted.

(53) In the fifth embodiment, the second hold look-ahead process is performed at the end of the open / close execution mode, but it may be performed after the end of the open / close execution mode. Further, it may be configured to be performed during the execution of the open / close execution mode or before the start of the open / close execution mode (the period from the start of the winning game round to the start of the open / close execution mode).

(54) In the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern is pre-read in the first hold pre-reading process and the second hold pre-reading process, but the effect pattern (game times effect) may be pre-read. Such a configuration is particularly effective when, for example, a plurality of types of effect patterns (game times effect) correspond to one variation pattern.

(55) In the fifth embodiment, the upper limit display mode is set according to the fluctuation pattern in the upper limit display mode table, but the upper limit display mode may be set according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. good.

(56) In the fifth embodiment, even if the hit / fail result for the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 fluctuates between the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode, the target hold image. Although the display mode of the HW is set to the specific display mode after the opening / closing execution mode, the display mode may not be the specific display mode. Specifically, when the result of the first hold look-ahead process is a big hit and the result of the second hold look-ahead process is an off result, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the specific display mode after the open / close execution mode. It may be configured not to.

(57) In the fifth embodiment, the specific display mode of the target hold image HW in the game state before the open / close execution mode and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the second hold look-ahead process are displayed. A comparison was made, and the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the open / close execution mode was set based on the result. However, the above comparison was not performed (regardless of the display mode before the open / close execution mode). The display mode may be set based on the result of the second hold look-ahead processing.

(58) In the fifth embodiment, the specific display mode of the target hold image HW in the gaming state before the open / close execution mode is higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the second hold look-ahead process. In the case of the higher mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the game state after the open / close execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, but the specific display mode is set within the range not exceeding the actual expected degree. It may be set. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target hold image HW in the gaming state before the open / close execution mode is a higher mode than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the second hold look-ahead process. , The display mode that is equal to or less than the upper limit display mode (display mode lower than the specific display mode before the opening / closing execution mode) may be configured as the specific display mode.

(59) In the fifth embodiment, the second hold look-ahead process is executed regardless of the difference between the game state before the open / close execution mode and the game state after the open / close execution mode. When the states are the same, the display mode of the target hold image HW after the open / close execution mode may be set based on the display mode before the open / close execution mode without executing the second hold look-ahead process. Specifically, the display mode after the open / close execution mode may be set to the same display mode as the display mode before the open / close execution mode. In this case, the normal display mode HMa may be changed to the display mode before the open / close execution mode, or the display mode may be displayed in the display mode before the open / close execution mode from the beginning.

(60) In the sixth to seventh embodiments, the power failure abnormality is exemplified as a predetermined abnormality, but other abnormalities such as a magnetic sensor abnormality and a vibration sensor abnormality may be used. At that time, the predetermined abnormality is not limited to the one in which the progress of the game is stopped, and may be the one in which the progress of the game is continued.

(61) In the sixth to seventh embodiments, when the power failure is resolved and the power is restored, the display of the hold image is resumed with the target hold image HW set to the specific display mode. However, in the initial stage at the time of power restoration, the display mode of the target holding image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa, and then the display mode before the occurrence of the power failure state and the result of the hold look-ahead processing performed before the power failure. The configuration may be changed to a specific display mode set based on the above.

Further, in the initial stage at the time of power recovery, the display mode of the target holding image HW is different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode (a display mode dedicated to power recovery, for example, a purple display mode). After that, the display mode may be changed to the display mode before the occurrence of the power failure state or the specific display mode set based on the result of the hold look-ahead processing performed before the power failure. At that time, the holding image set as the predetermined display mode may be changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode.

(62) In the sixth to seventh embodiments, when the power failure is resolved and the power is restored, the screen state of the symbol display device 75 is changed to the recovery standby screen (such as "The screen will be restored soon"). The display of the hold image is restarted in the situation where the character display 461 is displayed), but the hold image is not displayed in the return standby screen state, and the screen returns (design columns Z1 to 1). The display of the hold image may be resumed when the symbol variation display of Z3 is restored (or when the screen is restored). In such a case, the display of the hold image is restarted in the state where the display number of the hold image is updated (the state in which each hold image is shifted to the lower side and the hold number is reduced by one).

Further, the display timing of the hold image may be different depending on whether the power interruption abnormality occurs during the non-execution of the game round or during the execution of the game round. Specifically, if a power failure occurs during the non-execution of the game, it is held on the power-on screen (the screen where the character display such as "Power is turned on" is displayed). If the display of the image for use is resumed and an abnormal power failure occurs during the execution of the game round, the image for hold is not displayed in the return standby screen state, and the display of the image for hold is resumed in accordance with the screen return. It may be configured to be. In other words, if a power failure occurs during the non-execution of the game round, the hold image is displayed at a timing earlier than when it occurs during the execution of the game round (the time elapsed from the start of power supply is short). May be configured to be restarted.

(63) In the sixth to seventh embodiments, the case where the power failure occurs during the execution or non-execution of the game round is illustrated, but the power failure occurs during the execution of the open / close execution mode. It can also be applied in cases. At that time, the display of the target hold image may be resumed in the power-on screen state or the return standby screen state, or the hold image may be displayed during the period when the continuous open / close execution mode is performed after the power is restored. The display may be non-executed, and the display of the target hold image may be resumed at the start timing of the first game round after the open / close execution mode. Further, the display of the hold image may not be executed during the period in which the return standby screen state is set, and the display of the hold image may be resumed in accordance with the screen return.

(64) In the sixth to seventh embodiments, the power failure monitoring unit 315 is provided in the power supply and launch control device 191. However, the power failure monitoring unit 315 may be provided in the main control device 162 or the effect control device 143. In this case, in the sixth embodiment, the power failure monitoring unit 315 may be provided in each of the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143, or may be provided in one of the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143. A power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 or a power failure command (command indicating the occurrence of a power failure state) from one control device may be transmitted to the other control device.

(65) In the sixth to seventh embodiments, the setting process of the display mode of the target hold image HW after the power is restored (the process for returning the hold notice in step S5202 and the process for setting the display mode in step S6204). Is executed at the time of power recovery, but may be executed after power recovery. Specifically, it may be configured to be executed at a predetermined timing in the period until the game round of the target holding image HW is started after the power is restored.

(66) In the sixth embodiment, the information indicating the display mode of the target holding image HW is backed up, and after the power is restored, the display mode before the occurrence of the power failure is grasped based on the information and after the power is restored. The display mode of the target hold image HW is set, and in the seventh embodiment described above, the information indicating the look-ahead result is backed up, and after the power is restored, the look-ahead result before the occurrence of the power failure is grasped and restored based on the information. Although the display mode of the target hold image HW after the power is set, the pre-reading process may be executed again after the power is restored, and the display mode of the target hold image HW after the power may be set based on the result. At that time, the look-ahead process after the power is restored may be performed by the main control device 162 or the effect control device 143.

In the above case, in a situation where a plurality of holding images are displayed, change location information capable of grasping which holding image is set as a specific display mode is stored, and a power failure state occurs. It is also preferable to have a configuration in which the change location information is backed up (memory retention). With such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp which holding image was displayed in a specific display mode before the power failure occurs after the power is restored. The change location information may be stored in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 and backed up by the main control device 162, or stored in the RAM 344 or the backup RAM 345 of the effect control device 143 and backed up by the effect control device 143. May be good.

In the above case, it is advisable to execute the look-ahead processing after the power is restored for the holding image (holding information) that is grasped to have been set to the specific display mode before the power interruption. In this case, even the reserved image that was not in the specific display mode before the power interruption is changed to the specific display mode by the pre-reading process after the power is restored, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player. Further, compared to the case where the pre-reading process is performed again for all the pending information existing after the power is restored, the number of times the pre-reading process is executed can be suppressed to a small number, and the processing load at the time of power restoration can be reduced. ..

Here, grasping which holding image was displayed in the specific display mode before the power failure can be rephrased as grasping which holding image was not displayed in the specific display mode before the power failure. However, the display mode may be set to the normal display mode for the reserved image that is grasped as not being displayed in the specific display mode by the grasp. In this case, the display mode of the hold image that was not the target of the pre-reading process after power restoration may be set to the normal display mode, or all the hold images may be set to the normal display mode after power recovery. For the pending image that is determined not to be displayed in the specific display mode after performing the look-ahead processing, the display mode may be forcibly set to the normal display mode regardless of the result of the look-ahead processing. ..

Further, in the configuration in which the display mode of the target holding image HW is set based on the pre-reading result after the power is restored, the display mode is set to a certain level or less as in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment. The configuration may be limited to the specific display mode (for example, green display mode HMc or blue display mode HMb).

The look-ahead process after the power is restored may be performed at the time of the power restoration, or as long as it is before the game round of the hold image (hold information), which was set as the specific display mode before the power failure, is started. It may be performed after the power is restored.

Further, with respect to the hold image which is grasped to have been set to the specific display mode before the power failure without executing the pre-reading process after the power is restored, the display mode is set to a predetermined specific display mode (for example, the blue display mode). It may be configured to be set to HMb).

(67) In the sixth embodiment, the backup RAM 345 is provided to back up (store and hold) the information related to the reserved image, but all the information stored in the RAM 344 is stored without providing the backup RAM 345. It may be configured to back up as a target. Further, a configuration may be configured in which a part of the information (information about the reserved image) stored in the RAM 344 is backed up without providing the backup RAM 345.

(68) In the sixth embodiment, the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 is transmitted to the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143, but it may be transmitted only to the main control device 162. .. In such a configuration, when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 is input to the main control device 162, the main control device 162 transmits a power failure command to the effect control device 143, and the effect control device 143 receives the power failure command. It is preferable that the power failure processing (processing of steps S11 to S13, etc.) is executed with this as an opportunity.

(69) In the sixth embodiment, when the specific display mode of the target holding image HW before the power failure is a display mode equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (green display mode HMc) (when affirmative determination is made in step S5404). ), The display mode of the target holding image HW after power recovery is limited to a specific display mode lower than the predetermined display mode, but the display mode of the target holding image HW is defined as the normal display mode HMa (specification). It may be configured (to release the display mode).

(70) In the sixth embodiment, the target holding image HW is set to a specific display mode lower than the specific display mode before the power failure after the power is restored. Although it is configured to execute the promotion process in the game times of the image HW (step S5409, step S5601), even when the display mode of the target holding image HW after the power is restored is the specific display mode before the power failure. The target holding image HW may be configured to execute the promotion process in the game times. Further, regardless of the display mode of the target holding image HW after the power is restored, the promotion process may be executed in the game times.

(71) In the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot result is pre-read by the hold look-ahead process before the power failure (when affirmative determination is made in step S6302), the display of the target hold image HW after the power is restored. Although the mode is uniformly set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc), it may be easily set to the first specific display mode. Specifically, when the jackpot result is pre-read by the hold look-ahead process before the power failure, the display mode of the target hold image HW after the power is restored is lower than the normal display mode HMa or the first specific display mode. The configuration may be set so that the probability of being the first specific display mode is higher than the probability of being the display mode of the above.

In addition, the same setting process for hold notice as before the power failure is performed based on the grasped hold look-ahead result (result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power failure) without setting restrictions such as the first specific display mode. It may be configured to execute and perform the execution lottery of the hold notice effect and the lottery process of the display mode of the hold image.

The same applies to the case where a highly expected deviation result is pre-read (when an affirmative judgment is made in step S6305).

(72) In the seventh embodiment, the upper limit display mode of the target hold image HW after the power is restored differs depending on whether the hold look-ahead process before the power failure is a jackpot result or a miss result. However, a configuration that does not make such a distinction may be used. Specifically, regardless of whether the image is correct or not, the upper limit display mode of the target holding image HW after the power is restored may be uniformly set to a predetermined special display mode.

(73) In the seventh embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the hold look-ahead process before the power failure cannot be grasped (when a negative determination is made in step S6308), the hold image corresponding to the hold information is displayed. Although the display is set to the normal display mode HMa, the display of the hold image may not be executed as an error treatment. At that time, the hold image corresponding to the hold information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped may be hidden, or all the hold images including other hold images may not be displayed.

(74) In the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot result is pre-read by the hold look-ahead process before the power failure (when affirmative determination is made in step S6302), the display of the target hold image HW after the power is restored. The mode is set to the first specific display mode, but it may be set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, if the jackpot result is pre-read before the power failure and the specific display mode is set to a higher expectation after the power is restored, the hold pre-reading result and the result of the hit / fail judgment in the game round are due to the influence of the power failure. It is assumed that the influence on the player will be large when the inconsistency occurs with. In this regard, the display mode of the hold image after power recovery is set to the normal display mode HMa for the time being, and the display mode is changed based on the fluctuation start command transmitted at the start of the game round. It becomes possible to safely set the display mode of the hold image in. This also applies to the case where the out-of-expectation result with high expectation is pre-read (when the affirmative judgment is made in step S6305).

(75) In the seventh embodiment, the case where the jackpot result is pre-read by the hold look-ahead process before the power failure, or the case where the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the reach-out effect of SPSP reach-out or more is pre-read. As a target, the promotion process of the target holding image HW in the game times is executed (step S6304, step S6307), but even if it is another look-ahead result (SP reach out-of-reach out-of-reach effect, etc.) The target holding image HW may be configured to execute the promotion process in the game times. Further, regardless of the read-ahead result, the promotion process may be executed in the game times.

(76) In the seventh embodiment, not only the information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power failure but also the information corresponding to the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power failure. It may be configured to back up and set the display mode of the target hold image HW after the power is restored based on both of the information. For example, a plurality of types of upper limits (upper limit display modes) of the specific display mode after power recovery are set corresponding to the fluctuation patterns, and the specific display mode of the target holding image HW before the power failure (backed up specific display mode). ) Is the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (backed up hold look-ahead result) pre-read in the hold look-ahead process before the power failure. The configuration may be set to the same mode as the specific display mode before the power failure.

(77) In the seventh embodiment, the main control device 162 backs up the information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power failure, but the effect control device 143 and the display control device It may be configured to back up at 350. When backing up by the effect control device 143, it is transmitted from the main control device 162 after being equipped with a backup function such as providing a backup RAM in the effect control device 143 as in the sixth embodiment. Information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead processing is stored in the RAM 344 of the effect control device 143, and when a power failure state occurs, the information is written to the backup RAM, or the above information stored in the RAM 344 is being cut off. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the data is also retained. In such a configuration, when the power failure state is resolved and the power is restored, the hold look-ahead performed before the power cut is performed based on the information held in the effect control device 143 (information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process). The result of processing can be grasped.

At the above time, the information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process in the main control device 162 may or may not be backed up. By the way, when both the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143 are configured to back up the information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process, it is based on the comparison result of each information backed up by both control devices 162 and 143. Further, a configuration for determining the normality of the information may be provided. Specifically, when the power failure state is resolved and the power is restored, the information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process backed up by the main control device 162 is transmitted to the effect control device 143, and the effect control device 143 transmits the information. , The information backed up by itself (information corresponding to the result of the hold look-ahead process) is compared with the information transmitted from the main control device 162. As a result, if both information correspond, it is judged that the backed up information is normal, the information is recognized as valid, and it is used for setting (returning) the hold notice effect after the power is restored. do. On the contrary, if both information do not correspond, it is determined that the backed up information is not normal, and the information is regarded as invalid and the hold notice effect is restored (setting of the hold notice effect using the information). ) Is not executed.

Here, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main control device 162 and the information backed up by the effect control device 143 means that the values of both information match, and the form of the information at the time of storage (for example, the value). ) Are different between the two control devices 162 and 143, and although the information itself does not match in comparison, it is conceivable that the contents of the respective information are substantially the same.

The information comparison is not limited to the effect control device 143, but may be performed by the main control device 162 or the display control device 350. When the main control device 162 performs the comparison, the information backed up by the effect control device 143 is transmitted to the main control device 162 when the power interruption state is resolved and the power is restored.

Further, the information for determining normality by comparing (verifying) the results backed up by each of the main control device 162 and the effect control device 143 is not necessarily limited to the result of the hold look-ahead processing, and for example, the pass / fail determination is made. It may be other information, such as information about the result or the number of holds. By the way, if the information about the number of holds backed up by the main control device 162 and the information about the number of holds backed up by the effect control device 143 do not correspond, an error notification may be executed as an abnormality, and an error notification may be executed. Alternatively or additionally, the configuration may be such that the number of holds is notified based on the information backed up by the main control device 162 (priority is given to the information backed up by the main control device 162).

(78) In the eighth to ninth embodiments, the ease of execution (execution probability) of the hold notice effect is different between the effect mode A and the effect mode B. The configuration may be such that the ease of execution is the same.

(79) In the eighth to ninth embodiments, the hold notice effect can be executed in the effect mode B in which the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed, but the hold notice effect is not executed in the effect mode B. May be good. That is, it is understood that the "effect state in which the specific notification is difficult to be executed" of the present invention includes not only the effect mode in which the execution probability of the hold notice effect is low, but also the effect mode in which the hold notice effect is not executed. Can be done.

(80) In the eighth embodiment, the effect mode is automatically switched without the player's operation, but the effect mode may be switched by the player's operation (manual). In this case, it is preferable that the effect mode switching operation is invalidated during the execution of the hold notice effect.

(81) In the eighth embodiment, the configuration is provided with two types of effect modes, the effect mode A and the effect mode B, as a plurality of types of effect states, but the configuration may include three or more types of effect modes. .. At that time, for example, in a configuration in which the effect mode A to the effect mode C are provided as three or more types of effect states, it becomes difficult to execute the hold notice effect in the order of effect mode A> effect mode B> effect mode C. In the effect mode, the ease of execution of the hold notice effect may be different from each other, or in the effect modes A to C, the ease of execution of the hold notice effect may be the same, or the effect may be the same. Mode A and effect mode C have the same ease of executing the hold notice effect, but effect mode B has the same ease of execution of the hold notice effect, such as difficulty in executing the hold notice effect. The configuration may be such that the effect modes having different ease of execution are mixed.

In addition, in the configuration in which the effect mode in which the hold notice effect is the same in the ease of execution and the effect mode in which the ease of execution is different are mixed, in the switching between the effect modes in which the ease of execution is the same. However, as in the case of switching between different production modes, the switching of the production modes may be restricted during the execution of the hold notice effect, or in the case of switching between the production modes having the same ease of execution, The configuration may be configured to allow switching of the effect mode even during the execution of the hold notice effect.

(82) In the eighth embodiment, when the switching lottery timing is reached (when affirmative determination is made in step S7101), the effect mode switching lottery (first mode switching lottery in step S7102) is executed, and the lottery is performed. In the case of winning in, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed, and if it is being executed, the effect mode switching process is not executed. However, when the switching lottery timing is reached (in step S7101). (When affirmative determination is made), it may be determined whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed, and if it is being executed, the mode switching may not be executed without performing the effect mode switching lottery.

(83) In the eighth embodiment, not only the switching from the effect mode A in which the hold notice effect is easily executed to the effect mode B in which the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed, but also the switch from the effect mode B to the effect mode A. Although the switching of the effect mode is restricted during the execution of the hold notice effect, the switch from the effect mode B to the effect mode A may be allowed even during the execution of the hold notice effect. ..

(84) In the eighth embodiment, in the case of switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A, the display mode of the target hold image HW on which the hold notice effect is executed is the predetermined display mode (green display mode). HMc) It is determined whether or not the display mode is the above, and based on the result, whether or not to allow the switching of the effect mode is determined. However, the case of switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B is used. Similarly, regardless of the display mode of the target hold image HW, switching of the effect mode may be restricted as long as the hold notice effect is being executed.

(85) In the eighth embodiment, in the case of switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, regardless of the display mode of the target hold image HW, if the hold notice effect is being executed, the effect mode is set. Although the configuration is such that switching is restricted, as in the case of switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A, whether or not the effect mode is allowed to be switched is sorted based on the display mode of the target hold image HW. May be good.

In the above case, the predetermined display mode that serves as a criterion (boundary) for whether or not to allow the switching of the effect mode may be a display mode having the same rank as the case of switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A, or the effect mode. The display mode may be different from that in the case of switching from B to the effect mode A. When different display modes are used, it is preferable to use a higher display mode than in the case of switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A.

(86) In the eighth embodiment, when switching from the effect mode B to the effect mode A is allowed during the execution of the hold notice effect, the display mode of the target hold image HW is maintained in the specific display mode. Although the effect mode can be switched as it is, the display mode of the target holding image HW may be changed to the normal display mode HMa as the effect mode is switched. In this case, the target holding image HW may be maintained in the normal display mode HMa until the game round of the target holding image HW is started or ended, or the target holding may be maintained as in the first to third embodiments. The configuration may be changed to a specific display mode before the game round of the image HW is started or ended.

(87) In the eighth embodiment, the switching of the effect mode may be restricted based on the result of the hold look-ahead processing. For example, when a predetermined result (for example, a jackpot result or a result of deviation beyond the SPSP reach effect) is pre-read by the hold look-ahead process, the switching of the effect mode may be restricted until the game round of the hold information is completed. ..

For example, when a jackpot result or an out-of-expectation result with a high degree of expectation such as SPSP reach effect is pre-read, a fanning effect (holding) such as a notice effect that arouses the player's expectation even before the game round of the reserved information is started. It is expected that an effect different from the hold notice effect using the image for use) will be performed. If the production mode is switched during the execution of the fanning effect, it may be difficult for the player to understand the fanning effect. At this time, regardless of whether or not the hold notice effect is being executed, if the configuration is such that the switching of the effect mode is restricted based on the result of the hold look-ahead process that triggers the hold notice effect, the fanning effect is produced. It is possible to preferably suppress the switching of the effect mode on the way. Further, since the effect mode switching can be restricted before the hold notice effect is executed, even if the effect mode switching timing and the hold notice effect start timing overlap, the effect mode switching and the hold notice effect are executed. Can be suppressed from being performed at the same time.

(88) In the eighth embodiment, when the effect mode switching condition is satisfied during the execution of the hold notice effect (when the effect mode switching timing is reached and the first mode switching lottery is won), the hold notice is given. The configuration allows switching of the effect mode when the pre-reading result of the hold image (hold information) on which the effect is executed is a jackpot result, but instead of or in addition to this, a predetermined deviation result (for example, for example) The configuration may be such that the switching of the effect mode is allowed when the pre-reading is performed (the result of deviation beyond the SPSP reach effect). That is, although the production mode cannot be switched in principle during the execution of the hold notice effect, when the effect mode is switched, it is suggested that the expectation of the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect is high. be able to.

It should be noted that the configuration that allows the effect mode switching exceptionally as described above is not indispensable, and in the eighth embodiment described above, the hold advance notice effect is being executed without referring to the result of the hold look-ahead process. It may be configured to determine whether or not to allow the switching of the effect mode based on whether or not or not and the type of the specific display mode at that time are used as judgment materials.

(89) In the eighth embodiment, the effect mode switching is allowed on condition that the second mode switching lottery is won, but the mode switching is allowed without going through such a lottery. May be. That is, if the effect mode switching condition is satisfied during the execution of the hold notice effect and the pre-reading result of the hold information is a big hit result, the effect mode switching may be permitted without fail.

(90) In the ninth embodiment, the effect mode is switched by the player's operation (manual), but the effect mode may be automatically switched without the player's operation. In such a configuration, for example, switching of the effect mode is preset based on the pre-reading of a predetermined result by the hold look-ahead process, and then the effect mode is automatically switched when the switching execution condition is satisfied. Things can be considered. As the switching execution condition, for example, it is conceivable that the game round of the hold information in which the predetermined result is pre-read is started, or the game round before the predetermined round is started with respect to the game round.

(91) In the ninth embodiment, the configuration is provided with two types of effect modes, the effect mode A and the effect mode B, as a plurality of types of effect states, but the configuration may include three or more types of effect modes. .. At that time, for example, in a configuration in which the effect mode A to the effect mode C are provided as three or more types of effect states, it becomes difficult to execute the hold notice effect in the order of effect mode A> effect mode B> effect mode C. In the effect mode, the ease of execution of the hold notice effect may be different from each other, or in the effect modes A to C, the ease of execution of the hold notice effect may be the same, or the effect may be the same. Mode A and effect mode C have the same ease of executing the hold notice effect, but effect mode B has the same ease of execution of the hold notice effect, such as difficulty in executing the hold notice effect. The configuration may be such that the effect modes having different ease of execution are mixed.

In addition, in the configuration in which the effect mode in which the hold notice effect is the same in the ease of execution and the effect mode in which the ease of execution is different are mixed, in the switching between the effect modes in which the ease of execution is the same. However, as in the case of switching between different production modes, the execution of the hold notice effect may be restricted while the effect mode is in the standby state, or the switch between the effect modes having the same ease of execution may be performed. In the case of, the configuration may allow the execution of the hold notice effect even in the standby state of switching the effect mode.

(92) In the ninth embodiment, the execution of the hold notice effect is uniformly restricted when the effect mode is switched in the standby state. It may be configured to restrict execution. For example, in the standby state of switching the effect mode, while allowing the execution of the hold notice effect in which the display mode of the hold image is the blue display mode HMb, the display mode of the hold image is set to the green display mode HMc or higher. The display mode may be configured so that the hold notice effect is not executed.

(93) In the ninth embodiment, regardless of the effect mode of the switching destination, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted when the effect mode is switched in the standby state. However, depending on the effect mode of the switch destination. The restriction mode may be different. For example, in the case of switching from the effect mode B in which the hold notice effect is difficult to be executed to the effect mode A in which the hold notice effect is easily executed, the execution of the hold notice effect is uniformly restricted in the standby state of the effect mode switching, while the execution of the hold notice effect is uniformly restricted. In the case of switching from the effect mode A to the effect mode B, the execution of the hold notice effect is allowed even in the standby state of the effect mode switching, or the specific display higher than the predetermined display mode (for example, the blue display mode HMb) is displayed. Although the execution of the hold notice effect as the mode is restricted, the execution of the hold notice effect as the specific display mode below the predetermined display mode may be permitted.

(94) In the ninth embodiment, the display mode of the target hold image HW after switching the effect mode is set when the standby state ends, but after the standby state ends (the effect mode changes). It may be configured to be set at a predetermined timing in the period until the game round of the target holding image HW starts or ends) after switching). When setting during the game round of the target hold image HW, the display mode may be set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process of the target hold image HW, or the game round of the target hold image HW. The display mode may be set based on the variable start command transmitted at the start.

(95) In the ninth embodiment, the execution of the hold notice effect is not restricted for the hold information acquired before the display of the switching guide image 451. However, the execution of the hold notice effect may be restricted. good. That is, the configuration may be such that the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted not only during the standby state but also before the transition to the standby state.

Specifically, when the switching guide image 451 is displayed during the execution of the hold notice effect, the hold notice effect is executed at a predetermined timing in the period from the display of the switching guide image 451 until the effect mode is switched. It is conceivable that the display mode of the target holding image is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa. As specific change timings from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, the display timing of the switching guide image 451, the transition timing to the standby state, the switching timing of the effect mode, and the like are assumed.

(96) In the ninth embodiment, the execution of the hold notice effect is not restricted for the hold information acquired after the switching guide image 451 is displayed and before the transition to the standby state. It may be configured to restrict execution.

In this case, based on the fact that the switching guide image 451 is displayed (shifting to the switching guide state), the execution restriction of the hold notice effect may be started prior to the transition to the standby state. That is, after the switching guide image 451 is displayed, the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information acquired before the transition to the standby state may not be executed before the transition to the standby state or in the standby state.

Further, although the hold notice effect is temporarily executed before the transition to the standby state, the execution of the hold notice effect may be canceled when the transition to the standby state occurs. Specifically, after the switching guide image 451 is displayed, the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information acquired before the transition to the standby state is executed before the transition to the standby state, and then the hold notice effect is executed. The display mode of the target holding image may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa. As a specific change timing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, a transition timing to the standby state, a switching timing of the effect mode, and the like can be considered.

(97) In the ninth embodiment described above, the hold look-ahead process is executed when the hold information is acquired during the wait state, and based on the result of the hold look-ahead process performed during the wait state after the end of the wait state. The display mode of the target hold image HW is set, but the hold look-ahead process for the hold information acquired during the wait state is executed after the wait state, and based on the result, the target hold after the wait state is executed. It may be configured to set the display mode of the image HW. At this time, the hold look-ahead process may be performed by the main control device 162 or the effect control device 143. Further, the hold look-ahead process when the hold information is acquired during the standby state may not be executed, or may be configured to be executed.

(98) In the ninth embodiment, the configuration according to the eighth embodiment may be applied to limit the transition to the switching guidance state during the execution of the hold notice effect. Specifically, during the execution of the hold notice effect, the lottery is not performed even at the execution timing of the switching guidance lottery, or even if the lottery is won, the switching guidance image 451 is displayed and the guidance notification flag is displayed. It may be configured not to set, or it may be configured not to determine whether or not it is the execution timing of the switching guide lottery.

(99) Another type of pachinko machine different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the gaming machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

In addition, the invention described in each of the following features states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity and the lottery result becomes a specific result, the game is played. Regarding the background technology that "a person is known to give a predetermined privilege to a person (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)" There is still room for improvement. ”The invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined information, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation is performed.
A hold notification means (holding notification means) that performs a hold notification (holding image) by a notification means different from the predetermined notification means or the predetermined notification means so that the player can recognize at least the number of held games before execution. (Function to execute hold command correspondence processing in the effect control device 143) and
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. A destination-identifying means for executing a destination-identifying process specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a hold look-ahead process by the main control device 162 in the first to fourth embodiments and the sixth to seventh embodiments, the first 5), the function of executing the hold command setting process by the main control device 162 and the first hold look-ahead process by the effect control device 143).
Specific mode means (first to seventh) capable of setting the notification mode of the hold notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the prior identification process. In the embodiment, the effect control device 143 executes the setting process for the hold notice and the first execution process of the hold notice).
With
In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
When a predetermined event occurs in a state where the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode (when the effect mode is switched in the first to third embodiments, in the fourth to fifth embodiments). When the open / close execution mode is performed, when the power failure state occurs in the sixth to seventh embodiments), the specific mode or the hold notification is not executed at least for the hold notification which is the specific mode. It is configured to be in a specific state (in the first to third embodiments, the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode HMa by switching the effect mode, the fourth to fifth embodiments. In the embodiment, the hold image is hidden by executing the open / close execution mode, and in the sixth to seventh embodiments, the hold image disappears due to the occurrence of a power failure state).
After the end of the specific state, the player can recognize that the notification mode of the hold notification that is the target of the specific state is the same as the notification mode before the predetermined event occurs. A predetermined second aspect (upper) that allows the player to recognize that it is higher than the mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) or the notification mode before the predetermined event occurs. Specific means that can be used as a specific display mode (specific display mode, etc.) (setting process for returning the notice by the effect control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, the second execution process of the hold notice, the third of the hold notice). A function for executing an execution process, a function for returning a hold notice by the effect control device 143 in the sixth embodiment, a function for executing a fourth execution process for the hold notice, and an effect control device in the seventh embodiment. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a display mode setting process according to 143).

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the hold notification is set as a specific mode based on the result of the so-called hold look-ahead, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that the grant response result will be obtained even before the start of the game round. can. Furthermore, since a plurality of types of modes are set so that the expected degree of the granting response result is different as a specific mode, it is possible to give a magnitude to the expected degree and suggest it, in order to arouse the player's sense of expectation. It can be an advantageous configuration. In such a configuration, when a predetermined event occurs in a situation where the hold notification is set to a specific mode, the state shifts to a specific state in which the specific mode or hold notification is not executed. In this case, there is a concern that the player may be misunderstood or anxious that the expectation level suggested by the specific mode has disappeared due to the non-execution of the specific mode or the like. In this regard, in this configuration, after the end of the specific state, the hold notification is performed as the first mode having the same rank as the notification mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event or the second mode higher than that, so that the expectation level is renewed. It can be suggested, and it becomes possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the result will be a grant response.

Feature A2. Information corresponding to at least the specific mode of the hold notification is stored in a predetermined storage unit (recovery area 344f of the RAM 344).
When the notification mode of the hold notification that is the target of the specific state is the predetermined first mode, the specific means is referred to the predetermined first mode based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit. (A function of executing the setting process for returning the advance notice in the effect control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, and a function of executing the setting process of the display mode in the sixth embodiment). The gaming machine according to the feature A1.

In the above configuration, the information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and after the end of the specific state, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. As a result, after the end of the specific state, it is possible to suitably return the notification mode of the hold notification to the mode of the same rank as before the specific state (before the occurrence of the predetermined event).

Feature A3. It is provided with an execution notification unit (execution display area D) for performing predetermined notification (display of a hold image on the execution display area D) so that the player can recognize the execution of the reserved game times.
In the game round of special information corresponding to the hold notification that is the target of the specific state, the specific means sets the mode of the predetermined notification performed by the execution notification unit to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined mode. Specific means that can be the second aspect (a function of executing the third execution process of the hold notice by the effect control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, in the sixth to seventh embodiments. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, which comprises a function of executing a fourth execution process of a hold notice by the effect control device 143).

In the above configuration, after the end of the specific state, when the process of the first mode having the same rank as the notification mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event or the second mode higher than the notification mode is performed, the target of the specific state is obtained. Up to the game times of the hold notification can be included in the implementation period. As a result, it is possible to secure a long processing period for returning the notification mode to the same-class mode or the like. However, the return process can be performed by using the execution period of the game times after the end of the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suggest the degree of expectation after the end of the specific state.

Feature A4. When the game round is executed, the game round is based on the special information (holding information) that is the target of the grant determination that triggered the game round or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. It is equipped with a game rotation effect setting means (a function of executing a special figure variation display process in the effect control device 143) for setting a game rotation effect (reach effect, etc.) to be performed.
When the notification mode of the predetermined notification is the predetermined second mode, the specific means has the special information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means or the predetermined second mode based on the specific information. (The function of executing the third execution process of the hold notice by the effect control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, and the fourth execution process of the hold notice in the sixth to seventh embodiments. The gaming machine according to feature A3, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

For example, if only the notification mode is returned to the apposition mode after the end of the specific state, it is not possible to suggest a degree of expectation higher than that suggested before the occurrence of the predetermined event. On the other hand, if the notification mode is unnecessarily set to a higher level, it will not be consistent with the game rotation effect actually performed in the game times, and there is a risk that the trust of the player will be impaired. In this regard, in this configuration, the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the holding notification is based on the special information or the specific information used for setting the game rotation effect in the game time of the holding notification that is the target of the specific state. Is promoted to a higher aspect than before the occurrence of a predetermined event. As a result, it is possible to promote the notification mode of the predetermined notification while suppressing the notification mode of the predetermined notification from becoming inconsistent with the game rotation effect actually performed in the game times.

Feature A5. The specifying means is a determining means for determining whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is the predetermined second mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means. (A function of executing the third execution process of the hold notice by the effect control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, and a function of executing the fourth execution process of the hold notice in the sixth to seventh embodiments) The gaming machine according to the feature A4, wherein the notification mode of the predetermined notification is the predetermined second mode when the determination means determines that the predetermined second mode is used.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to use the higher mode based on the special information or specific information used for setting the game rotation effect, and when the determination allows promotion to the higher mode, the promotion process is performed. Will be done. As a result, after the end of the specific state, it is possible to promote the notification mode of the predetermined notification within a range that does not exceed the expected degree of the game rotation effect that is actually performed.

Feature A6. The specific means includes means for changing the notification mode of the hold notification that is the target of the specific state to the predetermined first mode and then to the predetermined second mode after the end of the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A5.

When the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a higher mode than the original mode after the end of the specific state, if it is suddenly set to a higher mode, the specific mode that was performed before the occurrence of the predetermined event from the viewpoint of the player. It is difficult to understand the correspondence with and may cause confusion. In this respect, in this configuration, since the notification mode is once changed to the higher notification mode, it can be easily understood that the notification mode has been restored, and the above confusion can be suppressed.

Feature A7. When the notification mode of the hold notification is set to the specific mode, the specific mode means sets the notification scenario (effect scenario) for setting the notification mode of the hold notification to the specific mode. The first scenario setting means (effect control). A function to execute the setting process for the hold notice in the device 143) is provided.
When the specific means sets the notification mode of the hold notification that is the target of the specific state to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode after the end of the specific state, the hold notification A function of executing a second scenario setting means (function for executing a setting process for advance notice return in the effect control device 143) for setting a notification scenario (return scenario) for setting the notification mode to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode. ), The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A6.

For example, in a configuration in which a game can be played in a specific state, since the game times are digested during the specific state, the execution period (remaining) after the specific state in the hold notification, which is a specific mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event. Period) is expected to fluctuate depending on the length of stay in a specific state. In this regard, in this configuration, apart from the notification scenario set before the occurrence of the predetermined event, the notification scenario for setting the hold notification that is the target of the specific state to the same rank mode after the end of the specific state. Is reset, so that the notification mode of the hold notification can be preferably changed to a mode of the same rank even when the remaining period of the hold notification after the specific state fluctuates.

Feature A8. After the end of the specific state, the hold number grasping means (process of step S2103) for grasping the hold number of the game times before or before the special information corresponding to the hold notification that is the target of the specific state is executed. Function)
The second scenario setting means is characterized in that a notification scenario for setting the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode is set based on the number of holds grasped by the hold number grasping means. The gaming machine described in A7.

In the above configuration, when the specific state ends, the notification scenario is reset to grasp the number of holds and take the result into consideration to make the mode of the same rank, etc., so regardless of the length of stay in the specific state, The notification mode of the hold notification can be suitably changed to a mode of the same rank or the like.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein the specific state is at least a specific mode for holding notification, wherein the notification mode is the normal mode.

Misunderstanding that when the notification mode of the hold notification is changed (downgraded) from the specific mode to the normal mode with the transition to the specific state, the degree of expectation suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event has disappeared. It becomes easier to give the player anxiety. By applying any of the above-mentioned features A1 to A8 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, when the hold notification is set to the normal mode in the specific state, it is necessary to change (upgrade) the mode from the normal mode to the mode of the same rank after the end of the specific state. By applying to, even if the remaining period of the hold notification after the specific state fluctuates, it is possible to preferably change from the normal mode to the same-class mode or the like.

Feature A10. With respect to the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state, a means for restricting the execution of the specific mode in the specific state (holding triggered by the hold information acquired in the effect mode B). The gaming machine according to feature A9, which is characterized by having a function of restricting the execution of a notice effect).

For example, it is specified that the notification mode of the hold notification, which has been regarded as a specific mode, is changed to the normal mode in the specific state, while the special information acquired during the specific state is changed to the specific mode. Since it is necessary to distinguish between the special information acquired before the state and the special information acquired during the specific state, there is a concern that the processing will be complicated. In addition, even though there is a hold notification that has been changed from a specific mode to a normal mode, if the hold notification of special information acquired after that exists as a specific mode, the normal mode in the previous hold notification is used. There is also a risk of further aggravating anxiety that expectations for the change to the mode have disappeared. In this regard, in this configuration, since the change to the specific mode is restricted in the specific state for the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired in the specific state, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. It will be possible.

Feature A11. With respect to the hold notification whose execution of the specific mode is restricted, a means for causing the process by the specific mode means to be performed after the end of the specific state (the second setting process for the hold notice in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature A10, which is characterized by having a function to execute).

As described in the effect of the above feature A10, by restricting the change to the specific mode for the special information acquired during the specific state, the degree of expectation for the change to the normal mode in the previous hold notification disappears. It is possible to suppress the anxiety that it may have been done. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that the opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation for the special information acquired during the specific state will be lost. In this respect, in the above configuration, since it is permissible to change the hold notification that imposes such a restriction to a specific mode after the end of the specific state, it is possible to secure an opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein the specific state is such that the hold notification is not executed at least for the hold notification in a specific mode.

If the notification mode of the hold notification is not executed due to the transition to the specific state, the player is given a misunderstanding or anxiety that the expectation level suggested by the specific mode has disappeared before the occurrence of the predetermined event. It will be easier. By applying any of the above-mentioned features A1 to A8 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature A13. After the specific state ends, the hold notification that is the target of the specific state is configured to be executed in the normal mode.
The specific means is a means for changing the notification mode of the hold notification, which is the normal mode, to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode (setting for advance notice return in the effect control device 143). The gaming machine according to feature A12, which is characterized by having a function of executing processing).

It is suggested by the specific mode that the hold notification is restarted in the normal mode after the notification mode of the hold notification is not executed due to the transition to the specific state, before the occurrence of the predetermined event. There is a risk of further aggravating anxiety that the degree of expectation may have disappeared. By applying any of the above-mentioned features A1 to A8 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

In the case of a configuration in which the hold notification is not executed in the specific state and the hold notification is restored in the normal mode after the end of the specific state, the normal mode is changed to the same mode after the end of the specific state. A process of changing (upgrading) is required, but by applying this feature to feature A7 or feature A8, even if the remaining period of the hold notification after a specific state fluctuates, the normal mode is changed to the same rank mode, etc. The changes can be preferably made.

In addition, this feature is "the specific means, after the end of the specific state, after the hold notification that is the target of the specific state is executed in the normal mode, the predetermined first mode or the predetermined mode. It is also possible to express that the means for changing to the second aspect (the function of executing the setting process for returning the advance notice in the effect control device 143) is provided. "

Feature A14. Specific effect means (function for executing the processes of steps S1603 to S1605) for executing a specific effect (change suggestion effect) suggesting that the notification mode of the hold notification changes to a higher notification mode, and
After the end of the specific state, when the notification mode of the hold notification that is the target of the specific state is the predetermined first mode, the means for restricting the execution of the specific effect (change suggestion effect). A function that restricts execution) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A13.

In the above configuration, it is suggested that the notification mode of the hold notification changes to the higher notification mode due to the specific effect, so that the expectation that the notification mode changes to the higher mode is aroused, and the player to the hold notification. It is possible to raise the degree of attention of. In such a configuration, for example, if a specific effect is performed when the mode is the same after the end of the specific state, the player will memorize the notification mode (although the mode is actually the same). It is assumed that a higher-level notification mode is associated with the mode (a mode before the occurrence of a predetermined event) as a reference. In this case, since the actual notification mode does not match the mode associated with the player, the player's trust in the specific effect may be impaired. In this respect, in this configuration, when the mode is of the same rank after the end of the specific state, the execution of the specific effect is restricted, so that the player is prevented from associating a mode higher than the actual notification mode. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconvenience.

For each configuration of the above features A1 to A14, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined information, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
In the specific notification means (effect control device 143), the specific notification (hold notice effect) is performed by the predetermined notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp unit) based on the predetermined execution trigger (pre-reading result). (Function to execute pending command correspondence processing) and
With
The specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to any one of a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe). The setting means (a function of executing the setting process for the hold notice and the first execution process of the hold notice in the effect control device 143) is provided, and the specific notification is executed based on the setting result of the first notification mode setting means. Is configured to
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a predetermined operation is performed by the effect operation unit 36), one of a plurality of types of effect states (effect mode A, effect mode B) including the predetermined effect state is one of the effect states. The effect state transition means (function for executing the effect mode switching process in the effect control device 143) and the effect state transition means (function for executing the effect mode switching process in the effect control device 143).
When the specific notification (holding notice effect by the hold image HW) is executed, the predetermined effect state is changed to another effect state, and then the predetermined effect state is changed, the specific notification is specified in the later predetermined effect state. A second notification mode setting means for setting the notification mode of the notification based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the predetermined effect state (a function of executing the setting process for returning the advance notice by the effect control device 143 in the first embodiment). )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, a plurality of types of effect states are provided, and when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the effect state is switched. As a result, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and the tiredness of the game can be suppressed. In such a configuration, for example, when the execution of the specific notification is canceled when the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification, the chance of being notified or suggested by the specific notification disappears. There is a concern that it may cause misunderstandings and anxieties to the players. In such a case, it is conceivable to limit the switching of the effect state during the execution of the specific notification, but this may lead to a situation in which the frequency of switching the effect state decreases, and the significance of providing a plurality of types of effect states may be impaired. be.

In this respect, in this feature, when the predetermined effect state is changed to another effect state during the execution of the specific effect state and then the predetermined effect state is changed, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined effect state is set first. Since the setting is based on the notification mode in the predetermined production state, the specific notification can be returned to the original notification mode by returning the effect state to the original state. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the chance has not disappeared, and it is possible to execute the specific notification without causing restrictions on the switching of the effect state. That is, it is possible to preferably achieve both the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state.

Feature B2. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the operation of the game rotation is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be capable of executing the specific notification across game times.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, an event in which the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. By applying the configuration of the feature B1 to such a configuration, the feature can be effectively functioned and the above effect can be suitably exhibited.

It should be noted that the present characteristic may include the feature that "the effect state transition means includes means for switching the effect state in accordance with the execution of the game times". In a configuration in which the production state is switched according to the division of the game times while the specific notification is performed across the game times, an event in which the production state is switched during the execution of the specific notification is particularly likely to occur. Can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature B3. The information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (recovery area 344f of the RAM 344).
The second notification mode setting means according to the feature B1 or the feature B2, characterized in that the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined effect state is set based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit. Amusement machine.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and when the state shifts to the predetermined effect state later, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. As a result, the specific notification in the later predetermined effect state can be suitably restored to the original notification mode that was executed in the previous predetermined effect state.

Feature B4. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game turn operation to be performed,
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. Pre-identifying means (a function of executing the hold pre-reading process in the main control device 162) for executing the pre-identifying process to be specified at the previous timing, and
With
Based on the result of the prior identification process, the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification before the special information targeted for the prior identification process is subject to the grant determination. ,
The specific notification means shifts from the previous predetermined production state to the other production state during execution of the specific notification triggered by the specific special information (hold information of the target hold image HW), and then the specific notification means. If the specific information shifts to a predetermined effect state after the end of the game round of the special information or before the specific special information becomes the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means, the specific effect state in the later predetermined effect state. Equipped with specific means for executing specific notification in response to special information (a function for executing a setting process for returning a notice in the effect control device 143, a second execution process for a hold notice, and a third execution process for a hold notice). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is executed based on the result of the so-called hold look-ahead, the grant determination is performed by suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the grant determination will be the grant correspondence result depending on the notification mode of the specific notification. It is possible to preferably arouse the player's expectation that the result will be given in advance. In such a case, if the execution of the specific notification is canceled as the effect state is switched as described above, the player may be misunderstood that the grant response result has disappeared or the degree of expectation thereof has decreased. There is a concern to give.

In this regard, according to this configuration, when the original production state is returned before the game round of the special information that triggered the specific notification is completed or before the special information is subject to the grant determination, the original notification is made. The notification mode of the specific notification is set according to the mode. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the grant response result has not disappeared, and the degree of expectation for the special information before the grant determination result for the special information that triggered the specific notification is notified. Can be suggested again. Therefore, the above concerns can be appropriately dealt with, and the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state can be suitably compatible with each other.

Feature B5. The second notification mode setting means of the specific notification in the later predetermined production state based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined production state regardless of the result of the prior identification processing in the previous predetermined production state. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the notification mode is set.

For example, if the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined effect state is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead performed in the previous predetermined effect state, the notification of the specific notification in the previous predetermined effect state is set. It is assumed that a mode different from the mode is set. Further, in the configuration in which the notification mode of the specific notification is gradually changed (ranked up), even if the same look-ahead result is obtained, the notification mode of the specific notification at the time of switching may differ depending on the switching timing of the effect state. If the notification mode in the later predetermined effect state is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead, it becomes easy to set a mode different from the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined effect state.

In this respect, in this configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined effect state is specified when the effect state is switched to another effect state, not the result of the hold look-ahead performed in the previous predetermined effect state. Since the setting is based on the notification mode of the notification, when the effect state returns to the original state, the notification mode can be set to the same as the specific notification actually notified. As a result, the notification mode in the previous predetermined production state and the notification mode in the subsequent predetermined production state can be suitably matched, and it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the notification mode has been restored. become.

Feature B6. The specific notification means is
When performing a specific notification triggered by the specific special information in the predetermined production state, the first scenario setting means (for holding notice) for setting a notification scenario (effect scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification. Function to execute the setting process of) and
When the specific notification is performed in correspondence with the specific special information in the later predetermined production state, the second scenario setting means (return to the notice) for resetting the notification scenario (return scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification. Function to execute the setting process for) and
The gaming machine according to feature B4 or feature B5, characterized in that

When the specific notification is performed in the later predetermined production state, the game round of the special information corresponding to the specific notification starts or starts after switching to the later predetermined production state depending on the length of the stay period in the other production state. It is assumed that the period until the end, that is, the period during which the specific notification can be executed varies. In this regard, in this configuration, when the specific notification is performed later in the predetermined production state, the notification scenario for changing the notification mode is reset, so that the notification mode of the specific notification is the original even if the above period fluctuates. It can be changed to suit the mode.

Feature B7. When the state shifts to the predetermined effect state after that, it is provided with a hold number grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S2103) for grasping the hold number of the game times before or before the specific special information.
The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the second scenario setting means resets the notification scenario based on the number of holds grasped by the hold number grasping means.

In the above configuration, when the device is switched to the predetermined production state later, the number of hold states is grasped, and the notification scenario of the specific notification is reset in consideration of the result. Therefore, regardless of the length of stay in the other production states, the notification scenario is reset. The notification mode of the specific notification can be preferably changed to the original mode.

Feature B8. When the state shifts from the predetermined effect state to the other effect state during execution of the specific notification, a means for restricting the continuation of the specific notification (a function of setting the display mode of the hold image HW to the normal display mode HMa) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7.

In the above configuration, the continuation of the specific notification that has been executed up to that point is restricted (regulated) as the production state is switched, so that it is easy to give the player a misunderstanding that the chance has disappeared. By applying any of the above-mentioned features B1 to B7 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the predetermined effect state is an effect state in which the easiness of executing the specific notification is different from that of the other effect states.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease with which the specific notification is executed differs depending on the production state, if the production state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification may differ before and after the switching of the production state. There is a risk of inviting. In this case, it is possible to suppress such inconsistency in the degree of expectation or the like by canceling the execution of the specific notification when the effect state is switched. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that the player may be misunderstood or anxious that the chance suggested by the specific notification has disappeared. By applying any of the above-mentioned features B1 to B8 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, in the present feature, "the predetermined effect state is an effect state in which the ease of executing the specific notification is different from that of the other effect state", it is set as a state in which the other effect state can execute the specific notification. It can be understood that not only the configuration to be set but also the configuration in which another effect state is set as a state in which the specific notification is not executed is included.

Feature B10. The plurality of types of notification modes in the specific notification are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different.
The second notification mode setting means allows the player to recognize that the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined production state is the same as the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined production state. Features B1 to B9 characterized in that it includes a first means (setting process for returning to advance notice in the effect control device 143) for setting one mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.). The gaming machine described in any of.

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined production state is set to a mode in which the player can recognize that the notification mode is the same as the notification mode in the previous predetermined production state, the specific notification is restored. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that it has been done.

Feature B11. After setting the notification mode of the specific notification to the predetermined first aspect in the later predetermined production state, the second notification mode setting means is higher than the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined production state. The feature B10 is provided with a second means (setting process for returning to advance notice in the effect control device 143) for setting a predetermined second mode (higher-level specific display mode, etc.) that can be recognized by the player. The gaming machine described in.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined production state can be set to a higher notification mode than the notification mode in the previous predetermined production state, so that the notification mode in the later predetermined production state is the first. It is possible to prevent the range of the suggestable degree of expectation and the like from being narrowed by being limited to the notification mode in the predetermined effect state. At that time, if the notification mode is suddenly set to a higher level, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence relationship with the notification mode that was performed in the predetermined predetermined production state, and the production may be difficult to understand. In this respect, in this configuration, since the notification mode is once changed to the higher notification mode, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the notification mode has been restored, and it is possible to suppress the confusion of the player.

Feature B12. Specific effect means (function for executing the processes of steps S1603 to S1605) for executing a specific effect (change suggestion effect) suggesting that the notification mode of the specific notification changes to a higher notification mode, and
When the notification mode of the specific notification is set to the predetermined first mode in the subsequent predetermined effect state, the means for restricting the execution of the specific effect (function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion effect). When,
The gaming machine according to the feature B10 or the feature B11.

In the above configuration, it is suggested that the notification mode of the specific notification is changed to the higher notification mode by the specific effect, so that the expectation that the specific notification is changed to the higher notification mode is aroused, and the player's attention to the specific notification is generated. The degree can be increased. In such a configuration, for example, when a specific effect is performed when the notification mode of the specific notification is set to the mode of the same rank, the player remembers the destination even though the mode is actually the same. It is assumed that a higher-level notification mode is associated with the notification mode in a predetermined production state as a reference. In this case, since the actual notification mode does not match the mode associated with the player, the player's trust in the specific effect may be impaired. In this respect, in this configuration, even if it corresponds to a change to a higher notification mode, if it is only returned to the notification mode in the predetermined predetermined effect state, the execution of the specific effect is restricted, so that it is actually It is possible to prevent the player from associating a mode higher than the notification mode, and it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature B13. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game turn operation to be performed,
A hold notification means (a function of executing hold command correspondence processing in the effect control device 143) that performs hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold of the game times before execution.
With
The specific notification is described in any one of features B1 to B12, characterized in that the notification mode of the holding notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). Amusement machine.

When the specific notification is performed using the hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and an event in which the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the target such as the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification is, it is assumed that the effect when the execution of the specific notification is canceled due to the switching of the production state is large. NS. By applying any of the above-mentioned features B1 to B12 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature B14. When the state in which the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the specific special information (hold information of the hold image HW) is set as the specific mode and the state shifts from the predetermined effect state to the other effect state, the specific special The feature B13 is characterized in that it includes means for setting the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the information to the normal mode (a function of setting the display mode of the hold image HW to the normal display mode HMa). Game machine.

In the above configuration, the hold notification, which had been a specific mode until then, is changed to the normal mode as the production state is switched, so that the player is likely to receive the impression of being downgraded and the degree of expectation is lowered. It is easy to misunderstand. By applying any of the above-mentioned features B1 to B12 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

For each configuration of the above features B1 to B14, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined information, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game rotation operation is performed.
A notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp) different from the predetermined notification means or the predetermined notification means is provided so that the player can recognize at least the number of held games before execution. (Part), the hold notification means (function to execute the hold command correspondence process in the effect control device 143), and
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. Pre-identifying means (a function of executing the hold pre-reading process in the main control device 162) for executing the pre-identifying process to be specified at the previous timing, and
A specific mode means capable of executing a specific mode process in which the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the prior identification process (specific mode means). In the second embodiment, the function of executing the setting process for the hold notice and the first execution process of the hold notice in the effect control device 143) and
With
When a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied (when the effect mode A is switched to the effect mode B), the mode is configured to shift to the restricted state in which the execution of the specific mode or the hold notification is restricted. ,
Regarding the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state, the setting means for setting the notification mode after the restricted state based on the result of the destination identification process executed during the restricted state (the first). A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second embodiment, a function of executing a second setting process for holding notice by the effect control device 143) is provided.

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the hold notification is set as a specific mode based on the result of the so-called hold look-ahead, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that the grant response result will be obtained even before the start of the game round. can. Under such a configuration, a restricted state may be provided to limit the execution of the specific mode or the hold notification for the hold notification that has already been set as the specific mode. However, if new special information is acquired in the restricted state, the player expects the special information acquired during the restricted state, assuming that such special information is not changed to a specific mode. There is a concern that it will not be possible to arouse the feeling.

In this regard, according to this configuration, since the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to a specific mode after the end of the restricted state, it was acquired during the restricted state. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation about special information. At that time, since the change to the specific mode after the restricted state is performed based on the result of the pre-identification process (hold look-ahead process) executed during the restricted state, the pre-identification process is performed in the same manner as in the non-restricted state. be able to. That is, since it is not necessary to change the configuration of the pre-specific processing, the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state is changed after the restricted state while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated. Will be possible.

Feature C2. The pre-identification means is characterized in that the pre-identification process for the acquired special information is performed at the timing of acquisition of the special information regardless of whether or not it is in the restricted state. Features The gaming machine according to C1.

According to the above configuration, the advance identification process can be performed according to the acquisition timing of the special information in both the restricted state and the non-restricted state. Therefore, the advance identification process is performed in the former case and the latter case. There is no need to distinguish between processes. Therefore, it is possible to change the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the setting means executes the setting when the restricted state ends or after the restricted state ends.

For example, if the notification mode after the restricted state is set based on the result of the destination identification process executed during the restricted state, and the setting is made during the restricted state, it corresponds to the hold notification for which the notification mode is set. If the game times of the special information to be played are executed in the restricted state, the hold notification may end without reflecting the setting of the notification mode, and the setting may be wasted. In this respect, in this configuration, since the notification mode is set at the end of the restricted state or after the end, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such waste and perform efficient processing.

Feature C4. The restricted state limits the execution of the particular aspect.
Regarding the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state, a predetermined mode (black display mode) in which the notification mode in the restricted state is different from the normal mode or any of the normal mode and the specific mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, which comprises means (a function of forcibly setting the display mode of the holding images HB1 and HB2 to the normal display mode HMa or the black display mode).

In the above configuration, in the restricted state in which the execution of the specific mode is restricted, the hold notification is performed in the normal mode, or in a predetermined mode different from both the normal mode and the specific mode, so that the player can recognize the number of hold times of the game. In this way, the specific mode can be non-executed. By applying any of the above-mentioned features C1 to C3 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature C5. When the special information is acquired during the restricted state, the predetermined information (the generation is suspended during the restricted period) so that it can be grasped after the restricted state that the special information was acquired during the restricted state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the information) can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344).

According to the above configuration, even if the special information acquired before the restricted state and the special information acquired during the restricted state are mixed after the end of the restricted state, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit is stored. It is possible to identify the special information acquired during the restricted state based on the information of. As a result, in the setting means related to the feature C1, the special information acquired during the restricted state and the special information not otherwise can be identified, and processing is performed only for the special information acquired during the restricted state. It will be possible.

Feature C6. As the effect state, a plurality of effect states including the first effect state (effect mode A) and the second effect state (effect mode B) are set.
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a predetermined operation is performed by the effect operation unit 36), an effect state transition means (effect) for shifting from one effect state among a plurality of types of effect states to another effect state. It is equipped with a function to execute the effect mode switching process in the control device 143).
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, which is configured to shift to the restricted state when the first effect state shifts to the second effect state.

In the above configuration, the state shifts to the restricted state as the effect state is switched. In this case, since it is considered that the player plays the game in the effect state after the switching, it is assumed that the special information is acquired during the restricted state. By applying any of the above-mentioned features C1 to C5 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the second effect state is an effect state in which the ease of execution of the specific mode processing is different from that of the first effect state.

In the case of a configuration in which the susceptibility to change to a specific mode differs depending on the effect state, if the effect state is switched while the specific mode is maintained, the degree of expectation suggested by the specific mode may not match before and after the switching. In this case, such inconsistency in expectation can be suppressed by limiting the execution of the specific mode or the hold notification with the transition from the first effect state to the second effect state. However, even if the above restriction is applied to the hold notification which was a specific mode before the transition to the second effect state, a new hold is performed by acquiring special information in the second effect state. There is concern about how notifications should be handled. By applying any of the above-mentioned features C1 to C6 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, in the present feature, "the second effect state is an effect state in which the ease of executing the specific mode processing is different from that of the first effect state" includes both the first effect state and the second effect state. The specific notification can be executed not only when the execution frequency (execution probability) of the specific notification is different in each of these production states, but also when the specific notification is performed in one of the first production state and the second production state. It can be understood that the configuration that is not executed is also included.

Feature C8. The gaming machine according to feature C6 or feature C7, wherein the restricted state is configured to end when the second effect state ends.

In the above configuration, since the restricted state is released when the second effect state ends, the hold notification of the special information acquired during the second effect state is a specific mode or the hold notification during the second effect state. The execution of the above can be restricted, and then the specific mode can be set according to the end of the second effect state.

Feature C9. An execution notification unit (execution display area) in which a predetermined notification (displaying a hold image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the hold notification is performed so that the player can recognize the execution of the held game times. With D)
When the game of the special information acquired during the restricted state is performed during the restricted state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification that corresponds to the special information and is performed by the execution notification unit is It is characterized in that it is provided with means (function of executing the process of steps S2901 to S2903) for setting a specific mode different from the normal mode based on the result of the prior identification process performed during the restricted state. Features The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C8.

According to the above configuration, with respect to the hold notification for which the change of the notification mode is restricted due to the transition to the restricted state, the change to the specific mode is permitted as the game progresses to the game times of the hold notification. Therefore, even when the game times of the special information acquired during the restricted state are executed during the restricted state, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the special information.

For each configuration of the above features C1 to C9, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined information, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is used to end the game rotation operation. As one time, a game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game turn operation is performed, and
A notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp) different from the predetermined notification means or the predetermined notification means is provided so that the player can recognize at least the number of held games before execution. (Part), the hold notification means (function to execute the hold command correspondence process in the effect control device 143), and
Based on a predetermined execution trigger (pre-reading result), it is possible to execute a specific mode process in which the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). Aspect means (a function of executing the setting process for the hold notice and the first execution process of the hold notice in the effect control device 143) and
With
In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
A plurality of types of states are set, including a first state (effect mode A) and a second state (effect mode B) in which the ease of executing the specific mode processing is different from that of the first state.
When the specific mode processing is executed in the first state and the notification mode of the hold notification is set to any one of a plurality of types and then shifts to the second state, the notification mode of the hold notification is set. Mode determination for determining whether or not the notification mode in the first state is set to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that can be recognized by the player as having the same rank. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means (a function of executing a process for switching an effect mode by the effect control device 143 in the third embodiment).

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the hold notification is set as a specific mode, and a plurality of types of modes are set in the specific mode so that the degree of expectation for the grant response result is different. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by setting the hold notification to any specific mode, and it is possible to preferably arouse the player's expectation that the result will be a grant response. Further, in this configuration, a plurality of types of states including a first state and a second state in which the easiness of change to a specific mode is different from that of the first state are set. Since switching between these states is performed, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and the tiredness of the game can be suppressed.

Under such a configuration, when the state shifts from the first state to the second state in the situation where the hold notification of the specific mode is performed, if the specific mode is maintained, the corresponding expectation is second depending on the type. It will be far from the state before the transition to the state, which may lead to misunderstanding of the player. In this regard, in this configuration, when such a transition occurs, it is recognized that the notification mode of the hold notification is the same as the notification mode in the first state after the transition to the second state. It is determined whether or not the mode is possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistency in the degree of expectation, and it is possible to preferably perform the hold notification after the transition to the second state.

In the "second state in which the ease of executing the specific mode processing is different from that of the first state" in this feature, the second state is set as a state in which a change to the specific mode of the hold notification can be executed. It can be understood that not only the configuration to be performed but also the configuration in which the second state is set as the state in which the change to the specific mode of the hold notification is not executed is included.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is less likely to be executed than the first state.

In the above configuration, in the second state, the holding notification is less likely to be a specific mode than in the first state. Therefore, the degree of expectation for the grant response result when the notification mode of the holding notification is changed to the specific mode. It is assumed that the second state is higher than the first state. In this case, the transition from the first state to the second state is a transition from a state in which the degree of expectation for the grant response result for the specific mode is low to a state in which the expectation is high. By applying the configuration of, it is possible to suppress the inconsistency of the expectation degree and preferably perform the hold notification after the transition to the second state.

In the present feature, "the second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is less likely to be executed than the first state", the probability that the hold notification is set to the specific mode in the second state is the first. In addition to the configuration set to be lower than that of the state, it can be understood that the configuration in which the second state is set as the state in which the change to the specific mode of the hold notification is not executed is also included.

Feature D3. When the mode of the hold notification when the mode shifts to the second state is higher than the predetermined notification mode (upper limit display mode), the mode determination means determines the mode of the hold notification. When it is determined that the mode is not allowed and the notification mode of the hold notification when shifting to the second state is the mode equal to or less than the predetermined notification mode, the notification mode of the hold notification is set to the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein it is determined that the aspect is permissible.

In the above configuration, by comparing the notification mode at the time of transition to the second state with the predetermined notification mode set corresponding to the second state, it is possible to make the mode the same as the notification mode in the first state. Is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not each mode has the same rank based on the corresponding expectation in the second state, and it is possible to preferably perform the hold notification after the transition to the second state. Become.

In this feature, the "predetermined notification mode" can also be expressed as "a predetermined notification mode set in response to the second state".

Feature D4. Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained by the special information of the grant determination. It is equipped with a destination identification means (a function of executing a hold look-ahead process in the main control device 162) that executes a destination identification process to be specified at a timing before the target.
The specific mode means is configured to execute the specific mode process based on the result of the prior specific process.
Any of the features D1 to D3, wherein the aspect determining means makes the determination based on the result of the prior identification process for the special information corresponding to the hold notification to be determined by the aspect determining means. The gaming machine described in.

In the above configuration, the change to the specific mode is performed based on the result of the look-ahead processing (so-called look-ahead result). Then, when it is determined by the aspect determining means whether or not the aspect has the same rank, the above determination is made based on the pre-reading result of the hold notification which is the determination target. As a result, the pre-reading result of the hold notification, that is, the notification result in the game times executed when the special information of the hold notification becomes the judgment target of the grant determination means, and the game times in the game times. Based on the production, it is possible to determine whether or not the mode has the same rank.

Feature D5. A plurality of types of upper limit modes (upper limit display modes) are set according to the result of the prior identification process (return determination table).
The mode determination means
A grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S3105) for grasping the result of the prior identification process for the special information corresponding to the hold notification to be determined by the mode determining means, and
A means for making the determination based on the upper limit mode corresponding to the result grasped by the grasping means among the plurality of types of modes (a function of executing the process of step S3106).
The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

In the above configuration, a plurality of types of upper limit modes are set according to the look-ahead result, and when determining whether or not the modes have the same rank by the mode determination means, the look-ahead result of the hold notification, which is the determination target, is used. The corresponding upper limit aspect is applied and the above determination is made. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the mode of notification of the hold notification when the state shifts to the second state does not exceed the corresponding expectation level in the first state, and whether or not the mode has the same rank.

Feature D6. When the specific mode processing is executed, the specific mode means executes the hold notification in the first specific mode (blue display mode HMb) which is one of the plurality of types, and then the specific mode means. Means for changing the notification mode of the hold notification to a second specific mode (green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) higher than the first specific mode (for the hold notice in the effect control device 143). The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that it has a function of executing a setting process).

In the above configuration, after the notification mode of the hold notification is set to the specific mode, the notification mode is gradually changed to a higher mode. In such a configuration, when the process of setting the notification mode of the hold notification to the specific mode is performed in the first state, for example, when the transition to the second state occurs in the early stage after the specific mode is set. It is assumed that the specific mode at that time is a relatively low mode (a mode with a low degree of expectation), and conversely, if the above transition occurs in the final stage, a relatively high mode (expected). It is expected that the degree will be high. That is, depending on the timing of transition to the second state, there is a difference in which mode the specific mode in the hold notification is. By applying any of the configurations D1 to D5 to the configuration in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the configuration has the same rank according to the notification mode each time, and after the transition to the second state. It becomes possible to preferably perform the hold notification in.

In this feature, "whether or not the mode determining means is a predetermined mode in which the player can be recognized as having the same rank as the notification mode in the first mode immediately before the transition to the second state. It may further have the feature of "providing a means for determining."

Feature D7. The second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is less likely to be executed than the first state.
When the specific mode processing is executed in the second state and the notification mode of the hold notification is set to any one of a plurality of types and then shifts to the first state, the determination by the mode determining means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, which comprises means for non-execution (a function of skipping the processing of steps S3105 to S3107 when a negative determination is made in step S3104).

In the above configuration, there is a high degree of expectation for the transition from the second state in which the hold notification is relatively difficult to be a specific mode to the first state in which the hold notification is relatively likely to be a specific mode, that is, the result of the grant response to the specific mode. When the state is switched from the state to the low state, it is not determined whether or not the mode has the same rank. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opportunity for maintaining the notification mode of the hold notification from being excessively limited, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature D8. When it is determined by the aspect determining means that the predetermined aspect is to be set, the changing means (process of step S3110) for changing the notification mode of the holding notification, which is the target of the determination, from the normal mode to the predetermined mode is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D7, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to the mode of the same rank, the mode is changed from the normal mode to the mode of the same rank. In this case, the notification mode of the hold notification can be switched to the normal mode as the first state is switched to the second state, regardless of whether the mode is the same or not. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the specific mode is changed to the normal mode due to the determination that the mode is not the same. In addition, by adopting a configuration that changes to a specific mode after becoming a normal mode, the hold notification that has been set to the normal mode is specified after the transition to the second state, including the case where it is determined that the mode is not the same. It is possible to arouse the expectation that the mode will be changed, and it will be possible to maintain the expectation for the hold notification.

Feature D9. Specific effect means (function for executing the processes of steps S1603 to S1605) for executing a specific effect (change suggestion effect) suggesting that the notification mode of the hold notification changes to a higher notification mode, and
When the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to the predetermined mode by the changing means, a means for restricting the execution of the specific effect (a function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion effect). ,
The gaming machine according to the feature D8, which is characterized by the above.

In the above configuration, it is suggested that the notification mode of the hold notification changes to the higher notification mode due to the specific effect, so that a feeling of expectation for the change to the higher notification mode is aroused, and a game for the hold notification. It is possible to raise the degree of attention of the person. In such a configuration, for example, when a specific effect is performed when changing to a mode of the same rank, the notification mode in the first state memorized by the player is used as a reference, and a higher notification mode is associated with the notification mode. It is expected that it will end up. In this case, there is a concern that even though the specific effect has been performed, it may give an unnatural impression that the original mode has just been restored. In this respect, in this configuration, even if the notification mode is changed to a higher level, when the normal mode is changed to the same rank mode, the execution of the specific effect is restricted, so that such an inconvenience is preferable. Can be suppressed.

Feature D10. When it is determined by the mode determination means that the predetermined mode is not set, the means for setting the notification mode of the hold notification that is the target of the determination to the normal mode or a notification mode lower than the predetermined mode (step). The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, which comprises a function of executing the process of S3108).

In the above configuration, when it is determined that the mode is not the same, the notification mode of the hold notification that is the judgment target is set to the normal mode or the lower notification mode. It is possible to prevent the notification mode from exceeding the corresponding expectation in the first state, and it is possible to preferably perform the hold notification after the transition to the second state.

For each configuration of the above features D1 to D10, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined information, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
A special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Special game state means (function to execute the opening / closing process of the big winning opening in the main control device 162) and
The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game rotation operation is performed.
A notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp) different from the predetermined notification means or the predetermined notification means is provided so that the player can recognize at least the number of held games before execution. (Part), the hold notification means (function to execute the hold command correspondence process in the effect control device 143), and
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. Pre-identifying means (a function of executing the hold pre-reading process in the main control device 162) for executing the pre-identifying process to be specified at the previous timing, and
Based on the result of the prior identification process, the notification mode of the hold notification can be changed to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). (Function to execute the setting process for advance notice and the first execution process for hold notice),
With
In addition to the special gaming state, a plurality of types of gaming states (normal gaming state, high-probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are set as gaming states.
When the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result and the special gaming state is executed, the state transition means (in the main control device 162) for shifting to one of the plurality of types of gaming states. (A function to execute the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) and
Regarding the hold notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state, when the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is the special mode. A specific means (a function of executing a setting process for returning to advance notice by the effect control device 143 in the fourth embodiment) and a mode different from the notification mode before the game state.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of so-called hold look-ahead, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the result will be a grant response, and the player's expectation is preferable. Can be aroused to. Further, in this configuration, a plurality of types of game states are set as game states, the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result, and when the special game state is executed, any one of the plurality of types of game states is executed. It shifts to the game state of. In such a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the special information used for the grant determination is the same, the result of the grant determination and the game turn effect performed in the game round may differ depending on the game state. There is. In this respect, in this configuration, the notification mode after the special game state is special when the game state before and after the execution of the special game state is different for the hold notification which is set as a specific mode before the execution of the special game state. Since the notification mode is different from that before the game state, even if the grant determination result or the game rotation effect due to the difference in the game state changes, the hold notification suppresses misunderstandings to the player. It becomes possible to preferably perform the hold notification in the game state after the transition.

Feature E2. When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different from each other, the specific means has the holding notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state, after the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it includes means for setting the notification mode to the normal mode (a function of executing the process of step S3417 after making a negative determination in step S3504).

In the above configuration, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before the special gaming state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and the hold notification is performed. As a result, after the special game state, the hold notification that does not match the actual expected degree is performed, and it is possible to preferably suppress the misunderstanding of the player. Further, by uniformly adopting the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustment of the notification mode according to the change in the degree of expectation, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature E3. The specific means
The first means as the means for setting the normal aspect and
After the normal mode is set by the first means, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the hold notification, which is the normal mode, is set as the specific mode, and based on the result, the notification mode of the hold notification is determined. 2nd means to set (a function to execute the 3rd execution process of the hold notice),
The gaming machine according to the feature E2, which is characterized by having.

Changing the notification mode of the hold notification, which was set as a specific mode before the special game state, to the normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state. Therefore, while it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the grant determination result and the game rotation effect due to the change in the game state, there is a concern that the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the hold notification cannot be notified or suggested. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the hold notification, which is the normal mode, is given an opportunity to change to the specific mode after that, it can be promoted to the specific mode after the fact, and the degree of expectation is notified. Etc. become possible.

Feature E4. An execution notification unit (execution display area) in which a predetermined notification (displaying a hold image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the hold notification is performed so that the player can recognize the execution of the held game times. With D)
The specific means
The first means as the means for setting the normal aspect and
In the game of the hold notification that has been set as the normal mode by the first means, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the hold notification is set to a specific mode different from the normal mode, and the result is A second means (a function of executing a third execution process of the hold notice) for setting the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on
The gaming machine according to the feature E2 or the feature E3.

Changing the notification mode of the hold notification, which was set as a specific mode before the special game state, to the normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state. Therefore, while it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the grant determination result and the game rotation effect due to the change in the game state, there is a concern that the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the hold notification cannot be notified or suggested. In this respect, in this configuration, the holding notification, which is the normal mode, is given an opportunity to change to the specific mode as the game progresses to the game times of the holding notification. Therefore, even when the notification mode is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode, it can be promoted to the specific mode after the fact, and the degree of expectation can be notified.

Feature E5. When the game round is executed, the game round is based on the special information (holding information) that is the target of the grant determination that triggered the game round or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. It is equipped with a game rotation effect setting means (a function of executing a special figure variation display process in the effect control device 143) for setting a game rotation effect (reach effect, etc.) to be performed.
The second means is characterized in that it determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means. The gaming machine described in E4.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the specific mode based on the special information or the specific information used for setting the game time effect by the game time effect setting means. As a result, when the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state are different, the notification mode of the predetermined notification is adapted to the game time effect actually performed in the game time after the special game state. Can be changed to a specific mode.

When this feature is applied to the feature E2, "the second means specifies the mode of notification of the predetermined notification based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means. "Determining whether or not to do so" is "the second means refers to the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means regardless of the information stored in the predetermined storage unit." Based on this, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode. "

Feature E6. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
Information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold notification, which is a specific mode before the execution of the special game state, can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (return area 344f of the RAM 344).
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specific means has the predetermined storage for the holding notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. The feature is that it is provided with mode setting means (a function of executing a setting process for returning to advance notice in the effect control device 143) for setting a notification mode after the special gaming state based on the information stored in the unit. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E5.

For example, if the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead performed before the special game state, there is a concern that the notification mode is set different from the notification mode before the special game state. be. In this respect, in this configuration, when the special gaming state is executed in the situation where the holding notification of the specific mode exists, the information of the notification mode at that time is stored, and the gaming state after the special gaming state is before the special gaming state. If it is the same as the game state of, the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to suitably return the notification mode after the special gaming state to the original mode before the special gaming state.

In addition, in this feature, "a mode setting means for setting a notification mode after the special game state based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit for the hold notification which was set as a specific mode before the special game state. "For the hold notification that was set as a specific mode before the special gaming state, the notification after the special gaming state is based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit regardless of the result of the prior identification processing. It can also be expressed as "aspect setting means for setting a mode".

Feature E7. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specific means has the special gaming state for the holding notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. Mode setting for setting the later notification mode to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, same rank display mode, same character, etc.) capable of recognizing that the player has the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, which comprises means (a function of executing a setting process for returning to advance notice in the effect control device 143).

In the above configuration, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state, the notification mode after the special gaming state is recognized as having the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state. In order to make it possible, it is possible to similarly arouse the expectation even after the special gaming state with respect to the hold notification that aroused the expectation of the player by changing to a specific aspect before the special gaming state. ..

Feature E8. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
The specific means
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is the usual mode for the holding notification which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. The first means for setting the mode (a function of executing the process of step S3417 after making a negative determination in step S3504) and
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the notification mode after the special gaming state is set for the holding notification which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. A second means (effect control device) for setting a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, same rank display mode, same character, etc.) that the player can recognize as having the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state. (Function to execute the setting process for returning to the notice in 143) and
With
The second means includes means (a function of executing the process of step S3507) capable of setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode and then setting the predetermined mode. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E7.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is changed to the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, the normal mode is changed to the same rank. In this case, regardless of whether or not the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state are the same, the notification mode of the hold notification is a specific mode as the special gaming state is executed. Is changed to the normal mode. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the normal mode is changed due to the difference in the gaming state. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the normal mode is changed to a specific mode, the hold notification, which is the normal mode, is changed to the specific mode in the game state after the special game state, including the case where the game state is different. It is possible to arouse the expectation that it will be done, and it will be possible to maintain the expectation for the hold notification.

Feature E9. The specific means determines whether or not the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same in the special gaming state or when the special gaming state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, which comprises a state determining means (a function of executing the process of step S3416).

In the above configuration, the same or not determination of whether or not the game states are the same is performed when the special game state is being executed or when the special game state ends. As a result, it is possible to promptly respond after the special game state as to what kind of mode the notification mode of the hold notification, which was set as the specific mode before the special game state, should be after the special game state. Therefore, even in a situation where the number of holds before the hold notice is small after the special game state, the notice mode of the hold notice can be preferably adjusted.

Feature E10. Variable that can be switched between the first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. Ball entry means (variable winning device 65) and
A switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) that executes switching control for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state. ,
With
The special gaming state is a state in which the switching control is performed at least once.
The gaming machine according to feature E9, wherein the gaming state determining means performs the determination during the period in which the variable ball entering means is in the second state.

When the variable ball entry means is in the first state in the special game state, the processing load is relatively high, for example, it is necessary to perform an effect based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means. Is assumed. If the same or disapproval judgment is made using such a period, there is a concern that a higher load may be caused. In this respect, in this configuration, since the same or not is determined by using the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the second state, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature E11. The grant determination means performs the grant determination based on the first information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) included in the special information.
Based on the second information (value of the fluctuation type counter CS) included in the special information or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the second information, the game rotation effect (reach effect) performed in the game times is performed. Equipped with a game rotation effect setting means (a function of executing a special figure variation display process in the effect control device 143) to be set.
In the prior identification process, the second information included in the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means or the specific information corresponding to the second information is included in the predetermined special information. Is specified at a timing before the target of the grant determination.
The plurality of types of gaming states correspond to a first gaming state (any of a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, and a high-probability gaming state) and predetermined second information (variable type counter CS having a value of 80). A second gaming state in which the game counter or specific information is different from the first gaming state (a gaming state that is any of a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, and a high-probability gaming state and is different from the first gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, which is characterized by including.

In the above configuration, the game rotation effect is set based on the second information included in the special information, and in the first game state and the second game state, even if the value of the second information is the same, the corresponding game It is configured so that the production is different. Therefore, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before the special gaming state, if the notification mode after the special gaming state in the hold notification is the same as the notification mode before the special gaming state, the special gaming state There is a risk that the game rotation effect suggested by the hold notification will not match before and after the special game state. By applying any of the above-mentioned features E1 to E9 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature E12. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, which comprises means for not executing the holding notification in the special gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S3411).

When changing the notification mode of the hold notification with the end of the special game state, if the hold notification that has been performed up to that point is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special game state, the player is unnatural. There is a concern that you will be impressed. For example, when downgrading the notification mode of the hold notification to a normal mode or a lower notification mode, it is assumed that the player is likely to notice and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, the hold notification itself is not executed in the special game state, so when changing the notification mode, a period during which the hold notification itself is not performed, including other hold notifications, is provided. Can be done. As a result, the change in the notification mode is suppressed from being noticeable, and the unnaturalness can be alleviated. In addition, since the specific notification is not executed, there is an advantage that it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the production for the special game state.

Feature E13. An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined information, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
A special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Special game state means (function to execute the opening / closing process of the big winning opening in the main control device 162) and
The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game rotation operation is performed.
A notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp) different from the predetermined notification means or the predetermined notification means is provided so that the player can recognize at least the number of held games before execution. (Part), the hold notification means (function to execute the hold command correspondence process in the effect control device 143), and
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. Pre-identifying means (a function of executing the hold pre-reading process in the main control device 162) for executing the pre-identifying process to be specified at the previous timing, and
Based on the result of the prior identification process, the notification mode of the hold notification can be changed to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). (Function to execute the setting process for advance notice and the first execution process for hold notice),
With
In addition to the special gaming state, a plurality of types of gaming states (normal gaming state, high-probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are set as gaming states.
When the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result and the special gaming state is executed, the state transition means (in the main control device 162) for shifting to one of the plurality of types of gaming states. (A function to execute the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) and
Regarding the hold notification that was set as a specific mode before the special gaming state, the notification mode after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state. Specific means (a function of executing the setting process for returning the advance notice by the effect control device 143 in the fourth embodiment) and the case where it is not,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of so-called hold look-ahead, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the result will be a grant response, and the player's expectation is preferable. Can be aroused to. Further, in this configuration, a plurality of types of game states are set as game states, the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result, and when the special game state is executed, any one of the plurality of types of game states is executed. It shifts to the game state of. In such a configuration in which a plurality of types of game states are provided, even if the special information used for the grant determination is the same, the result of the grant determination and the game turn effect performed in the game round may differ depending on the game state. There is. In this respect, in this configuration, regarding the hold notification which is a specific mode before the execution of the special game state, the notification mode in the game state after the special game state is changed to the game state before and after the execution of the special game state. Since it is different depending on whether it is the same or not, the notification mode can be set based on the change in the grant determination result and the game rotation effect due to the difference in the game state, and the hold notification in the game state after the transition can be set. It becomes possible to perform favorably.

Feature E14. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
Information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold notification, which is a specific mode before the execution of the special game state, can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (return area 344f of the RAM 344).
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specific means has the predetermined storage for the holding notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. The feature is that it is provided with mode setting means (a function of executing a setting process for returning to advance notice in the effect control device 143) for setting a notification mode after the special gaming state based on the information stored in the unit. The gaming machine described in E13.

For example, if the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead performed before the special game state, there is a concern that the notification mode is set different from the notification mode before the special game state. be. In this respect, in this configuration, when the special gaming state is executed in the situation where the holding notification of the specific mode exists, the information of the notification mode at that time is stored, and the gaming state after the special gaming state is before the special gaming state. If it is the same as the game state of, the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to suitably return the notification mode after the special gaming state to the original mode before the special gaming state.

In addition, in this feature, "a mode setting means for setting a notification mode after the special game state based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit for the hold notification which was set as a specific mode before the special game state. "For the hold notification that was set as a specific mode before the special gaming state, the notification after the special gaming state is based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit regardless of the result of the prior identification processing. It can also be expressed as "aspect setting means for setting a mode".

Feature E15. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specific means has the special gaming state for the hold notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. Mode setting for setting the later notification mode to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, same rank display mode, same character, etc.) capable of recognizing that the player has the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature E13 or feature E14, which comprises means (a function of executing a setting process for returning to advance notice in the effect control device 143).

In the above configuration, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state, the notification mode after the special gaming state is recognized as having the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state. In order to make it possible, it is possible to similarly arouse the expectation even after the special gaming state with respect to the hold notification that aroused the expectation of the player by changing to a specific aspect before the special gaming state. ..

Feature E16. When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different from each other, the specific means has the holding notification, which is a specific mode before the special gaming state, after the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E13 to E15, which comprises means for setting the notification mode to the normal mode (a function of executing the process of step S3417 after making a negative determination in step S3504).

In the above configuration, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before the special gaming state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and the hold notification is performed. As a result, after the special game state, the hold notification that does not match the actual expected degree is performed, and it is possible to preferably suppress the misunderstanding of the player. Further, by uniformly adopting the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustment of the notification mode according to the change in the degree of expectation, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature E17. An execution notification unit (execution display area) in which a predetermined notification (displaying a hold image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the hold notification is performed so that the player can recognize the execution of the held game times. With D)
The specific means
The first means as the means for setting the normal aspect and
In the game of the hold notification that has been set as the normal mode by the first means, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the hold notification is set to a specific mode different from the normal mode, and the result is A second means (a function of executing a third execution process of the hold notice) for setting the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on
The gaming machine according to the feature E16, which is characterized by the above.

Changing the notification mode of the hold notification, which was set as a specific mode before the special game state, to the normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state. Therefore, while it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the grant determination result and the game rotation effect due to the change in the game state, there is a concern that the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the hold notification cannot be notified or suggested. In this respect, in this configuration, the holding notification, which is the normal mode, is given an opportunity to change to the specific mode as the game progresses to the game times of the holding notification. Therefore, even when the notification mode is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode, it can be promoted to the specific mode after the fact, and the degree of expectation can be notified.

Feature E18. When the game round is executed, the game round is based on the special information (holding information) that is the target of the grant determination that triggered the game round or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. It is equipped with a game rotation effect setting means (a function of executing a special figure variation display process in the effect control device 143) for setting a game rotation effect (reach effect, etc.) to be performed.
The second means is characterized in that it determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means. The gaming machine described in E17.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the specific mode based on the special information or the specific information used for setting the game time effect by the game time effect setting means. As a result, when the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state are different, the notification mode of the predetermined notification is adapted to the game time effect actually performed in the game time after the special game state. Can be changed to a specific mode.

When this feature is applied to the feature E2, "the second means specifies the mode of notification of the predetermined notification based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means. "Determining whether or not to do so" is "the second means refers to the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rotation effect setting means regardless of the information stored in the predetermined storage unit." Based on this, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode. "

Feature E19. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the grant correspondence result is different. Has been
The specific means
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the notification mode after the special gaming state is set for the holding notification which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. A first means (effect control device) for setting a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, same rank display mode, same character, etc.) that can be recognized as having the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state. (Function to execute the setting process for returning to the notice in 143) and
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is the usual mode for the holding notification which is a specific mode before the special gaming state. A second means for setting the mode (a function of executing the process of step S3417 after making a negative determination in step S3504) and
With
The first means is provided with means (a function of executing the process of step S3507) capable of setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode and then setting the predetermined mode. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features E13 to E18.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is changed to the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, the normal mode is changed to the same rank. In this case, regardless of whether or not the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state are the same, the notification mode of the hold notification is a specific mode as the special gaming state is executed. Is changed to the normal mode. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness when the normal mode is changed due to the difference in the gaming state. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the normal mode is changed to a specific mode, the hold notification, which is the normal mode, is changed to the specific mode in the game state after the special game state, including the case where the game state is different. It is possible to arouse the expectation that it will be done, and it will be possible to maintain the expectation for the hold notification.

It is possible to apply the configurations of the features E9 to E12 to the features E13 to E19. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

For each configuration of the above features E1 to E19, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) that stores special information (holding information) acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined information, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Specific notification means (effect control) that executes specific notification (display of a holding image) corresponding to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination. (A function to execute the first execution process of the hold notice in the device 143) and
With
Regarding the predetermined special information, the information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is before the special information is the target of the grant determination. A first prior identification means (a function of executing a first pending pre-reading process by the effect control device 143 in the fifth embodiment) to be specified at a predetermined timing (acquisition timing of pending information), and
Judgment when a predetermined event (opening / closing execution mode, etc.) occurs during execution of the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information, and the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination for the predetermined special information. The second destination specifying means (in the fifth embodiment, the effect control device 143) specifies information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the result at a specific timing (end timing of the opening / closing execution mode, etc.) after the predetermined event. (Function to execute the second hold look-ahead process) and
With
The specific notification means is
Based on the specific result of the first first specific means, the first means (execution of the setting process for the hold notice in the effect control device 143) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information before the predetermined event. Function to do) and
Based on the specific result of the second destination specific means, the second means (execution of the setting process for returning to the notice in the effect control device 143) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information after the predetermined event. Function to do) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead processing, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the specific notification will result in the granting response, and it is possible to preferably arouse the expectation of the player. Can be done. In such a configuration, the state changes with the occurrence of the predetermined event, and even if the value of the special information used for the grant determination is the same, the result of the grant determination or the like may differ before and after the predetermined event. In this regard, in this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs during the execution of the specific notification, the pre-reading process is executed again after the predetermined event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, and the specific notification is performed based on the result. Set the notification mode of. Therefore, the notification mode of the specific notification that was performed before the predetermined event can be adjusted to be a suitable mode after the predetermined event, and the specific notification after the predetermined event can be preferably performed.

Feature F2. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the operation of the game rotation is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be capable of executing the specific notification across game times.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, it is easy to cause a situation in which a predetermined event occurs during the execution of the specific notification. By applying the configuration of the feature F1 to such a configuration, the feature can be effectively functioned and the above effect can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F3. It is characterized in that the grant information (random value corresponding to the jackpot) or the determination condition (winning probability) in the grant determination means can be different between before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information is the same, the result of the grant determination may differ between before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. For this reason, if the specific notification after the predetermined event is performed in the notification mode before the predetermined event, there is a concern that a result different from the notification result (result of the grant determination) actually notified in the game round may be suggested. By applying the configuration of the above-mentioned features F1 or F2 to such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the notification mode so as to match the actual notification result in the game times and perform notification after a predetermined event. It becomes possible to preferably perform specific notification after a predetermined event.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the second-first identification means performs the identification by applying the given information or the determination condition corresponding to the predetermined event.

In the above configuration, when the pre-reading process is executed again after the predetermined event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the pre-reading process is performed by applying the given information and the determination condition corresponding to the state after the predetermined event. .. As a result, regarding the specific notification that was performed before the predetermined event, the notification mode can be adjusted so as to match the actual notification result in the game round, and the notification after the predetermined event can be performed, and the specific notification after the predetermined event can be performed. It becomes possible to preferably perform the notification.

Feature F5. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) so that the game rotation operation is performed.
Game turn effect setting means (effect control device 143) for setting a game turn effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in a game time based on special information (holding information) or specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. (Function to execute processing for displaying special figure fluctuations) and
With
It is configured so that the game rotation effect corresponding to the predetermined special information or the predetermined specific information (variation pattern having a value of 80) derived from the predetermined special information can be different between before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F4.

In the above configuration, even if the values of the special information or the specific information are the same, there may be a difference in the game rotation effect set by the game time setting means between before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. For this reason, if the specific notification after the predetermined event is performed in the notification mode before the predetermined event, there is a concern that a situation may be caused in which an effect different from the game time effect actually performed in the game time is suggested. By applying the configuration described in any of the above features F1 to F4 to such a configuration, the notification mode can be adjusted so that the specific notification performed before the predetermined event is consistent with the actual game rotation effect. It is possible to adjust and perform notification after a predetermined event, and it becomes possible to preferably perform specific notification after a predetermined event.

Feature F6. The first-first identification means and the second-first identification means are means for identifying the game rotation effect corresponding to the predetermined special information or the specific information corresponding to the predetermined special information as the information corresponding to the determination result. With
The second-first specifying means is described in feature F5, which is characterized in that after the predetermined event, the game rotation effect corresponding to the predetermined special information or the specific information corresponding to the predetermined special information is specified. Amusement machine.

In the above configuration, when the pre-reading process is executed again after the predetermined event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the game rotation effect and the specific information are pre-read according to the state after the predetermined event. As a result, with respect to the specific notification that was performed before the predetermined event, it is possible to adjust the notification mode so as to match the actual game rotation effect and perform the notification after the predetermined event, and the specific notification after the predetermined event is preferable. It will be possible to do it.

Feature F7. The second means has any one of the features F1 to F6 characterized in that the notification mode after the predetermined event is set based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the specific result of the second destination identification means. Described gaming machine.

For example, if the notification mode of the specific notification changes frequently with the occurrence of a predetermined event, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this configuration, not only the specific result of the second destination specifying means but also the notification mode before the predetermined event is taken into consideration to set the notification mode after the predetermined event. Therefore, for example, the notification mode before the predetermined event is set as the first. 2 In light of the specific result of the prior identification means, if there is no problem in the same mode after the predetermined event, the specific notification can be performed by taking over the notification mode before the predetermined event. As a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive change in the notification mode with the predetermined event as a boundary, and it is possible to execute the specific notification after the predetermined event in a natural manner.

Feature F8. In the specific notification, a plurality of types of modes (normal display mode HMa, blue display mode) are set so that the degree of expectation that the result of the grant determination corresponds to the grant information is different. HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set.
In the second means, the player has the same rank as the notification mode before the predetermined event in the notification mode after the predetermined event based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the specific result of the second destination identification means. Mode determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S4703 to S4705) for determining whether or not to use a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that can be recognized as The gaming machine according to feature F7, which is characterized by being provided.

In the above configuration, as the notification mode of the specific notification, a plurality of types of modes are set so that the degree of expectation that the result of the grant correspondence is different is different. In a configuration in which the degree of expectation is set stepwise and a large number of notification modes are provided, the range of the degree of expectation corresponding to one notification mode is narrowed. When the specific notification is performed later, the degree of expectation suggested before and after the predetermined event tends to be different. In this respect, in this configuration, the player recognizes that the notification mode after the predetermined event is the same as the notification mode before the predetermined event, based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the specific result of the second destination specifying means. In order to determine whether or not the mode is possible, even in a situation where a large number of notification modes are set, it becomes possible to preferably perform specific notification after a predetermined event by matching the degree of expectation.

Feature F9. When the second means determines that the predetermined mode is not set by the mode determining means, the notification mode after the predetermined event is lower than the normal mode (normal display mode HMa) or the notification mode before the predetermined event. The gaming machine according to feature F8, which comprises means for setting the mode (a function of executing the process of step S3417 after making a negative determination in step S4706).

In the above configuration, when it is determined that the modes are not of the same rank, the notification mode of the specific notification that is the judgment target is the normal mode or the lower notification mode, so that the notification mode after the predetermined event corresponds before the predetermined event. It is possible to suppress exceeding the expected degree, and it becomes possible to preferably perform specific notification after a predetermined event.

Feature F10. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game turn operation to be performed,
A hold notification means (a function of executing hold command correspondence processing in the effect control device 143) that performs hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold of the game times before execution.
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the specific notification is a holding notification.

When the specific notification is performed using the hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and a situation in which a predetermined event is likely to occur during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information is the target of the expectation degree suggested by the specific notification, it is assumed that there will be a large effect when there is a difference in the expectation degree before and after the predetermined event. By applying any of the above-mentioned features F1 to F9 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Features F11. A special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. (A function to execute the opening / closing process of the big winning opening in the main control device 162) and the special game state to be shifted to
In addition to the special gaming state, a plurality of types of gaming states (normal gaming state, high-probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are set as gaming states.
When the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result and the special gaming state is executed, the state transition means (in the main control device 162) for shifting to one of the plurality of types of gaming states. (A function to execute the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, wherein the predetermined event is in the special gaming state.

There are gaming machines that shift to a gaming state such as a normal gaming state, a highly accurate gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state, triggered by the transition to the special gaming state. In such a gaming machine, even if the value of the special information used for the grant determination is the same between the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state, the result of the grant determination before and after the special gaming state. Etc. may be different. By applying any of the above-mentioned features F1 to F10 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F12. A feature F11 characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step S3411) for not executing the specific notification in the special gaming state when the specific notification shifts to the special gaming state during execution. The gaming machine described in.

When the notification mode of the specific notification is changed with the end of the special game state, if the specific notification that has been performed up to that point is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special game state, the player gives an unnatural impression. I am concerned about receiving it. For example, when downgrading the notification mode of the specific notification to a normal mode or a lower notification mode, it is assumed that the player is likely to notice and give an unnatural impression. In this respect, in this configuration, since the specific notification is not executed in the special game state, it is possible to intervene a period in which the specific notification itself is not performed when changing the notification mode. As a result, the change in the notification mode is suppressed from being noticeable, and the unnaturalness can be alleviated. In addition, since the specific notification is not executed, there is an advantage that it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the production for the special game state.

For each configuration of the above features F1 to F12, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined information, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. Pre-identifying means (a function of executing the hold pre-reading process in the main control device 162) for executing the pre-identifying process to be specified at the previous timing, and
For the first specific notification means (holding notice in the effect control device 143) that the specific notification (holding notice effect) is executed by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) based on the result of the destination identification process. Setting process, function to execute the first execution process of hold notice),
With
The first specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to any one of a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe). It is provided with a first notification mode setting means (a function of executing a setting process for holding notice in the effect control device 143), and is configured to execute the specific notification based on the setting result of the first notification mode setting means. Ori,
When a predetermined abnormality (electric power interruption state) occurs during the execution of the specific notification, the second specific notification means (in the sixth embodiment) that re-executes the specific notification after the predetermined abnormality is resolved is produced. It is provided with a function of executing the process for returning the hold notice by the control device 143, and a function of executing the effect setting process by the effect control device 143 in the seventh embodiment).
The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed after the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, and before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. Second notification mode setting means (in the sixth to seventh embodiments, effect control) is set based on the result of the executed destination identification process or the result of the destination identification process performed after the predetermined abnormality is resolved. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a display mode setting process by the device 143).

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead processing, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the specific notification will result in the granting response, and it is possible to preferably arouse the expectation of the player. Can be done. At that time, since a plurality of types of modes are set as the notification modes of the specific notification, by setting one of the plurality of types of modes and executing the specific notification, the degree of expectation is suggested by giving a magnitude. be able to. Under such a configuration, if a predetermined abnormality occurs in a situation where the specific notification is performed and then the abnormality is resolved, the specific notification that was executed before the occurrence of the abnormality is re-executed. .. As a result, the specific notification can be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and the disappearance of the specific notification due to the occurrence of the abnormality is suppressed. At that time, since the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set based on the notification mode before the occurrence of the abnormality, the pre-reading result performed before the occurrence of the abnormality, or the pre-reading result performed again after the occurrence of the abnormality, the notification mode is set before the occurrence of the abnormality. It becomes possible to preferably restore the specific notification that has been performed.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the specific notification is configured not to be executed when the predetermined abnormality occurs during execution of the specific notification.

In a configuration in which the specific notification is not executed due to the occurrence of an abnormality, not only the specific notification but also the expectation level associated with the specific notification may be extinguished, which tends to cause anxiety of the player. By applying the configuration of the feature G1 to such a configuration, the feature can be effectively functioned and the above effect can be suitably exhibited.

Feature G3. The second notification mode setting means is set at a predetermined timing in a period from the resolution of the predetermined abnormality until the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means. The gaming machine according to the feature G1 or the feature G2.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set in the period from the resolution of the abnormality to the start of the game round of the special information that triggered the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to return the notification mode of the specific notification to the mode before the occurrence of the abnormality before the game round of the special information is started, and it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation before the game round.

Feature G4. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before a predetermined abnormality occurs.
Information (information about the image for holding) corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (backup RAM 345).
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, characterized in that information stored in the predetermined storage unit can be retained when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, the information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the information stored in the storage unit is retained without being lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage unit, and the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved can be preferably performed.

Feature G5. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before a predetermined abnormality occurs.
In the specific notification, the plurality of types of notification modes are set so that the degree of expectation that the result of the granting correspondence is different is different.
When the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is a notification mode higher than the predetermined predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is the predetermined mode. Mode The following notification mode is set (a function of executing the process of step S5407), or the specific notification is not executed (a function of not executing the hold notice effect after the abnormality is resolved). The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G4.

For example, when the special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes due to the influence of the abnormality, the pre-reading result performed before the abnormality occurs and the result of the grant determination performed after the abnormality is resolved are inconsistent. .. In such a case, a high expectation is suggested by the specific notification before the abnormality occurs, and if it is re-executed as it is even after the abnormality is resolved, the notification result (result of grant judgment) in the game times or the game times will be performed. There is a concern that the game performance produced will not match the expectation level suggested by the specific notification, giving the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the notification mode of the specific notification performed at the time of occurrence of an abnormality is a mode equal to or higher than a predetermined value and suggests a certain degree of expectation, the specific notification is limited to the lower notification mode. Re-execute or do not execute the specific notification itself. As a result, it is possible to suppress the suggestion of the degree of expectation that does not match the notification result in the game times by the specific notification, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature G6. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means can be retained.
When the special information that triggered the specific notification is the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means after the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the specific means sets the notification mode to the predetermined mode or lower. It is provided with a setting means (a function of executing the fourth execution process of the hold notice in the effect control device 143) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification or the non-execution based on the determination result of the grant determination means. The gaming machine according to the feature G5, which is characterized by being present.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is re-executed or the specific notification is not executed due to being limited to the lower notification mode after the predetermined cancellation, the special information that triggered the specific notification is subject to the grant determination. As a result, the notification mode of the specific notification is reset, or the specific notification that is not executed is executed. For this reason, it is possible to avoid the situation where the suggested expectation level remains low and the specific notification is completely lost. At that time, since the notification mode is reset based on the result of the grant determination, the specific notification can be executed in a state of being in an appropriate mode consistent with the notification result in the game round.

Feature G7. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the prior identification process executed before a predetermined abnormality occurs.
Information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the result of the pre-identification process can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 344).
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that information stored in the predetermined storage unit can be retained when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, the information corresponding to the look-ahead result is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the information stored in the storage unit is retained without being lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage unit, and the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved can be preferably performed.

Feature G8. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the prior identification process executed before a predetermined abnormality occurs.
In the specific notification, the plurality of types of notification modes are set so that the degree of expectation that the result of the granting correspondence is different is different.
When the specific result of the prior identification means becomes a predetermined result (hit result) before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, the notification mode of the specific notification is displayed in a notification mode (red display) higher than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc). It is permissible to set the mode HMd and the rainbow-colored display mode HMe).
The notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is limited to the notification modes equal to or less than the predetermined mode (function for executing the process of step S6303), or the notification mode executed before the predetermined abnormality occurs. Features G1 to G7 characterized in that the specific notification is not executed (a function of not executing the hold notice effect after the abnormality is resolved) when the result of the prior identification process is a predetermined result. The gaming machine described in any of.

For example, when the special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes due to the influence of the abnormality, the pre-reading result performed before the abnormality occurs and the result of the grant determination performed after the abnormality is resolved are inconsistent. .. In such a case, a high expectation is suggested by the specific notification before the abnormality occurs, and if it is re-executed as it is even after the abnormality is resolved, the notification result (result of grant judgment) in the game times or the game times will be performed. There is a concern that the game performance produced will not match the expectation level suggested by the specific notification, giving the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, in the above configuration, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is limited to the predetermined mode or less, or when the pre-reading result before the abnormality occurs is the predetermined result, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is not executed. , It is possible to suppress the suggestion of the degree of expectation that does not match the notification result in the game times by the specific notification, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature G9. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means can be retained.
When the special information that triggered the specific notification is the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means after the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the specific means sets the notification mode to the predetermined mode or lower. It is provided with a setting means (a function of executing the fourth execution process of the hold notice in the effect control device 143) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification or the non-execution based on the determination result of the grant determination means. The gaming machine according to the feature G8, which is characterized by being present.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is re-executed or the specific notification is not executed due to being limited to the lower notification mode after the predetermined cancellation, the special information that triggered the specific notification is subject to the grant determination. As a result, the notification mode of the specific notification is reset, or the specific notification that is not executed is executed. For this reason, it is possible to avoid the situation where the suggested expectation level remains low and the specific notification is completely lost. At that time, since the notification mode is reset based on the result of the grant determination, the specific notification can be executed in a state of being in an appropriate mode consistent with the notification result in the game round.

Feature G10. When a predetermined abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification, and the result of the prior identification processing performed before the occurrence of the abnormality after the predetermined abnormality is resolved cannot be specified, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G9, characterized in that the means for restricting the execution of the above (a function of shifting to step S6311 when a negative determination is made in step S6308) is provided.

In the above configuration, when an abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification, if the look-ahead result that is the basis of the notification cannot be specified after the abnormality is resolved, the execution of the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is restricted, so that an erroneous expectation is made. It is possible to suppress the suggestion of degree.

Feature G11. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the prior identification processing performed after the predetermined abnormality is resolved.
The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the operation of the game rotation is provided.
It is equipped with a hold notification means (a function of executing hold command correspondence processing in the effect control device 143) that performs hold notification (hold image) according to the number of game times whose execution is held.
As the specific notification, the first specific notification means sets the notification mode of the hold notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode).
Predetermined storage units (RAM 314, RAM 344, backup) store specific information (change location information) capable of grasping the hold notification for which the specific notification is being performed in a situation where a plurality of the hold notifications are being performed. It has a configuration that can be stored in RAM345).
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, characterized in that information stored in the predetermined storage unit can be retained when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, which hold notification is used to perform the specific notification is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the information is backed up when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, which hold is performed after the abnormality is resolved and before the abnormality occurs. It is possible to preferably grasp whether or not the specific notification has been performed by the notification.

Feature G12. After the predetermined abnormality is resolved, based on the specific information held in the predetermined storage unit, the holding notification for which the specific notification was performed before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality is grasped and grasped. The gaming machine according to feature G11, characterized in that the specific processing is executed for the holding notification.

In the above configuration, since the prior identification process is executed after the abnormality is resolved for the hold notification for which the specific notification was performed before the abnormality occurred, the hold notification for which the specific notification was not performed before the abnormality occurred is executed. Specific notification is performed after the abnormality is resolved, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player. Furthermore, the number of executions of the pre-identification process can be suppressed to a small number as compared with the case where the pre-identification process is performed for all the hold notifications performed after the abnormality is resolved, and the processing load at the time of recovery can be reduced. ..

Feature G13. After the predetermined abnormality is resolved, based on the specific information held in the predetermined storage unit, the holding notification for which the specific notification was not performed before the predetermined abnormality occurs is grasped, and the holding notification is grasped. The gaming machine according to the feature G11 or the feature G12, characterized in that the means for setting the grasped notification mode of the hold notification to the normal mode is provided.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the specific notification from being performed after the abnormality is resolved for the hold notification that was not performed before the abnormality occurs, and it is possible to match the notification modes before and after the abnormality occurs. Become.

Feature G14. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G13, wherein the predetermined abnormality is in a power-off state.

If a power failure occurs during the execution of the specific notification, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, so that the specific notification that has been performed up to that point suddenly disappears. In this case, it is assumed that the player is worried whether the expected degree suggested before the power failure does not disappear and remains after the power is restored after returning from the power failure state. By applying any of the configurations from the feature G1 to the feature G113 to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably re-execute the specific notification after the power is restored, and to make each of these features function effectively. Can be done.

The "electric power cut state" of this feature can also be expressed as "a power cut state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine from an external power source (commercial power source)".

Feature G15. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the operation of the game rotation is provided.
It is equipped with a hold notification means (a function of executing hold command correspondence processing in the effect control device 143) that performs hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold of the game times before execution.
In the specific notification, the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode).
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, wherein a plurality of types of notification modes are set in the specific mode.

When the specific notification is performed using the hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and an event in which an abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the target such as the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification is, it is expected that there will be a large impact when the specific notification cannot be continued due to the occurrence of an abnormality. By applying any of the above-mentioned features G1 to G14 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

For each configuration of the above features G1 to G15, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined information, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. Pre-identifying means (a function of executing the hold pre-reading process in the main control device 162) for executing the pre-identifying process to be specified at the previous timing, and
Specific notification means (holding notice in the effect control device 143) capable of executing specific notification (holding notice effect) by a predetermined notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp unit) based on the result of the destination identification process. (Function to execute the setting process for, the first execution process of the hold notice),
When a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied (when the first mode switching lottery is won in the eighth embodiment), one of a plurality of types of effect states (effect mode A, effect mode B) is produced. The effect state switching means (a function of executing the effect mode switching process by the effect control device 143 in the eighth embodiment) and the effect state switching means for executing the process for switching to another effect state.
Switching limiting means that can limit the switching of the effect state by the effect state switching means when the specific notification is being executed (in the eighth embodiment, the mode switching determination by the effect control device 143). Function to execute processing) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead processing, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the specific notification will result in the granting response, and it is possible to preferably arouse the expectation of the player. Can be done. In addition, since a plurality of types of production states are provided and switching between these production states is performed, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and the tiredness of the game can be suppressed. In such a configuration, for example, when the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification, the attention to the specific notification is lowered due to the change in the effect state, or conversely, the specific notification is concentrated. As a result, there is a concern that the production state may be changed without the player noticing it, causing confusion.

In this respect, in this configuration, since the switching of the effect state is restricted when the specific notification is being executed, it is possible to prevent the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state from overlapping. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to each of the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the effect state after switching is not suitable for the specific notification during execution, it is necessary to make advance adjustments to match the two when designing the effect, but according to this configuration, such adjustment is unnecessary. There is also an advantage that the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

Feature H2. The plurality of types of effect states include a first effect state (effect mode A) and a second effect state (effect mode B) in which the ease with which specific notification is executed is different from that of the first effect state. ,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the switching limiting means includes means for limiting switching to the second effect state when the specific notification is being executed in the first effect state.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease with which the specific notification is executed differs depending on the production state, if the production state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification may differ before and after the switching of the production state. There is a risk. In this case, there is a concern that the expected degree suggested by the specific notification and the result of the grant determination actually notified in the effect state after switching may be inconsistent, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying the configuration of the feature H1 to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the discrepancy and preferably suppress giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

In addition, in the "second effect state in which the ease of executing the specific notification is different from the first effect state" in this feature, only the configuration in which the second effect state is set as the effect state in which the specific notification can be executed is required. It can be understood that the configuration in which the second state is set as the effect state in which the specific notification is not executed is also included.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the second effect state is an effect state set so that specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first effect state.

When the ease with which the specific notification is executed in the second effect state is lower than that in the first effect state, if the specific notification is still executed and the first effect state is switched to the second effect state, the apparent expectation level is obtained. There is a concern that the player will be shown a higher degree of expectation than the actual one. In this respect, in this configuration, the ease with which the specific notification is executed is relatively high (the degree of expectation that the specific notification corresponds to is relatively low), and the ease with which the specific notification is executed is low from the first effect state (specific notification). (The corresponding expectation is relatively high) When switching the second production state, if the specific notification is being executed, the execution of the switching is restricted, so it is preferable to suggest a higher expectation than the actual one. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present feature, "the second effect state is an effect state set so that the specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first effect state", the probability that the specific notification is executed in the second effect state. It can be understood that, in addition to the configuration in which is set to be lower than that in the first effect state, the configuration in which the second effect state is set as an effect state in which the specific notification is not executed is also included.

Feature H4. The switching limiting means is characterized by including a means (a function of executing the process of step S7207) for limiting the switching of the effect state based on the result of the prior identification process that triggered the specific notification. The gaming machine according to any one of H1 to H3.

In the above configuration, switching of the effect state is restricted based on the result of the look-ahead processing that triggered the specific notification. For example, when there is a high possibility that a specific notification will be performed, such as when a jackpot is pre-read, based on the pre-reading, the production state until the game round of the special information for which the pre-reading has been performed is completed. It can be configured to limit the switching of. In this case, the switching can be quickly restricted, and the overlap between the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state can be preferably suppressed. Further, with such a configuration, the following effects can be expected. When the pre-reading result is a big hit or the like, it is assumed that a fanning effect such as a notice effect that arouses the player's expectation is performed before the special information is subject to the grant determination. If the change of the production state is inserted during the execution of the fanning effect, the fanning effect may be difficult to understand from the player's point of view. At this time, by limiting the switching of the production state based on the pre-reading of the jackpot, etc., it is possible to suppress the switching of the production state in the middle of the fanning production, and it is possible to preferably suppress the obscuring of the production. Become.

Further, for example, it is possible to allow the switching of the effect state in a special case such as when the jackpot is pre-read, while basically not allowing the switching of the effect state during the execution of the specific notification. In this case, although the production state is not originally switched, the switching causes the rule to be broken from the player's point of view, and it is possible to suggest a big hit or the like. That is, it is possible to utilize the switching of the effect state as one of the expected degree suggestion effects.

The "means for restricting switching" of this feature can also be expressed as "means for making a difference whether or not switching is restricted".

Feature H5. The switching limiting means has a predetermined degree of expectation that the result of the pre-specific processing that triggered the specific notification will be a predetermined first result (a jackpot look-ahead result) corresponding to the grant response result or the grant response result. It is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step S7207) for limiting the switching of the effect state based on whether or not it is a predetermined second result (pre-reading result of the SPSP reach effect) corresponding to the degree of expectation. Characteristic The gaming machine according to the feature H4.

When the pre-reading result is a jackpot result (first result) or a high expectation result (second result), the switching of the production state is restricted or conversely allowed, so that each of the above effects of the feature H4 can be obtained. It becomes possible to exert it suitably.

Feature H6. In the specific notification, a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are provided so that the degree of expectation for the given response result is different. Has been set and
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the switching limiting means includes means (step S7211) for limiting switching of the effect state based on the notification mode of the specific notification.

For example, if the configuration is such that the switching of the effect state is uniformly restricted during the execution of the specific notification, the switching of the effect state may be excessively restricted or the execution frequency of the specific notification may be suppressed to be low. There is a concern that the significance of providing multiple types of production states and the significance of installing a specific notification execution function will be diminished. In this respect, in the above configuration, since the switching of the effect state is restricted based on the notification mode of the specific notification being executed, for example, in the case of the specific notification corresponding to the expectation degree below a certain level, the switching of the effect state is not restricted. , It is possible to operate such as allowing the switching. As a result, it is possible to suppress the switching of the effect state and the execution of the specific notification from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to appropriately secure those opportunities.

Feature H7. The limiting means limits the switching of the effect state when the notification mode of the specific notification is higher than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), and the notification mode of the specific notification is the predetermined mode or less. In the case, the gaming machine according to the feature H6, characterized in that the switching of the effect state is allowed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to limit the switching of the effect state only when the specific notification of the predetermined mode or more is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the switching of the effect state and the execution of the specific notification from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to appropriately secure those opportunities.

Feature H8. The plurality of types of effect states include a first effect state (effect mode A) and a second effect state (effect mode B) set so that the execution frequency of the specific notification is lower than that of the first effect state. And
In the specific notification, a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are provided so that the degree of expectation for the given response result is different. Has been set and
The switching limiting means is
When the specific notification is being executed in the first effect state, the first means for restricting the switching to the second effect state (process when affirmative determination is made in step S7206) is executed regardless of the notification mode of the specific notification. Function to do) and
When the specific notification is being executed in the second effect state, the second means for restricting the switching to the first effect state based on the notification mode of the specific notification (a negative determination is made in step S7206, and the process of step S7211 is performed. Function to execute) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H7.

In the above configuration, switching from an effect state (first effect state) in which the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low to an effect state (second effect state) in which the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high. In the case of, since the switching of the effect state is uniformly restricted, it is possible to preferably suppress the suggestion of a higher degree of expectation than the actual one. On the contrary, switching from the effect state (second effect state) in which the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high to the effect state (first effect state) in which the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low. In this case, since the switching of the effect state is restricted to only a part of the notification modes, it is possible to suppress the switching of the effect state from being excessively restricted and to appropriately secure the opportunity for the switch. ..

Feature H9. The effect state switching means
A switching determination means (a function of executing the process of step S7102) for determining whether or not to switch the effect state based on a predetermined trigger (which is the switching lottery timing), and
When it is determined by the switching determination means to switch, the switching execution means (function for executing the process of step S7106) for executing the switching of the effect state, and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein the switching limiting means limits at least one of the determination by the switching determining means and the execution by the switching executing means.

In the above configuration, when the switching of the effect state is restricted, at least one of the switching determination of whether to switch the effect state and the execution process of whether to execute the switch is restricted, so that the effect state switching is performed. It becomes possible to limit it suitably.

Feature H10. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the operation of the game rotation is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be capable of executing the specific notification across game times.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, an event in which the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. By applying any of the above-mentioned features H1 to H9 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

Features H11. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the operation of the game rotation is provided.
It is equipped with a hold notification means (a function of executing hold command correspondence processing in the effect control device 143) that performs hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold of the game times before execution.
The specific notification is described in any one of the features H1 to H10, wherein the notification mode of the holding notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). Amusement machine.

When the specific notification is performed using the hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and an event in which the effect state is switched is likely to occur during the execution of the specific notification. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the target such as the expectation degree suggested by the specific notification is, it is expected that the influence when the expected degree of expectation fluctuates with the switching of the production state is large. .. By applying any of the above-mentioned features H1 to H10 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

For each configuration of the above features H1 to H11, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined information, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means (a function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in the main control device 162) and
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. Pre-identifying means (a function of executing the hold pre-reading process in the main control device 162) for executing the pre-identifying process to be specified at the previous timing, and
Specific notification means (holding notice in the effect control device 143) capable of executing specific notification (holding notice effect) by a predetermined notification means (design display device 75, hold lamp unit) based on the result of the destination identification process. (Function to execute the setting process for, the first execution process of the hold notice),
The effect state switching means for switching the effect state from one effect state to another effect state among a plurality of types of effect states (effect mode A, effect mode B) (effect control device 143 in the ninth embodiment). (Function to execute the switching process of the production mode) and
With
The effect state switching means
When a predetermined first condition is satisfied (when a positive determination is made in the determination process of step S8109 in the ninth embodiment), a specific state (standby state) for which it is known that the effect state is switched after that. ) (A function of executing the process of step S8111 in the ninth embodiment) and
When a predetermined second condition different from the predetermined first condition is satisfied in the specific state (when an affirmative determination is made in the determination process of step S8115 in the ninth embodiment), the effect state is switched. A second means to execute (a function of executing the process of step S8117 in the ninth embodiment) and
With
It is characterized by having a limiting means (a function of executing the process of step S8203 in the ninth embodiment) capable of limiting the execution of the specific notification in the specific state. Gaming machine.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead processing, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the specific notification will result in the granting response, and it is possible to preferably arouse the expectation of the player. Can be done. In addition, since a plurality of types of production states are provided and switching between these production states is performed, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and the tiredness of the game can be suppressed. In such a configuration, for example, when the effect state is switched during the execution of the specific notification, the change in the effect state distracts the attention to the specific notification, or conversely, the specific notification is concentrated. As a result, there is a concern that the production state may be changed without the player noticing it, causing confusion.

In this respect, according to this configuration, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted under the specific state in which it is known that the production state is switched after that, it is possible to suppress the switching of the production state during the execution of the specific notification. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to each of the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the effect state after switching is not suitable for the specific notification during execution, it is necessary to make advance adjustments to match the two when designing the effect, but according to this configuration, such adjustment is unnecessary. There is also an advantage that the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

Feature I2. The limiting means is characterized by including means capable of limiting the execution of the specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state (a function of executing the hold command correspondence process in the effect control device 143). Features The gaming machine according to I1.

In the above configuration, it is possible to limit the execution of the specific notification for the special information acquired during the period of the specific state in which the switching of the effect state is awaited. As a result, the range of special information subject to the restriction of the specific notification is widened, and it is possible to prevent the execution opportunity of the specific notification from being excessively restricted.

Feature I3. The limiting means can limit the execution of the specific notification corresponding to the special information regardless of the result of the prior identification processing for the special information acquired during the specific state. The gaming machine described in I2.

According to the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification can be forcibly restricted regardless of the result of the look-ahead processing. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the switching of the effect state during the execution of the specific notification. Further, since the execution restriction of the specific notification is not affected by the result of the look-ahead processing, the look-ahead processing can be advanced even in the specific state (during the waiting period of the specific notification) as in the case of the non-specific state. That is, since it is not necessary to change the configuration of the look-ahead process (pre-identification process), it is possible to limit the specific notification in the specific state while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature I4. The plurality of types of effect states include a first effect state (effect mode A) and a second effect state (effect mode B) in which the ease with which specific notification is executed is different from that of the first effect state. ,
Any of the features I1 to I3, wherein the limiting means can limit the execution of the specific notification when it is in the specific state at least for switching from the first effect state to the second effect state. The gaming machine described in Crab.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease with which the specific notification is executed differs depending on the production state, if the production state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, the degree of expectation suggested by the specific notification may differ before and after the switching of the production state. There is a risk. In this case, there is a concern that the expected degree suggested by the specific notification and the result of the grant determination actually notified in the effect state after switching may be inconsistent, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying any of the above-mentioned features I1 to I3 to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to preferably suppress giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

In addition, in the "second effect state in which the ease of executing the specific notification is different from the first effect state" in this feature, only the configuration in which the second effect state is set as the effect state in which the specific notification can be executed is required. However, it can be understood that the configuration in which the second effect state is set as the effect state in which the specific notification is not executed is also included.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to feature I4, wherein the second effect state is an effect state set so that specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first effect state.

When the ease with which the specific notification is executed in the second effect state is lower than that in the first effect state, if the specific notification is still executed and the first effect state is switched to the second effect state, the apparent expectation level is obtained. There is a concern that the player will be shown a higher degree of expectation than the actual one. In this respect, in this configuration, the ease with which the specific notification is executed is relatively high (the degree of expectation that the specific notification corresponds to is relatively low), and the ease with which the specific notification is executed is low from the first effect state (specific notification). The execution of the specific notification is restricted when it is a specific state for switching to the second effect state (where the corresponding expectation is relatively high). As a result, it is possible to suppress switching from the first effect state to the second effect state during the execution of the specific notification, and it is possible to preferably suppress the suggestion of a higher degree of expectation than the actual state.

In addition, in the present feature, "the second effect state is an effect state set so that the specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first effect state", the probability that the specific notification is executed in the second effect state. It can be understood that, in addition to the configuration in which is set to be lower than that in the first effect state, the configuration in which the second effect state is set as an effect state in which the specific notification is not executed is also included.

Feature I6. When the specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state is restricted by the limiting means, the specific means corresponding to the special information is executed after the specific state or after the effect state is switched (effect control). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized in that the device 143 includes a second setting process for the hold notice and a function for executing the first execution process for the hold notice).

In the above configuration, since the specific notification whose execution is restricted due to the specific state is executed after the specific state or after switching the effect state, the execution of the specific notification remains restricted for the special information acquired during the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inability to suggest the degree of expectation.

Feature I7. The specific means is based on the result of the prior identification process performed during the specific state for the special information whose execution of the specific notification is restricted by the limiting means, after the specific state or after the effect state is switched. The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a means for executing the process (a function of executing the process of step S8302).

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification after the change of the effect state is performed based on the pre-reading result performed during the specific state, the specific notification is executed without executing the pre-reading process again after the change of the effect state. be able to. As a result, the existing configuration can be used as it is for the look-ahead processing (pre-specifying processing), and the complexity of the configuration can be suppressed.

Feature I8. The specific means is the specific notification after the specific state or after the change of the effect state based on the result of the prior identification process performed during the specific state for the special information whose execution of the specific notification is restricted by the limiting means. Is provided with a specific determination means (a function of executing the process of step S8307) for determining whether or not to execute, and when it is determined to be executed by the specific determination means, the specific notification is executed.
The gaming machine according to feature I6 or feature I7, wherein the specific determination means makes the determination by applying a determination condition (execution winning probability) set corresponding to the effect state after switching.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific notification after the specific state or after the effect state is switched, and when it is determined to be executed, the specific notification is executed. At that time, in the above judgment, the judgment is not set according to the judgment condition when the special information is acquired (the judgment condition set corresponding to the effect state before switching), but the judgment set according to the effect state after switching. The condition applies. As a result, even if the easiness of executing the specific notification differs between the effect state before switching and the effect state after switching, it is possible to preferably perform the specific notification after the specific state or after the change of the effect state.

Feature I9. In the notification mode of the specific notification, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are arranged so that the degree of expectation for the given response result is different. ) Is set,
When the specific means executes the specific notification after the specific state or after the effect state is switched, the plurality of types of the specific means apply the lottery conditions (scenario lottery table, etc.) set corresponding to the effect state after the change. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, which comprises means for drawing any aspect from the aspects (a function of executing the process of steps S8310 to S8313).

In the above configuration, since a plurality of types of modes are set as the notification modes of the specific notification, it is possible to give a magnitude to the degree of expectation and suggest it, and it is possible to more preferably arouse the expectation of the player. Under such a configuration, when executing the specific notification after the specific state or after the change of the effect state, the lottery conditions set corresponding to the effect state after the change are applied to draw the notification mode. Even when the degree of expectation corresponding to each notification mode differs between the effect state before switching and the effect state after switching, it is possible to preferably perform the specific notification after the specific state or after the effect state is switched.

Feature I10. When special information is acquired during the specific state, predetermined information (waiting occurrence information) so that it can be grasped after the specific state that the acquired special information was acquired during the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I9, which is configured to store the information in a predetermined storage unit (holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344).

According to the above configuration, even when the special information acquired before the specific state and the special information acquired during the specific state are mixed after the specific state or after the change of the effect state, the predetermined storage unit is stored. It is possible to identify the special information acquired during the specific state based on the stored predetermined information. This makes it possible to distinguish between the special information acquired during the specific state and the special information that is not, and to process only the special information acquired during the specific state.

Feature I11. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the operation of the game rotation is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I10, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be capable of executing the specific notification across game times.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state are likely to overlap. By applying any of the above features I1 to I10 to such a configuration, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature I12. The game rounding operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is set and the game rounding operation is terminated once in the game round. As a result, a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process in the main control device 162) for controlling the operation of the game rotation is provided.
It is equipped with a hold notification means (a function of executing hold command correspondence processing in the effect control device 143) that performs hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold of the game times before execution.
The specific notification according to any one of features I1 to I11, wherein the notification mode of the holding notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode). Amusement machine.

When the specific notification is performed using the hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the effect state are likely to overlap. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the target such as the expectation degree suggested by the specific notification is, it is expected that the influence when the expected degree of expectation fluctuates with the switching of the production state is large. .. By applying any of the above-mentioned features I1 to I11 to such a structure, each of these features can be effectively functioned and each of the above-mentioned effects can be suitably exhibited.

For each configuration of the above features I1 to I12, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12, or to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. Is also possible. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature I group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature I group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol changes start due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine (ball-using rotating body-type gaming machine): Equipped with a variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol sequence at the final stop, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means. The fluctuation of the symbol is started, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means, or after a predetermined time elapses, and the game requires that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that generates a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and further provides a ball tray to perform a throwing process of taking in the game ball from the ball saucer, and paying out the game ball to the ball saucer. A gaming machine provided with a payout device to be performed, and configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown by the throwing device.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 62 ... 1st operating port, 63 ... 2nd operating port, 63a ... Fuden accessory, 65 ... Variable winning device, 75 ... Symbol display device, 143 ... Production control device, 162 ... Main control device, 200 ... Hold display unit, 314b ... Hold ball storage area, 344f ... Return area, D ... Execution display area, Ga ... First hold display area, Gb ... Second hold display area, HW ... Target hold image.

Claims (1)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and an acquisition information storage means.
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant that can grant the privilege to the player Means and
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination is obtained rather than the special information being the target of the grant determination. The destination identification means for executing the destination identification process to be specified at the previous timing,
A specific notification means capable of executing specific notification by a predetermined notification means based on the result of the prior identification process, and a specific notification means.
When a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, an effect state switching means for executing a process for switching from one effect state among a plurality of types of effect states to another effect state, and an effect state switching means.
A switching limiting means capable of restricting the switching of the effect state by the effect state switching means when the specific notification is being executed, and a switching limiting means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images